MY PEUGEOT 2008
HANDBOOK
Access to the Handbook
MOBILE APPLICATION ONLINE
Install the (content available Visit the website and select the Scan MyPeugeot App PEUGEOT offline). ‘MyPeugeot’ section to view or download the handbook or go to the following address:
http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/
Scan this QR Code for direct access.
Then select: – the vehicle, Select: – the issue period corresponding to the vehicle’s initial – the language, registration date. – the vehicle and body style, – the issue period of the handbook corresponding to the vehicle’s initial registration date.
This symbol indicates the latest information available.
Welcome Key
Safety warning Thank you for choosing a Peugeot 2008 or a Peugeot e-2008. This document presents the key information and recommendations required Additional information for you to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. We strongly
recommend familiarising yourself with this document and the Warranty and
Maintenance Record. Environmental protection feature Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in this
document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the Left-hand drive vehicle country in which it was sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are for guidance only.
Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, Right-hand drive vehicle equipment and accessories without having to update this guide.
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is Location of the equipment / button passed on to the new owner. described using a black area.
Contents
Overview ■ Heating and Ventilation 45 Hill Assist Descent Control 69 Manual air conditioning 46 Seat belts 71 Automatic air conditioning 46 Airbags 72 Eco-driving ■ Front demisting - defrosting 48 Child seats 75 Heated windscreen 49 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 77 Instruments 1 Rear screen demisting/defrosting 49 ISOFIX child seats 77 Remote-controlled heating and i-Size child seats 79 Instrument panels 9 air conditioning (Electric) 49 Installing child seats 79 Warning and indicator lamps 12 Interior fittings 50 Child lock 82 Indicators 19 Courtesy lamps 52 Manual test 23 Interior ambience lighting 53 Total distance recorder 23 Driving 6 Boot fittings 53 Lighting dimmer 23 Driving recommendations 84 Trip computer 24 Starting / Switching off the engine Touch screen 25 Lighting and visibility 4 with the key 86 Remotely operable features (Electric) 27 Exterior lighting control stalk 55 Starting / Switching off the engine Direction indicators 56 with Keyless Entry and Starting 87 Access 2 Headlamp beam height adjustment 57 Manual parking brake 89 Automatic illumination of headlamps 57 Electric parking brake 89 Remote control / Key 28 Guide-me-home and welcome lighting 58 6-speed manual gearbox 92 Proximity Keyless Entry and Start 30 Automatic headlamp dipping 58 Automatic gearbox (EAT6) 92 Central locking 32 Cornering lighting 59 Automatic gearbox (EAT8) 94 Back-up procedures 32 Wiper control stalk 60 Drive selector (Electric) 97 Doors 34 Changing a wiper blade 62 Driving modes 98 Boot 35 Automatic wipers 62 Hill start assist 98 Alarm 35 Gear efficiency indicator 99 Electric windows 37 Stop & Start 99 Sunroof 38 Safety 5 Under-inflation detection 101 General safety recommendations 64 Driving and manoeuvring aids - General Hazard warning lamps 64 Ease of use and comfort 3 recommendations 102 Horn 65 PEUGEOT i-Cockpit 40 Speed Limit Recognition Pedestrian horn (Electric) 65 Front seats 40 and Recommendation 104 Emergency or assistance call 65 Steering wheel adjustment 42 Speed limiter 107 Electronic stability control (ESC) 67 Mirrors 42 Cruise control - particular recommendations 109 Advanced Grip Control 69 Rear bench seat 43 Cruise control 109
2 Contents
Drive Assist Plus 111 In the event of a breakdown 8 PEUGEOT Connect Nav 11 Adaptive Cruise Control 111 Warning triangle 162 First steps 201 Active Lane Keeping Assist 114 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 162 Steering mounted controls 202 Active Lane Keeping Assistance 118 Tool kit 162 Menus 202 Active Blind Spot Monitoring System 121 Temporary puncture repair kit 164 Voice commands 204 Active Safety Brake with Distance Alert and Spare wheel 166 Navigation 207 Intelligent emergency braking assistance 122 Changing a bulb 169 Connected navigation 210 Distraction detection 125 Changing a fuse 171 Applications 212 Parking sensors 126 12 V battery / Accessory battery 176 Radio 215 Visiopark 1 127 Towing the vehicle 179 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 216 Park Assist 130 Media 217 Full Park Assist 133 Telephone 218 Technical data 9 Settings 221 Engine technical data and towed loads 181 Practical information Frequently asked questions 223 7 Petrol engines 182 Compatibility of fuels 138 Diesel engines 184 Refuelling 138 Electric motor 185 Alphabetical index ■ Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 139 Dimensions 186 Charging system (Electric) 139 Identification markings 186 Charging the traction battery (Electric) 143 Towing device 146 Towing device with quickly PEUGEOT Connect Radio 10 detachable towball 147 First steps 187 Roof bars 149 Steering mounted controls 188 Snow chains 150 Menus 189 Very cold climate screen 151 Applications 190 Energy economy mode 152 Radio 190 Access to additional videos Bonnet 152 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 192 Media 192 Engine compartment 153 Checking levels 154 Telephone 194 Checks 156 Settings 197 AdBlue® (BlueHDi) 158 Frequently asked questions 199
Free-wheeling 159 Advice on care and maintenance 160 bit.ly/helpPSA
3 Overview
Instruments and controls 1. Courtesy lamp/Front reading lamps 5. Storage compartment or Wireless Emergency and assistance call buttons smartphone charger These illustrations and descriptions are intended Sunroof 6. Storage compartment/12 V socket as a guide. The presence and location of certain Warning lamps display for seat belts and front 7. Gearbox or drive selector elements may vary, depending on the version or passenger airbag Full Park Assist trim level. 2. Interior rear view mirror 8. Electric parking brake 3. Instrument panel 9. Choice of driving mode 4. Fusebox Advanced Grip Control 5. Electric windows 10. Hill Assist Descent Control Electric door mirrors 6. Bonnet release Steering-mounted controls
7. Front passenger airbag 8. Glove box
1. Exterior lighting controls/Direction indicators/ Service indicator
2. Wiper controls/Screenwash/Trip computer 1. Touch screen 3. Automatic gearbox control paddles 2. Switching the engine on/off 4. Audio system controls 3. Central controls A. Select the instrument panel display mode 4. USB socket(s)
4 Overview
B. Voice commands Central controls Electric motor
C. Decrease/Increase volume D. Select previous/next media Confirm a selection
E. Access the Telephone menu Manage calls F. Select an audio source G. Display the list of radio stations/audio tracks 5. Horn/Driver front airbag 6. Cruise control/speed limiter/Adaptive Cruise Control 1. Heated seats
Side controls 2. Access the touch screen menus 3. Touch screen on/off/Adjust volume 1. Charging connectors 4. Interior air recirculation 2. Traction battery 5. Air conditioning off 3. Accessory battery
6. Maximum air conditioning 4. Heat pump 7. Hazard warning lamps 5. On-board charger 8. Central locking 6. Electric motor 9. Front demisting/defrosting 7. Charging cable with integrated control unit 10. Rear screen defrosting 1. Halogen or LED technology headlamp beam The charging connectors 1 enable 3 types of height adjustment charging: 2. Active lane departure warning system – Domestic charging, via a mains power socket 3. Lane positioning assist and the supplied cable 7. 4. Heated windscreen – Accelerated charging, using a Wallbox 5. Alarm accelerated charging unit and the corresponding 6. Electric child lock cable. – Fast charging, using a fast public charger and the corresponding cable. The 400 V traction battery 2 uses Lithium-Ion technology. It stores and subsequently supplies electric energy to power the electric motor,
5 Overview
heating and air conditioning systems. Its charge level is represented by bars on a gauge, and there is a reserve power warning lamp on the instrument panel. The 12 V accessory battery 3 powers the vehicle’s conventional electrical system. It is used to start the electric motor. This battery is automatically recharged by the traction battery. The heat pump 4 provides passenger compartment heating and regulates traction battery and on-board charger cooling. The on-board charger 5 manages traction battery domestic and accelerated charging. The electric motor 6 provides motive power, based on the selected driving mode and the driving conditions. It recovers energy during vehicle braking and deceleration phases.
6 Eco-driving
Eco-driving Control the use of electrical equipment bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use a Before moving off, if the passenger compartment roof box. Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. practices that allow the motorist to optimise their and air vents before using the air conditioning. At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit energy consumption (fuel and/or electricity) and At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the summer tyres. CO emissions. 2 windows and leave the air vents open. Comply with the servicing instructions Optimise your use of the gearbox Consider using equipment that can help keep Check tyre pressures regularly, with the tyres With a manual gearbox, move off gently and the temperature in the passenger compartment cold, referring to the label in the door aperture on change up promptly. While accelerating, change down (sunroof blind and window blinds, etc.). the driver's side. up early. Unless automatically regulated, switch off the air Carry out this check in particular: With an automatic gearbox, favour automatic conditioning as soon as the desired temperature – before a long journey. mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal has been reached. – at each change of season. heavily or suddenly. Switch off the demisting and defrosting functions, – after a long period out of use. The gear shift indicator prompts you to engage if they are not managed automatically. Do not forget the spare wheel and, where the most suitable gear: whenever this indication Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. applicable, the tyres on your trailer or caravan. is displayed on the instrument panel, follow it Switch off the headlamps and foglamps when Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, straight away. the visibility conditions do not require their use. oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment filter, With an automatic gearbox, this indicator Avoid running the engine before moving off, etc.)and observe the schedule of operations in appears only in manual mode. particularly in winter (other than in severe wintry the manufacturer's service schedule. Drive smoothly conditions: temperature below -23°C); your With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system vehicle will warm up much faster while driving. Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use is faulty, your vehicle will emit pollution. Visit As a passenger, avoid connecting your engine braking rather than the brake pedal and a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop multimedia devices (film, music, video game, press the accelerator gradually. These practices as soon as possible to restore your vehicle's etc.) to help reduce consumption of energy. help to save on energy consumption, reduce nitrogen oxide emissions to legal levels. Disconnect all portable devices before leaving CO emissions and decrease general traffic When filling the fuel tank, do not continue after 2 the vehicle. noise. the third cut-out of the nozzle, to avoid overflow. If the vehicle has the steering-mounted Limit the causes of excess consumption You will only see the fuel consumption of your "CRUISE" control, use cruise control at speeds Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the new vehicle settle down to a consistent average above 25 mph (40 km/h) when traffic is flowing heaviest items in the boot, as close as possible after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres). smoothly. to the rear seats. Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and minimise wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack,
7 Eco-driving
Optimise the driving range (electric vehicles) The vehicle’s electrical consumption depends heavily on the route, the vehicle speed and your driving style. Try to remain in the "ECO" zone on the power indicator, by driving smoothly and maintaining a steady speed. Anticipate the need to slow down, and brake smoothly, whenever possible using engine braking with the regenerative braking function, which will move the power indicator into the "CHARGE" zone.
8 Instruments
LCD instrument panel 5. Fuel gauge 5. Fuel gauge (Petrol or Diesel) 1 6. Engine oil level indicator (depending on Charge level indicator (Electric) Dials engine) Service indicator, then total distance recorder Matrix display
(miles or km) These functions are displayed in turn when the ignition is switched on.
7. Trip computer information 1. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h) 2. LCD display 3. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm), graduation Matrix instrument panel depends on the engine (Petrol or Diesel)
Dials
LCD display
1. Cruise control / speed limiter settings Coolant temperature indicator (°C) (Petrol or 1. Display of speed limit signs Diesel)
2. Gear shift indicator (arrow and recommended Thermal comfort consumption indicator gear) 1. Cruise control/speed limiter settings (Electric) Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) Selector position and gear on automatic 2. 2. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h) Driving mode selected gearbox (Petrol or Diesel) 3. 3. Matrix display Gear shift indicator Drive selector position (Electric) 4. 4. Rev counter (x 1000 rpm), graduation Selector position and gear on automatic depends on the engine (Petrol or Diesel) gearbox Power indicator (Electric)
9 Instruments
3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) 1. Fuel gauge (Petrol or Diesel) • Information related to the gearbox and gear Customising the instrument Display of driving aids Charge level indicator (Electric) shift indicator (Petrol or Diesel). panel Trip computer information 2. Remaining range (miles or km) • Information related to the Drive selector Depending on version, the appearance of the Power flow / vehicle charge state (Electric) 3. Cruise control/speed limiter settings position (Electric). instrument panel may be customisable (colour 4. Service indicator, then total distance recorder Display of speed limit signs • Fuel gauge (Petrol or Diesel). and/or display mode). (miles or km) 4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) • Range (Petrol or Diesel). Remaining range (Electric) 5. Total distance recorder (miles or km) • Coolant temperature indicator (Petrol or Display language and units These functions are displayed in turn when 6. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm) (Petrol or Diesel) Diesel). These depend on the touch screen the ignition is switched on. Power indicator (Electric) • Charge level and range indicator (Electric). settings. Driving mode selected (other than "Normal" 7. Gear shift indicator (arrow and recommended • Power indicator (Electric). When travelling abroad, the speed must be mode) gear) • Driving mode. shown in the official units of the country you Selector position and gear on automatic – in variable locations: are driving in (mph, miles or km/h, km). gearbox (Petrol or Diesel) • Digital speedometer. • Total distance recorder. Digital instrument panel Drive selector position (Electric) As a safety measure, these adjustments • Status or alert messages displayed This head-up 3D digital instrument panel can be Driving mode selected (other than "Normal" must be carried out with the vehicle temporarily. customised. mode) stationary. Depending on the display mode selected, certain 8. Coolant temperature indicator (°C) (Petrol or Optional information information is hidden or presented differently. Diesel) Depending on the display mode selected and the Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h) (Petrol Choosing the display colour Example with the "DIALS" display mode: 9. active features, additional information may be or Diesel) displayed: (With PEUGEOT Connect Nav) – Rev counter (Petrol or Diesel). Depending on version, the instrument panel Displays – Trip computer. display colour depends on the colour scheme chosen in this system. Some lamps have a fixed location, others can – Driving aid functions. ► Press Settings in the banner of the change location. – Speed limiter or cruise control. – Media currently playing. touch screen. For certain functions that have indicator lamps ► Select "Color schemes". for both operation and deactivation, there is only – Navigation instructions. ► Select a display colour and then press one dedicated location. – Analogue speedometer. – Engine information (G-meters, Power-meters, "OK" to confirm. Permanent information Boost, Torque) in Sport mode. Choosing the display mode In the standard display, the instrument panel – Power flow (Electric). shows: In each mode, specific types of information are – in fixed locations: displayed on the instrument panel.
10 Instruments
Customising the instrument Changing the display mode – "MINIMAL": 2D display with digital speedometer, total distance recorder and: 1 panel • fuel gauge and coolant temperature indicator Depending on version, the appearance of the (Petrol or Diesel). instrument panel may be customisable (colour • battery charge indicator (Electric). and/or display mode). – "ÉNERGIE": specific display, showing a visual Display language and units representation of the vehicle’s energy flows These depend on the touch screen (Electric). settings. – "PERSONAL 1"/"PERSONAL 2": displays the When travelling abroad, the speed must be information selected by the driver in the centre of shown in the official units of the country you the instrument panel. are driving in (mph, miles or km/h, km). Configuring a "PERSONAL" display mode
► Turn the thumbwheel on the left of the With PEUGEOT Connect Radio As a safety measure, these adjustments steering wheel to display and scroll through the ► Press Settings in the banner of the must be carried out with the vehicle various modes on the instrument panel. touch screen. stationary. ► Press the thumbwheel to confirm the mode. ► Select "Configuration". If you do not press the thumbwheel, the selected ► Select " Choosing the display colour display mode is automatically applied after a few Instrument panel moments. personalisation". (With PEUGEOT Connect Nav) With PEUGEOT Connect Nav Depending on version, the instrument panel Presentation of display modes ► Press Settings in the banner of the – " ": standard display of analogue and display colour depends on the colour scheme DIALS touch screen. chosen in this system. digital speedometers, total distance recorder ► Select "OPTIONS". ► Press in the banner of the and: Settings ► Select "Instrument panel touch screen. • fuel gauge, coolant temperature indicator personalisation". ► Select " ". and rev counter (Petrol or Diesel). Color schemes ► Select "PERSONAL 1" or "PERSONAL 2". • battery charge indicator and power indicator ► Select a display colour and then press ► Select the type of information using the scroll (Electric). "OK" to confirm. arrows on the touch screen: – NAVIGATION": specific display, showing • "Default" (empty). Choosing the display mode the current navigation information (map and • "Trip computer". In each mode, specific types of information are instructions). • "Media". displayed on the instrument panel. – "DRIVING": specific display, showing the • "G-metres" (depending on version). information relating to active driving aid systems.
11 Instruments
• "Power meters + Boost + Torque" When the ignition is switched on List of warning and (depending on version). Certain red or orange warning lamps come on indicator lamps • "Energy consumption" (depending on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched version). on. These warning lamps should go off as soon Red warning/indicator lamps ► Confirm to save and exit. as the engine is started. The information is displayed immediately on the STOP For more information on a system or a function, Fixed, associated with another warning instrument panel if the corresponding display refer to the corresponding section. lamp, accompanied by the display of a mode is selected. message and an audible signal. The type of information selected in the Warning lamp continuously A serious fault with the engine, braking system, "PERSONAL 1" mode is not available in lit power steering, automatic gearbox or a major the "PERSONAL 2" mode. The illumination of a red or orange warning lamp electrical fault has been detected. indicates the occurrence of a fault that needs Carry out (1) and then (2). further investigation. Engine self-diagnostics system (Petrol or Warning and indicator If a warning lamp remains lit Diesel) Fixed. lamps The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning A major engine fault has been and indicator lamp description indicate whether Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator detected. you should contact a qualified professional in lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a Carry out (1) and then (2). malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating addition to the immediate recommended actions. Maximum engine coolant temperature status of a system (operation or deactivation (1): You must stop the vehicle. Fixed with display blocks lit in red indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off (with matrix instrument panel). ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours. the ignition. (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified or Associated warnings workshop. Fixed (except on matrix instrument panel). The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied (3): Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The cooling system temperature is too high. by an audible signal and/or a message displayed workshop. Carry out (1), then allow the engine to cool in a screen. before topping up the level, if necessary. If the Relating the type of alert to the operating status problem persists, carry out (2). of the vehicle allows you to determine whether Engine oil pressure (Petrol or Diesel) the situation is normal or whether a fault has Fixed. occurred: refer to the description of each lamp There is a fault with the engine lubrication for further information. system.
12 Instruments
Carry out (1) and then (2). Door(s) open Braking System malfunction (Electric) Fixed, associated with a message Fixed. 1 Fixed. identifying the access. The brake fluid level in the braking circuit An anomaly involving the electric motor or A door or the tailgate is not properly closed has dropped significantly. traction battery has been detected. (speed less than 6 mph (10 km/h)). Carry out (1), then top up with fluid that complies Carry out (1) and then (2). Fixed, associated with a message with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the identifying the access, accompanied by problem persists, carry out (2). Cable connected (Electric) an audible signal. Fixed. Fixed. A door or the tailgate is not properly closed The electronic brake force It is not possible to start the vehicle while (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). distribution (EBFD) system is faulty. the charging cable is connected to the vehicle’s Carry out (1) and then (2). connector. Seat belts not fastened/unfastened Disconnect the charging cable and close the Fixed or flashing, accompanied by an Orange warning/indicator lamps increasing audible signal. flap. Service A seat belt has not been fastened or has been 12 V battery charge Temporarily on, accompanied by the unfastened. Fixed. display of a message. The battery charging circuit has a fault Manual parking brake One or more minor faults, for which there is/are (dirty terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, etc.). Fixed. no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. Carry out (1). The parking brake is applied or not Identify the cause of the fault using the message If the electric parking brake is no longer working, properly released. displayed in the instrument panel. immobilise the vehicle: Electric parking brake You can deal with certain problems yourself, for ► With the manual gearbox, engage a gear. Fixed. example an open door or the start of saturation ► With the EAT6 automatic gearbox, move the The electric parking brake is applied. of the particle filter. gear selector to position P. Flashing. For other faults, such as with the tyre under- ► With the EAT8 automatic gearbox or drive Application/release is faulty. inflation detection system, carry out (3). selector, fit the chock against one of the wheels. Carry out (1): park on flat ground (on a level Fixed, accompanied by the display of a Clean and tighten the terminals. If the warning surface). message. lamp does not go off when the engine is started, With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. One or more major faults, for which there is/are carry out (2). With an automatic gearbox or drive selector, no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. select mode P. Identify the cause of the fault using the message Switch off the ignition and carry out (2). displayed in the instrument panel, then carry out (3). Fixed, accompanied by the message
13 Instruments
"Parking brake fault". As soon as traffic conditions permit, regenerate Low traction battery level (Electric) Automatic release of the electric parking brake is the filter by driving at a speed of at least 37 mph Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal. unavailable. (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off. The state of charge of the traction battery Carry out (2). Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal is low. Service warning lamp fixed and and a message indicating that the View the remaining range. service spanner flashing then additive level in the particle filter is too low. Put the vehicle on charge as soon as possible. fixed. The low level in the additive tank has been Limited power (Electric) The servicing interval has been exceeded. reached. Fixed. The vehicle must be serviced as soon as Top up without delay: carry out (3). The state of charge of the traction battery possible. Low fuel level (Petrol or Diesel) is critical. Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines. Fixed, with the blocks lit red, The engine power gradually decreases. Engine pre-heating (Diesel) accompanied by an audible signal You must put the vehicle on charge. Temporarily on (with the matrix instrument panel) If the warning lamp remains lit, carry out (2). (up to approximately 30 seconds in or Pedestrian horn (Electric) severe weather conditions). Fixed, with the reserve level shown in red, Fixed. When switching on the ignition, if the weather accompanied by an audible signal and the Horn fault detected. conditions and the engine temperature make it display of a message (except with the matrix Carry out (3). necessary. instrument panel). Engine self-diagnostics system (Petrol or Wait until the warning lamp goes off before When it first comes on, there remains Diesel) starting. approximately 5 litres of fuel in the tank Flashing. When the warning lamp goes off, starting will (reserve). The engine management system has a occur immediately if you press and hold: Until the fuel level is topped up, this alert will fault. – the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox. be repeated every time the ignition is switched There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be – the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. on, with increasing frequency as the fuel level destroyed. If the engine does not start, make the engine decreases and approaches zero. You must carry out (2). starting request again, while keeping your foot Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel. Fixed. on the pedal. Never drive until completely empty, as The emissions control system has a fault. this could damage the emissions control and Particle filter (Diesel) The warning lamp should go off when the engine injection systems. Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal is started. and a message about the risk of particle Carry out (3) without delay. filter blockage. The particle filter is nearing saturation.
14 Instruments
Fixed. SCR emissions control system (BlueHDi) Deactivation of the automatic functions A minor engine fault has been Fixed when the ignition is (with electric parking brake) 1 detected. switched on, accompanied Fixed. Carry out (3). by an audible signal and a message. The "automatic application" (on switching AdBlue® (BlueHDi) A malfunction involving the SCR emissions off the engine) and "automatic release" (on On for around 30 seconds when starting control system has been detected. acceleration) functions are deactivated. the vehicle, accompanied by a message This alert disappears once the exhaust If automatic application/release is no longer indicating the driving range. emissions return to normal levels. possible: ® The driving range is between 1,500 and 500 Flashing AdBlue warning ► Start the engine. miles (2,400 and 800 km). lamp on switching on the ► Use the control lever to apply the parking Top up the AdBlue®. ignition, with the Service and Engine self- brake. Fixed, on switching on the ignition, diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. accompanied by an audible signal and a accompanied by an audible signal and a ► Hold the control lever pressed in the release message indicating the driving range. message indicating the driving range. direction for between 10 and 15 seconds. The driving range is between 500 and 62 miles Depending on the message displayed, it may be ► Release the control lever. (800 and 100 km). possible to drive for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) ► Depress and hold the brake pedal. Promptly top up the AdBlue®, or carry out (3). before the engine immobiliser is triggered. ► Hold the control lever in the “Application” Flashing, accompanied by an audible Carry out (3) without delay, to avoid starting direction for 2 seconds. signal and a message indicating the being prevented. ► Release the control lever and the brake ® driving range. Flashing AdBlue warning pedal. The driving range is less than 62 miles (100 km). lamp on switching on the Malfunction (with electric parking brake) You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid engine ignition, with the Service and Engine self- Fixed, accompanied by the starting being prevented, or carry out (3). diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, message "Parking brake fault". Flashing, accompanied by an audible accompanied by an audible signal and a The vehicle cannot be immobilised with the signal and a message indicating that message indicating that starting is prevented. engine running. starting is prevented. The engine immobiliser prevents the engine If manual application and release commands are The AdBlue® tank is empty: the regulatory engine from restarting (over the authorised driving limit not working, the electric parking brake control immobiliser prevents the engine from being after confirmation of an emissions control system lever is faulty. restarted. malfunction). The automatic functions must be used at all To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue®, or To start the engine, carry out (2). times and are automatically re-enabled in the carry out (2). event of a control lever fault. You must add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® to its Carry out (2). tank. Fixed, accompanied by the
15 Instruments
message "Parking brake fault". If these warning lamps come on after the engine Emergency brake malfunction (with The parking brake is faulty: manual and is switched off and then restarted, carry out (3). electric parking brake) automatic functions may not be working. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Fixed, accompanied by the When stationary, to immobilise the vehicle: Fixed. message "Parking brake fault". ► Pull and hold the control lever for The anti-lock braking system has a fault. Emergency braking does not deliver optimal approximately 7 to 15 seconds, until the indicator The vehicle retains conventional braking. performance. lamp comes on on the instrument panel. Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry If automatic release is not available, use manual If this procedure does not work, secure the out (3). release or carry out (3). vehicle: Power steering Hill start assist ► Park on a level surface. Fixed. Fixed, accompanied by the ► With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. The power steering has a fault. message "Anti roll-back system ► With an automatic gearbox or drive selector, Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry fault". select P, then place the supplied chock against out (3). The system has a fault. one of the wheels. Carry out (3). Then carry out (2). Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip regulation (ASR) Active Lane Keeping Assistance Distance Alert / Active Safety Brake Fixed. Fixed. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a The system is deactivated. The system has been automatically message. The DSC/ASR system is reactivated deactivated or placed on standby. The system has been deactivated via the touch automatically when the vehicle is restarted, and Flashing. screen ( Driving/ Vehiclemenu). from around 31 mph (50 km/h). You are about to cross a broken Distance Alert/Active Safety Brake Below 31 mph (50 km/h), it can be reactivated lane marking without operating the direction Flashing. manually. indicators. The system activates and brakes the Flashing. The system is activated, then corrects the vehicle momentarily so as to reduce the speed of The DSC/ASR adjustment is activated if trajectory on the side of the lane marking collision with the vehicle ahead. there is a loss of grip or trajectory. detected. Fixed, accompanied by a message and Fixed. Fixed. an audible signal. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. The system has a fault. The system has a fault. Carry out (3). Carry out (3). Carry out (3). Lane positioning assist Distance Alert / Active Safety Brake Fixed, accompanied by the Fixed. Service warning lamp. The system has a fault. The system has a fault.
16 Instruments
Carry out (3). Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting Green warning/indicator lamps the pressure. 1 Airbags Hill Assist Descent Control Under-inflation warning lamp Fixed. Fixed. flashing then fixed and Service One of the airbags or seat belt (grey) warning lamp fixed. pretensioners is faulty. The function has been activated, but is currently The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty. Carry out (3). paused because the speed is too high. Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored. Front passenger airbag (ON) Reduce the vehicle speed to below 19 mph Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible Fixed. (30 km/h). and carry out (3). The front passenger airbag is activated. Fixed. The control is in the "ON" position. Stop & Start (Petrol or Diesel) The system has been activated, but the In this case, do NOT install a "rearward Fixed, accompanied by the display of a conditions for regulation are not met (gradient, facing" child seat on the front passenger seat message. speed too high, gear engaged). - Risk of serious injury! The Stop & Start system has been deactivated Flashing. manually. Front passenger airbag (OFF) The function is regulating the speed of The engine will not switch off at the next traffic Fixed. the vehicle. stop. The front passenger airbag is deactivated. The vehicle is being braked; the brake lamps Fixed. The control is in the "OFF" position. come on during the descent. The Stop & Start system has been A "rearward facing" child seat can be installed, Stop & Start (Petrol or Diesel) deactivated automatically. unless there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags Fixed. The engine will not switch off at the next traffic warning lamp on). When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start stop, if the exterior temperature is: puts the engine into STOP mode. Parking sensors – below 0°C. Flashing temporarily. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a – above +35°C. STOP mode is momentarily unavailable message and an audible signal. Flashing then fixed, accompanied by a or START mode is automatically triggered. The system has a fault. message. Carry out (3). The system has a fault. Vehicle ready to drive (Electric) Under-inflation Carry out (3). Fixed, accompanied by an audible Fixed. Rear foglamps signal when it comes on. The pressure in one or more tyres is too Fixed. The vehicle is ready to drive and the thermal low. The lamps are on. comfort systems are available. Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
17 Instruments
The indicator lamp goes out upon reaching a Dipped beam headlamps Foot on the brake Indicators speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and lights up again when the vehicle stops moving. Fixed. Fixed. The lamp will go out when you turn off the The lamps are on. Omission or insufficient pressure on Service indicator engine and exit the vehicle. Automatic headlamp dipping the brake pedal. The servicing information is expressed in terms With the EAT6 automatic gearbox, with the of distance (kilometres or miles) and time Park Assist or Full Park Assist Fixed. engine running, before releasing the parking (months or days). Fixed. The function has been brake, to move out of position P. The alert is given at whichever of these two The function is active. activated via the touch screen (Driving / Vehicle With the EAT8 automatic gearbox or the drive terms is reached first. menu). selector, it may be necessary to depress the The servicing information is displayed in the Active Lane Keeping Assist The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO" brake pedal to unlock the gearbox from mode N. instrument panel. Depending on the version of Fixed. position. This warning lamp will remain on if you attempt the vehicle: The function has been activated. Front foglamps to release the parking brake without depressing – The distance recorder display line indicates All the conditions have been met: the system is the brake pedal. the distance remaining before the next service operating. Fixed. Automatic gearbox (EAT8) or Drive is due, or the distance travelled since it was due The front foglamps are on. selector (Electric) preceded by the "-" sign. Automatic wiping – An alert message indicates the distance Blue warning/indicator lamps remaining, as well as the period before the next Fixed. Fixed. Main beam headlamps service is due or how long it is overdue. Automatic windscreen wiping is The automatic gearbox is locked. The drive selector is locked. activated. The value indicated is calculated Fixed. You must press the Unlock button to unlock it. Direction indicators The lamps are on. according to the distance covered and Water in Diesel fuel filter (Diesel) the time elapsed since the last service. Black/white warning lamps Flashing with audible signal. The alert may also be triggered close to a Fixed (with LCD instrument panels). The direction indicators are on. Foot on the clutch (Petrol or Diesel) due date. The Diesel fuel filter contains water. Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps Fixed (with LCD instrument panels). Carry out (2) without delay. Risk of damaging the Service spanner Stop & Start: the change to START mode Fixed. fuel injection system! On temporarily when the ignition is is rejected because the clutch pedal is not fully With adequate ambient light, the switched on. depressed. daytime running lamps are on. Between 620 and 1,860 miles (1,000 and 3,000 Fully depress the clutch pedal. With inadequate ambient light, the sidelamps km) remain before the next service is due. are on. Fixed, when the ignition is switched on. The next service is due in less than 620 miles (1,000 km).
18 Instruments
Indicators Have your vehicle serviced very soon. Reminder of the servicing information Service spanner flashing You can view the servicing information by 1 Service indicator Flashing then fixed, when the pressing the "Check" button in the ignition is switched on. Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu. The servicing information is expressed in terms (With BlueHDi Diesel engines, combined with the of distance (kilometres or miles) and time Service warning lamp.) Engine oil level indicator (months or days). The servicing interval has been exceeded. (Depending on version.) The alert is given at whichever of these two Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. On versions fitted with an electric gauge, the terms is reached first. engine oil level status is displayed on the The servicing information is displayed in the Resetting the service indicator instrument panel for a few seconds when the instrument panel. Depending on the version of The service indicator must be reset after each ignition is switched on, after the servicing the vehicle: service. information. – The distance recorder display line indicates If you have serviced your vehicle yourself: the distance remaining before the next service The level read will only be correct if the ► Switch off the ignition. is due, or the distance travelled since it was due vehicle is on level ground and the engine preceded by the "-" sign. has been off for more than 30 minutes. – An alert message indicates the distance remaining, as well as the period before the next Oil level incorrect service is due or how long it is overdue. This is indicated, depending on the instrument
The value indicated is calculated panel, by the display of "OIL" or by the message according to the distance covered and ► Press and hold the button located on the end "Oil level incorrect", accompanied by the the time elapsed since the last service. of the lighting control stalk. lighting of the Service warning lamp and an The alert may also be triggered close to a ► With no action on the brake pedal, press the audible signal. due date. START/STOP button once; a temporary display If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using window appears and a countdown begins. the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid Service spanner ► When the display indicates =0, release the damage to the engine. On temporarily when the ignition is lighting control stalk button; the spanner symbol For more information on Checking levels, refer switched on. disappears. to the corresponding section. Between 620 and 1,860 miles (1,000 and 3,000 If you disconnect the battery following Gauge fault km) remain before the next service is due. this operation, lock the vehicle and wait This is indicated, depending on the instrument Fixed, when the ignition is switched on. at least 5 minutes for the reset to be panel, by the display of "OIL_ _" or by the The next service is due in less than 620 registered. message "Oil level measurement invalid", miles (1,000 km).
19 Instruments
accompanied by the lighting of the Service You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is It is then no longer possible to start the warning lamp and an audible signal. safe to do so. engine until the minimum level of AdBlue® has Warning Action Remaining Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Wait a few minutes before switching off the been topped up. lamps lit driving workshop. engine. range
In the event of a fault with the electric After switching off the ignition, carefully Manual display of the range Top up. Between gauge, the oil level is no longer open the bonnet and check the coolant While the driving range is greater than 1,500 miles
monitored. level. 1,500 miles (2,400 km), it is not displayed and 500 If the system is faulty, you must check the automatically. miles (2,400 engine oil level using the manual dipstick For more information on Checking You can view the range information by km and located under the bonnet. levels, refer to the corresponding pressing the "Check" button in 800 km)
For more information on Checking levels, section. the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu. refer to the corresponding section. Top up as Between soon as 500 miles ® Actions required related to a lack of AdBlue range indicators AdBlue® possible. and 62 miles Engine coolant temperature (800 km and The following warning lamps light up when the (BlueHDi) 100 km) indicator quantity of AdBlue® is lower than the reserve
The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with
a system that associates the SCR (Selective level corresponding to a range of 1,500 miles A top-up is Between Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system (2,400 km). essential, 62 miles and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the Together with the warning lamps, messages due to the and 0 miles regularly remind you of the need to top up to risk that the (100 km and
treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot function without AdBlue® fluid. avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to engine will 0 km) When the level of AdBlue® falls below the the Warning and indicator lamps section for be prevented reserve level (between 1,500 and 0 miles (2,400 details of the messages displayed. from starting. and 0 km)), a warning lamp lights up when For more information on AdBlue® To be able 0 miles (km) the ignition is switched on and an estimate (BlueHDi engines), and in particular on to restart With the engine running: of the distance that can be travelled before topping up, refer to the corresponding section. the engine, – In zone A, the temperature is correct. engine starting is prevented is displayed in the add at least
– In zone B, the temperature is too high; the instrument panel. 5 litres of associated warning lamp and the central STOP ® The engine starting prevention system AdBlue to warning lamp come on in red on the instrument its tank. panel, accompanied by the display of a message required by regulations is activated ® and an audible signal. automatically once the AdBlue tank is empty.
20 Instruments
Malfunction of the SCR emissions While driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds. The alert is repeated when switching 1 Warning Action Remaining control system on the ignition. lamps lit driving Malfunction detection You can continue driving for up to 685 miles range (1,100 km) before the engine immobiliser If a malfunction is detected, Top up. Between these warning lamps come on, system is triggered. 1,500 miles accompanied by an audible and 500 Have the system checked by a signal and an "Emissions fault” miles (2,400 PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified or “NO START IN” message. km and workshop as soon as possible.
800 km)
Starting prevented Top up as Between The alert is triggered while driving, when the Whenever the ignition is switched on, the soon as 500 miles fault is detected for the first time, and thereafter "Emissions fault: Starting prevented" or "NO possible. and 62 miles when switching on the ignition for subsequent START IN" message is displayed. (800 km and journeys, while the cause of the fault persists. 100 km) To be able to restart the engine, contact If the fault is temporary, the alert a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified A top-up is Between disappears during the next journey, after workshop. essential, 62 miles self-diagnostic checks of the SCR emissions due to the and 0 miles control system. risk that the (100 km and
Power indicator (Electric) engine will 0 km) Malfunction confirmed during the be prevented permitted driving phase (between 685 from starting. miles and 0 miles (1,100 km and 0 km))
To be able 0 miles (km) If the fault indication is still displayed to restart permanently after 31 miles (50 km) of driving, the the engine, fault in the SCR system is confirmed. add at least The AdBlue warning lamp flashes, and an
5 litres of "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in X ® AdBlue to miles" or "NO START IN X miles" message is its tank. displayed, indicating the driving range in miles or CHARGE kilometres. Traction battery charging during deceleration and braking.
21 Instruments
ECO With the ignition off, opening the driver's Thermal comfort thermal comfort consumption indicator then Moderate energy consumption and optimised door activates the indicator. moves into the "ECO" zone. driving range. consumption indicator To quickly heat or cool the passenger POWER (Electric)
Associated warning lamps compartment, feel free to temporarily Energy consumption by the drive train during select the maximum heating or cooling acceleration. Two successive alert levels indicate that the setting. NEUTRAL energy available has dropped to a low level: Excessive use of thermal comfort equipment, On switching on the ignition, your vehicle’s 1st level: Reserve particularly at low speed, can significantly electric drive train neither consumes nor The state of charge of the traction battery decrease the vehicle's range. generates energy: after sweeping over the is low. Remember to optimise equipment settings indicator, the needle or the cursor returns to its Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal. upon achieving the desired level of comfort, "neutral" position. ► View the remaining range on the instrument panel. and adjust them if necessary whenever you With the ignition off, opening the driver's ► Put the vehicle on charge as soon as start the vehicle. The gauge shows the consumption of electric door activates the indicator, which moves possible. After an extended period without using the power for thermal comfort functions. to the "neutral" position. 2nd level: Critical heating, you may notice a slight odour during It concerns the following equipment and The state of charge of the traction battery the first few minutes of use. systems: is critical. Charge level indicator – Heating. Fixed, together with the reserve warning lamp, – Air conditioning. (Electric) accompanied by an audible signal. Manual test – Front demisting/defrosting. ► You must put the vehicle on charge. – Rear screen demisting/defrosting. This function allows you to check certain The remaining range is no longer – Heated seats. indicators and display the alerts log. calculated. The drive train power The traction battery powers the heating and air It can be accessed via the "Check" button gradually decreases. conditioning systems. in the Driving/Vehicle touch screen The heating and air conditioning are switched This equipment and these functions can be menu. off (even if the needle or cursor indicating used: The following information is displayed on the their consumption is not at the ECO position). – If the vehicle is not plugged in, when the instrument panel: READY lamp is lit. – Engine oil level.
– If the vehicle is plugged in, when the ignition is – Next service due. The traction battery charge status and remaining switched on. – Tyre pressures. range are displayed continuously when the Selecting Eco mode limits the performance of – Driving range associated with the AdBlue and vehicle is started. some equipment. The needle or cursor on the the SCR system (BlueHDi Diesel). – Current alerts.
22 Instruments thermal comfort consumption indicator then This information is also displayed With PEUGEOT Connect moves into the "ECO" zone. automatically every time the ignition is 1 switched on. Radio To quickly heat or cool the passenger ► Press this button to select the compartment, feel free to temporarily Settings menu. select the maximum heating or cooling ► Select "Brightness". setting. Total distance recorder Excessive use of thermal comfort equipment, The total distance recorder measures the total ► Adjust the brightness by pressing the particularly at low speed, can significantly distance travelled by the vehicle since its initial arrows or moving the slider. decrease the vehicle's range. registration. The settings are applied immediately. Remember to optimise equipment settings With the ignition on, the total distance is ► Press outside the settings window to exit. upon achieving the desired level of comfort, displayed at all times. It remains displayed for You can also switch off the screen: and adjust them if necessary whenever you 30 seconds after switching off the ignition. It is ► Press this button to select the start the vehicle. displayed when the driver's door is opened, and Settings menu. After an extended period without using the when the vehicle is locked or unlocked. ► Select "Dark". heating, you may notice a slight odour during When travelling abroad, you may have to the first few minutes of use. change the distance units (km or miles): The screen goes off completely. the road speed must be displayed in the local ► Press the screen again (anywhere on its country’s official unit (km/h or mph). surface) to activate it. Manual test The unit is changed via the screen This function allows you to check certain configuration menu, with the vehicle WithPEUGEOT Connect Nav indicators and display the alerts log. stationary. ► Press this button to select the It can be accessed via the "Check" button Settings menu. in the Driving/Vehicle touch screen ► Select "OPTIONS". menu. Lighting dimmer ► Select "Screen configuration". The following information is displayed on the This system allows the brightness of the instrument panel: ► Select the "Brightness" tab. instruments and controls to be adjusted to suit – Engine oil level. ► Adjust the brightness by pressing the the ambient light level. – Next service due. arrows or moving the slider. – Tyre pressures. ► Press this button to save and exit. – Driving range associated with the AdBlue and the SCR system (BlueHDi Diesel). You can also switch off the screen: – Current alerts.
23 Instruments
► Press this button to select the This value may vary following a change in Distance travelled Settings menu. the style of driving or the terrain, resulting (miles or km) ► Select "Turn off screen". in a significant change in the current fuel Calculated since the last trip computer consumption. reset.
The screen goes off completely. When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), ► Press the screen again (anywhere on its ► Pressing the button located on the end of the dashes are displayed. Stop & Start time counter surface) to activate it. wiper control stalk displays the following tabs After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes) in turn: is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62 Trip computer – Current information: miles (100 km). If your vehicle is equipped with Stop & Start, a • Driving range (Petrol or Diesel). If dashes instead of figures continue to be time counter calculates the time spent in STOP Displays information related to the current trip • Current fuel consumption. displayed when driving, contact a PEUGEOT mode during a journey. (range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.). • Stop & Start time counter (Petrol or Diesel). dealer or a qualified workshop. It resets to zero every time the ignition is • Total mileage (Electric). switched on. Data displayed on the – Trips "1" then "2": Current fuel consumption instrument panel • Average speed. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) • Average fuel consumption. (miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh) Touch screen With instrument panels with dials • Distance travelled. Calculated during the last few Pressing the end of the wiper control stalk This system gives access to the following seconds. displays the trip computer data. elements: Trip reset This function is only displayed at speeds above With digital instrument panel – Permanent display of the time and the exterior ► When the desired trip is displayed, 19 mph (30 km/h). The trip computer data is permanently displayed temperature (a blue warning lamp appears if press the button on the end of the wiper when the "PERSONAL" display mode is there is a risk of ice). control stalk for more than 2 seconds. Average fuel consumption selected. – Heating/air conditioning controls. Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) In all other display modes, pressing the end of – Vehicle functions and equipment setting identically. (miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh) the wiper control stalk will cause this data to menus. Calculated since the last trip appear temporarily in a specific window. – Audio system and telephone controls and computer reset. Display of the various tabs Definitions display of related information. – Display of visual manoeuvring aid functions Range Average speed (visual parking sensor information, Park Assist, (miles or km) (mph or km/h) etc.). Calculated since the last trip computer The distance which can still be travelled – Internet services and display of related with the fuel remaining in the tank reset. information. (depending on the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled).
24 Instruments
Distance travelled – Navigation system controls and Use the buttons arranged around the touch (miles or km) display of related information (depending on screen to access the menus, then press the 1 Calculated since the last trip computer version). virtual buttons on the touch screen. reset. For safety reasons, always stop the With 10-inch touch screen
vehicle before performing operations Stop & Start time counter that require sustained attention. (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes) Some functions are not accessible while
driving. If your vehicle is equipped with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey. Recommendations It resets to zero every time the ignition is This screen is of the capacitive type. switched on. Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen.
Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. Use the buttons arranged below the touch Use a soft, clean cloth to clean the touch screen. Touch screen screen to access the menus, then press the This system gives access to the following Main controls virtual buttons on the touch screen. elements: – Permanent display of the time and the exterior With 7-inch touch screen Principles temperature (a blue warning lamp appears if Some menus may display across two pages: there is a risk of ice). press the "OPTIONS" button to access the – Heating/air conditioning controls. second page.
– Vehicle functions and equipment setting If no action is performed on the second menus. page, the first page is displayed – Audio system and telephone controls and automatically. display of related information. – Display of visual manoeuvring aid functions To deactivate/activate a function, select "OFF" (visual parking sensor information, Park Assist, or "ON". etc.). Configure a function. – Internet services and display of related information. Access additional information on the function.
25 Instruments
Confirm. Access the specific Electric functions (energy – Reminder of the air conditioning information, Consumption statistics flow, consumption statistics, deferred charge) and direct access to the corresponding menu. The Statistics tab shows electrical energy Return to the previous page or confirm. organised in the corresponding 3 tabs. – Time. consumption statistics. or Settings Electric / Energy menu Menus Main settings for the audio system, touch Depending on version, this is accessible either: screen and digital instrument panel. – directly, by pressing the button near the Press with three fingers on the touch Volume adjustment/mute. touch screen. screen to show all of the menu buttons. See "Audio equipment and telematics" – via the Applications menu.
section. Radio / Media – Blue bar chart: directly consumed energy Refer to the “Audio equipment and supplied by the traction battery. Energy flows telematics” section. Information banner(s) – Green bar chart: energy recovered during Climate Certain information is displayed permanently in The Flow tab provides a real-time representation deceleration and braking, used to recharge the Settings for temperature, air flow, etc. the touch screen banner(s). of the electric drive train’s operation.
battery. For more information on Manual air 7-inch touch screen upper banner The average result for the current trip is stated in conditioning or Automatic air conditioning, – Time and exterior temperature (a blue warning kWh/100 km. refer to the corresponding section. lamp appears if there is a risk of ice). ► You can change the displayed time scale by Navigation (Depending on equipment) – Reminder of the air conditioning information, pressing the - or + buttons. Refer to the “Audio equipment and and direct access to the corresponding menu. telematics” section. – Reminder of the information in the Deferred charging (Depending on Driving or Vehicle Radio Media and Telephone menus. By default, charging begins when the nozzle equipment) – Notifications. is connected. Deferred charging can be Activation, deactivation and settings for certain 1. Active driving mode – Access to the Settings for the touch screen programmed. 2. Electric motor functions. and the digital instrument panel (date/time, Settings The functions are organised in 2 tabs: "Driving 3. Traction battery charge level languages, units, etc.). ► In the touch screen functions" and "Vehicle settings". 4. Energy flows Electric / Energy 10-inch HD touch screen side banners menu, select the Charge tab. Telephone The energy flows have a specific colour for each – Exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp ► Set the charging start time. Refer to the “Audio equipment and type of driving: telematics” section. appears if there is a risk of ice). ► Press OK. A. Blue: energy consumption The setting is saved in the system. Applications – Access to the Settings for the touch screen B. Green: energy recovery Access to certain configurable equipment. and the digital instrument panel (date/time, You can also programme the deferred charging function using a smartphone, via Electric / Energy languages, units, etc.). – Notifications. the MyPeugeot application.
26 Instruments
Consumption statistics For more information on Remotely operable Network coverage features, refer to the corresponding section. In order to be able to use the various 1 The Statistics tab shows electrical energy consumption statistics. Activation remotely operable features, ensure that your vehicle is located in an area covered by the ► Connect the vehicle to the desired charging mobile network. equipment. A lack of network coverage may prevent ► Press this button in the flap within one communication with the vehicle (for example, minute to activate the system (confirmed if it is in an underground car park). In such by the charging indicator lamp coming on in cases, the application will display a message blue). indicating that the connection with the vehicle – Blue bar chart: directly consumed energy could not be established. supplied by the traction battery. – Green bar chart: energy recovered during Remotely operable deceleration and braking, used to recharge the features (Electric) battery. The average result for the current trip is stated in
kWh/100 km. ► You can change the displayed time scale by These features are accessible pressing the - or + buttons. using a smartphone, via the MyPeugeot application: Deferred charging By default, charging begins when the nozzle – Battery charge management. is connected. Deferred charging can be – Temperature pre-conditioning management. programmed. – Consumption, charge status and driving range Settings statistics. ► In the Electric / Energy touch screen Installation procedure menu, select the Charge tab. ► Download the MyPeugeot app from the ► Set the charging start time. appropriate online store for your smartphone. ► Press OK. ► Create an account. The setting is saved in the system. ► Enter the vehicle’s VIN (code beginning with You can also programme the deferred "VF" on the vehicle registration document). charging function using a smartphone, via For more information on Identification the MyPeugeot application. markings, refer to the corresponding section.
27 Access
Remote control / Key Integral key Opening the windows Depending on version, holding the The key built into the remote control can be unlocking button pressed for more than 3 used for the following operations, depending on Remote control function seconds opens the windows. version: The windows stop when the button is released. – Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle. – Activation/Deactivation of the manual child Selective unlocking of the boot lock. When selective unlocking of the boot is – Activation/Deactivation of the front passenger activated : airbag. ► Press this button to unlock the boot.
– Back-up Unlocking/Locking of the doors. The doors remain locked. – Switching on the ignition and starting/switching ► To eject the key or put it back in place, pull Depending on version, pressing and holding this off the engine. and hold the button. button causes the boot to open slightly. The remote control can be used for the following Without Keyless Entry and Starting remote functions, depending on version: Unlocking the vehicle If selective unlocking of the boot is deactivated, – Unlocking / Locking / Deadlocking the vehicle. pressing this button also unlocks the doors.
– Unlocking / Locking the boot. Do not forget to lock the boot again by – Remote operation of lighting. pressing the locking button. – Folding / Unfolding the door mirrors. Selective unlocking (driver’s door, boot) is – Activating / Deactivating the alarm. configured in the Driving/Vehicle touch – Locating the vehicle. screen menu. Locking the vehicle
– Opening / Closing the windows. Complete unlocking – Activating the vehicle’s electronic immobiliser. Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be ► Press the unlocking button. locked / unlocked in the event of a failure of the Normal locking Selective unlocking remote control, the central locking, the battery, ► Press the locking button. ► To unfold or fold the key, press the button. Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap etc. For more information on the Back-up Locking and alarm activation is confirmed by the With Keyless Entry and Starting ► Press the unlocking button. procedures, please refer to the corresponding lighting of the direction indicators. ► Press it again to unlock the other doors and section. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold. the boot. Complete or selective unlocking and alarm An access (door or boot) that is not deactivation is confirmed by the flashing of the properly closed prevents locking of the sidelamps and/or daytime running lamps. Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
28 Access
Opening the windows vehicle. However, if the vehicle is fitted with For more information on the Alarm, refer to Depending on version, holding the an alarm, it will be activated after 45 seconds. the corresponding section. 2 unlocking button pressed for more than 3 If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or boot seconds opens the windows. are not subsequently opened, the vehicle The windows stop when the button is released. will automatically lock itself again after about Locating the vehicle 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with an This function helps you to spot your vehicle from Selective unlocking of the boot alarm, it will also be reactivated automatically. a distance, with the vehicle locked: When selective unlocking of the boot is – The direction indicators or sidelamps and/or activated : daytime running lamps, depending on version, Deadlocking flash for approximately 10 seconds.
► Press this button to unlock the boot.
The doors remain locked. – The door mirror spotlamps come on. Depending on version, pressing and holding this – The courtesy lamps come on. button causes the boot to open slightly. ► Press the locking button again within ► Press this button. If selective unlocking of the boot is deactivated, 3 seconds to deadlock the vehicle (confirmed by pressing this button also unlocks the doors. the temporary lighting of the direction indicators). Remote lighting of the Do not forget to lock the boot again by Deadlocking renders the interior door pressing the locking button. controls inoperative. It also deactivates lamps the central locking button. Availability of this function depends on version. The horn remains operational. ► Press this button. The sidelamps, Locking the vehicle Never leave anyone inside the vehicle dipped beam headlamps, number plate
when it is deadlocked. lamps and door mirror spotlamps come on for 30 seconds. Closing the windows Pressing again before the end of the timed Normal locking Holding the locking button pressed for period switches off the lamps immediately. more than 3 seconds closes the windows. ► Press the locking button. Locking and alarm activation is confirmed by the When closing the windows, ensure that Advice lighting of the direction indicators. no person or object could prevent their Remote control Depending on version, the door mirrors fold. correct closure. The remote control is a sensitive, high- To leave the windows partly open on versions An access (door or boot) that is not frequency device; avoid handling it in your with alarm, you must first deactivate the properly closed prevents locking of the pocket, due to the risk of unintentionally interior volumetric alarm protection. unlocking the vehicle.
29 Access
Avoid pressing the remote control buttons Proximity Keyless Entry The automatic functions are configured functions are deactivated and the vehicle while out of range of the vehicle, due to via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen locks. the risk of rendering the remote control and Start menu. To unlock the vehicle, use the remote control inoperative. It would then be necessary to This Keyless Entry and Starting system enables or press one of the handles. reset it. automatic vehicle locking/unlocking simply by Unlocking the vehicle The remote control does not work when the detection of the electronic key. Selective unlocking key is in the ignition switch, even when the As long as the driver has the electronic key Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap ignition is switched off. on their person, the vehicle unlocks as they They unlock: approach and locks when they walk away. ► Either automatically when approaching the Anti-theft protection Key recognition zones: driver’s door, if the automatic functions are Do not modify the electronic vehicle activated. immobiliser, as this might result in ► Or by gently pressing the driver's door malfunctions. handle. For vehicles with a key ignition switch, Selective unlocking (driver’s door, boot) is ► Once inside the vehicle, to unlock all remember to remove the key and turn the configured in the Driving/Vehicle touch accesses, press the central locking button or pull steering wheel to engage the steering lock. screen menu. Selective unlocking is deactivated by default. the opening control on any door. Locking the vehicle Complete unlocking Selective unlocking of the boot Driving with the doors locked could make The boot unlocks automatically as you approach it more difficult for the emergency services to The vehicle (doors and boot) unlocks: ► Either automatically as the driver approaches the rear of the vehicle. enter the vehicle in an emergency. ► Press the tailgate control to open the boot. in zone C, if the automatic functions are As a safety precaution, remove the key from Zone A: welcome lighting on approaching activated. The doors remain locked. the ignition or take the electronic key with you the vehicle (between 3 and 5 metres from the ► Or by gently pressing the driver's door handle when leaving the vehicle, even for a short vehicle). or boot button. Locking the vehicle time. Zone B: automatic locking on leaving the vehicle Unlocking and alarm deactivation is confirmed (about 2 metres from the vehicle). by the flashing of the sidelamps and/or daytime Normal locking Purchasing a second-hand vehicle Zone C: automatic unlocking and welcome running lamps. Have the key codes memorised by a lighting on approaching the vehicle (between 1 Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold. PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys and 2 metres from the vehicle). in your possession are the only ones able to For more information on Welcome lighting, If the electronic key remains in zone B
start the vehicle. please refer to the corresponding section. for more than 15 minutes without any With the doors and boot closed, the vehicle action on the vehicle doors, the automatic locks:
30 Access
functions are deactivated and the vehicle ► Either automatically, upon leaving zone B, if Never leave anyone inside the vehicle locks. the automatic functions are activated. when it is deadlocked. 2 To unlock the vehicle, use the remote control ► Or by gently pressing the driver's door or press one of the handles. handle. If one of the doors or the boot is still open Locking is confirmed by the lighting of the or if the electronic key for the Keyless direction indicators, and by an audible signal Selective unlocking Entry and Starting system has been left inside when the vehicle is locked upon walking away. the vehicle, central locking will be disabled. Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap It is not possible to lock the vehicle if the They unlock: electronic key is left inside the vehicle. ► Either automatically when approaching the If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or driver’s door, if the automatic functions are For safety and theft protection reasons, boot are not subsequently opened, the activated. never leave the electronic key in the vehicle will automatically lock itself again after ► Or by gently pressing the driver's door vehicle, even when you are close to it. about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with handle. an alarm, it will also be reactivated automatically. ► Once inside the vehicle, to unlock all Deadlocking accesses, press the central locking button or pull the opening control on any door. The automatic door mirror folding/ unfolding function is configured via the
Selective unlocking of the boot touch screen’s Driving / Vehicle menu. The boot unlocks automatically as you approach the rear of the vehicle. As a safety measure, never leave the ► Press the tailgate control to open the boot. vehicle, even for a short time, without
The doors remain locked. taking the Keyless Entry and Starting ► Gently press the driver's door handle to lock system’s electronic key with you. the vehicle. Locking the vehicle Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle if ► Press it again within 3 seconds to deadlock the key is present in one of the defined areas the vehicle (confirmed by the temporary lighting Normal locking while the vehicle is unlocked.
of the direction indicators).
Deadlocking renders the interior door In order to preserve the battery in the controls inoperative. It also deactivates electronic key and the vehicle's battery: the central locking button. – The unlocking on approach function With the doors and boot closed, the vehicle The horn remains operational. (zone C) automatically goes into standby locks: after several days of non-use (approximately
31 Access
one week). To unlock the vehicle, use the Manual Otherwise, every time the speed of the remote control or press on one of the front vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the locks ► Press this button to lock/unlock the vehicle door handles. At the next vehicle start, the will rebound and an alert will appear. (doors and boot) from inside the vehicle. automatic unlocking and locking functions will The indicator lamp comes on to confirm the be reactivated. central locking of the vehicle. – After the welcome lighting is triggered Back-up procedures ► Insert the key in the door lock. The central locking does not take place if several times in succession without starting ► Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/ one of the doors is open. the vehicle, it will be deactivated. Lost keys, remote control, lock the vehicle. – All of the "hands-free" functions go into ► Turn the key rearwards again within extended stand-by after 21 days of non-use. When locking/deadlocking from the electronic key 3 seconds to deadlock the vehicle. To restore these functions, unlock the vehicle outside Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's using the remote control and start the engine. When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked registration certificate, a personal identification If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will from the outside, the indicator lamp flashes document and, if possible, the label bearing the not be activated when locking with the key. Electrical interference and the button is inoperative. key code. The electronic key may not operate if ► After normal locking, pull one of the The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds close to certain electronic devices: telephone interior door controls to unlock the vehicle. key code and the transponder code required to when the door is opened; switch on the (switched on or on standby), laptop computer, ► After deadlocking, it is necessary to use order a new key. ignition to stop it. strong magnetic fields, etc. the remote control, Keyless Entry and Starting or the integral key to unlock the vehicle. Complete unlocking/locking Central locking not of the vehicle with the key functioning Central locking Use this procedure in the following situations: Automatic (anti-intrusion Use these procedures in the following cases: – Remote control battery discharged. – Central locking malfunction. security) – Remote control malfunction. – Battery disconnected or discharged. The doors and boot lock automatically when – Vehicle battery discharged. driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). – Vehicle in an area subject to strong In the event of a malfunction of the To deactivate/reactivate this function (activated electromagnetic interference. central locking system, the battery must by default): In the first case, change the remote control be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is ► Press the button until a confirmation battery. locked fully. message appears. In the second case, reinitialise the remote
control. Transporting long or bulky objects Driver's door Press the central locking control to drive Refer to the corresponding sections. ► Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle with the boot open and the doors locked. to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it.
32 Access
Passenger doors Without Keyless Entry and Starting Battery type: CR2032 / 3 volts. 2 Unlocking
► Pull the interior door opening control. Locking
► Insert the key in the door lock. ► Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/ lock the vehicle. ► Turn the key rearwards again within 3 seconds to deadlock the vehicle. If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will not be activated when locking with the
key. With Keyless Entry and Starting If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds Battery type: CR2032 / 3 volts.
when the door is opened; switch on the ignition to stop it. ► Open the doors. ► For the rear doors, check that the child lock Central locking not is not on. Refer to the corresponding section. functioning ► Remove the black cap, located on the edge Use these procedures in the following cases: of the door, using the key. – Central locking malfunction. ► Insert the key into the socket without forcing – Battery disconnected or discharged. it, then turn the latch towards the inside of the door. In the event of a malfunction of the ► Remove the key and refit the black cap.
central locking system, the battery must ► Close the doors and check from the outside be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is ► Unclip the cover by inserting a small that the vehicle is locked. locked fully. screwdriver in the slot and raise the cover. Changing the battery ► Remove the discharged battery from its housing. Driver's door If the battery is discharged, this warning ► Insert the new battery, observing the polarity, lamp comes on, accompanied by an ► Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle and clip the cover onto the housing. to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it. audible signal and the display of a message.
33 Access
► Reinitialise the remote control. ► Switch off the ignition and remove the key If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact Boot For more information on Reinitialising the from the switch. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop remote control, refer to the corresponding The remote control is now fully operational without delay. section. again. Opening ► After unlocking the vehicle or just the boot, Do not throw remote control batteries With Keyless Entry and Starting Doors press the opening control and then raise the away, as they contain metals that are tailgate. harmful to the environment. Take them to an Opening approved disposal point. Closing From outside ► Lower the tailgate using one of the interior Reinitialising the remote ► After unlocking the vehicle or with the grab handles. Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key in the If the tailgate is not properly closed, this control recognition zone, pull the door handle. warning lamp comes on accompanied by Following replacement of the battery or in a message, if the engine is running, and an the event of a fault, it may be necessary to From inside audible signal, if the vehicle is travelling at more reinitialise the remote control. ► Pull the interior opening control of a door; this than 6 mph (10 km/h). unlocks the vehicle completely. Without Keyless Entry and Starting In the event of a malfunction or if you
With selective unlocking activated: experience difficulty opening or closing ► Insert the mechanical key (incorporated into – Opening the driver's door unlocks the tailgate, have it checked by a PEUGEOT the remote control) into the lock to open the the driver's door only (if the vehicle has not dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, vehicle. already been completely unlocked). to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent ► Place the electronic key against the back-up – Opening one of the passenger doors any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially reader on the steering column and hold it there unlocks the rest of the vehicle. causing serious injury. until the ignition is switched on. ► Switch on the ignition by pressing the "START/STOP" button. Closing Back-up release ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever If a door is not properly closed, this To manually unlock the boot in the event of a in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. warning lamp comes on accompanied by battery or central locking failure. ► With an automatic gearbox or drive a message if the engine is running, and an ► Switch off the ignition. selector, while in mode P, depress the brake audible signal when the vehicle is travelling at Unlocking ► Return the key to position 2 (Ignition on). pedal. more than 6 mph (10 km/h). ► Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock ► Immediately press the closed padlock button from inside the boot. for a few seconds.
34 Access
Boot System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins. 2 Opening Exterior perimeter monitoring ► After unlocking the vehicle or just the boot, The system checks for opening of the vehicle. press the opening control and then raise the The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a tailgate. door, the boot or the bonnet, for example.
Interior volumetric monitoring ► Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the Closing The system checks for any variation in volume in lock to unlock the boot. ► Lower the tailgate using one of the interior the passenger compartment. ► Move the latch to the left. grab handles. The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a If the tailgate is not properly closed, this Locking after closing window, enters the passenger compartment or warning lamp comes on accompanied by moves inside the vehicle. a message, if the engine is running, and an If the fault persists after closing again, the boot Self-protection function audible signal, if the vehicle is travelling at more will remain locked. The system checks for the putting out of service than 6 mph (10 km/h). In the event of a fault with the central of its components. locking system, it is essential to In the event of a malfunction or if you The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central disconnect the battery to lock the boot and so experience difficulty opening or closing control or the siren wiring is put out of service or ensure complete locking of the vehicle. the tailgate, have it checked by a PEUGEOT damaged. dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent For all work on the alarm system, contact any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially Alarm a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. causing serious injury. (Depending on version)
Back-up release Locking the vehicle with full
To manually unlock the boot in the event of a alarm system
battery or central locking failure. Activation Unlocking ► Switch off the ignition and exit the vehicle. ► Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.
35 Access
► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the sidelamps and/or the daytime running lamps Only exterior perimeter monitoring is activated; Failure of the remote control remote control or by pressing on the driver's flash for about 2 seconds. the red indicator lamp in the button flashes every To deactivate the monitoring functions: door handle. second. After unlocking using the remote ► Unlock the vehicle using the key in the When the monitoring system is active, the red To take effect, this deactivation must be control driver's door lock. indicator lamp in the button flashes once per performed whenever the ignition is switched If the vehicle automatically locks itself again ► Open the door; the alarm is triggered. second and the direction indicators come on for off. (as happens if a door or the boot is not ► Switch on the ignition; this stops the alarm. about 2 seconds. opened within 30 seconds of unlocking), the The indicator lamp in the button goes off. The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated Reactivating interior volumetric monitoring system is automatically activated. after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric monitoring Locking the vehicle without monitoring after 45 seconds. ► Deactivate exterior perimeter monitoring by unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or activating the alarm The alarm does not activate when Locking the vehicle the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system. ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key locking automatically from a distance. with exterior perimeter The indicator lamp in the button goes off. (integral to the remote control) in the driver's monitoring only ► Reactivate the full alarm system by locking door lock. If an opening (door, boot or bonnet) is not Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring to the vehicle using the remote control or by properly closed, the vehicle is not locked, avoid the unwanted triggering of the alarm, in pressing the driver’s door handle. Malfunction but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be certain cases such as: The red indicator lamp in the button once again When the ignition is switched on, fixed activated after 45 seconds, at the same time – Slightly open window. flashes every second. illumination of the red indicator lamp in the as the interior volumetric monitoring. – Washing the vehicle. button indicates a malfunction of the system. – Changing a wheel. Triggering of the alarm Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Deactivation – Towing the vehicle. This is indicated by sounding of the siren qualified workshop. ► Press one of the remote control unlocking – Transport on a ship or ferry. and flashing of the direction indicators for 30 buttons: seconds. Automatic activation Deactivating interior volumetric short press Depending on the country of sale, certain (Depending on country of sale) monitoring monitoring functions remain active until the alarm The system is activated automatically 2 minutes long press ► Switch off the ignition and within 10 seconds has been triggered eleven times consecutively. after the last door or the boot is closed. press the alarm button until the indicator lamp is When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote ► To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the or on fixed. control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system, vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the ► Unlock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s ► Exit the vehicle. rapid flashing of the red indicator lamp in the remote control or unlock the vehicle using the door handle. ► Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote button informs you that the alarm was triggered “Keyless Entry and Starting” system. The monitoring system is deactivated: the control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" during your absence. When the ignition is indicator lamp in the button goes off and the system. switched on, this flashing stops.
36 Access
Failure of the remote control Electric windows Window controls remain operational for approximately 45 seconds after switching 2 To deactivate the monitoring functions: off the ignition or after locking the vehicle. ► Unlock the vehicle using the key in the After that time, the controls are disabled. driver's door lock. To reactivate them, switch on the ignition or ► Open the door; the alarm is triggered. unlock the vehicle. ► Switch on the ignition; this stops the alarm. The indicator lamp in the button goes off. 1. Left-hand front Anti-pinch Locking the vehicle without 2. Right-hand front If the window meets an obstacle while rising, it 3. Right-hand rear stops and immediately partially lowers again. activating the alarm 4. Left-hand rear ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key 5. Electric child lock (depending on version) Reinitialising the electric (integral to the remote control) in the driver's door lock. For more information on the Electric child lock, windows refer to the corresponding section. Following reconnection of the battery, or if Malfunction the windows move abnormally, the anti-pinch When the ignition is switched on, fixed Manual operation function must be reinitialised. illumination of the red indicator lamp in the ► To open/close the window, press/pull the The safety anti-pinch function is not active button indicates a malfunction of the system. switch without passing the point of resistance; during these operations. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a the window stops as soon as the switch is For each of the windows: qualified workshop. released. ► Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the Automatic activation Automatic operation control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the (Depending on country of sale) ► To open/close the window, press/pull the window is fully closed. The system is activated automatically 2 minutes switch past its resistance point: the window ► Continue to pull the switch for at least after the last door or the boot is closed. opens/closes completely when the switch is one second after reaching the window closed ► To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the released. position. Operating the switch again stops the movement vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the If an electric window meets an obstacle of the window. remote control or unlock the vehicle using the during operation, the movement of the “Keyless Entry and Starting” system. window must be reversed. To do this, press the switch concerned. When the driver operates the passengers’ electric window switches, it is important to
37 Access
ensure that nothing can prevent the window Start, and up to 45 seconds after turning off the Operation Operating the button from closing properly. ignition or after locking the vehicle. When opening the sunroof fully, the movable ► Pressing the button beyond its point of It is important to ensure that the passengers Precautions glass moves to a partially open position, then resistance opens or closes the sunroof fully. use the electric windows correctly. slides over the roof. All intermediate positions ► Pressing the button again stops the Be particularly aware of children when Do not put your head or arms through the are allowed. movement in progress. operating the windows. sunroof while the vehicle is moving - risk ► By keeping the button pressed (without going Depending on the speed of the vehicle, Be aware of passengers and/or other persons of serious injury! beyond the point of resistance), the movement of the partially open position may vary to present when closing the windows using the glass stops when this button is released. improve the acoustics. the electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and Ensure that any luggage or accessories ► When the sunroof is closed: pressing once Starting" system. carried on the roof bars do not interfere without passing the point of resistance moves it with the movement of the sunroof. Before operating the sunroof control to the partially open position. Do not place heavy loads on the movable button, ensure that no object or person ► When the sunroof is partially open: pressing Sunroof glass panel of the sunroof. might prevent the movement. once without passing the point of resistance Pay particular attention to children when The sunroof consists of a movable glass panel opens or closes it fully. operating the sunroof. that slides over the roof and a blind that can If the sunroof is wet, following a shower If something is trapped when operating the The sunroof and windows can be closed be opened independently. Opening the sunroof or washing the vehicle, wait until it is sunroof, reverse the movement of the sunroof by holding down the door locking control. automatically opens the blind. completely dry before opening. by pressing the control button in question. The operation stops as soon as the locking ► To operate the panoramic sunroof, use the Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered by The driver must ensure that passengers use control is released. button in the roof console. snow or ice - risk of damage!
the sunroof correctly. Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow or Opening/closing the blind ice from the sunroof. Anti-pinch system ► To open the blind, pull the handle backwards
until the desired position is reached. Check the condition of the sunroof seals If the sunroof encounters an obstacle when ► To close the blind, push the handle forwards regularly (presence of dust or deposits, closing, the movement is automatically reversed. until the desired position is reached. dead leaves, etc.). The roof anti-pinch system is designed to be If using a car wash, check first that the roof is effective at speeds of up to 75 mph (120 km/h). Reinitialisation correctly closed and keep the high-pressure Opening/closing the sunroof
Reinitialisation is required after reconnecting the jet at least 30 centimetres from the seals. ► To open the sunroof, use the part of the The sunroof can be operated when the ignition is battery, or if the sunroof malfunctions or moves button located towards the rear. turned on (if the battery is charged enough), with in a jerky manner. Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof ► To close the sunroof, use the part of the the engine running, in STOP mode of Stop & ► Check that nothing is affecting the movement open. button located towards the front. of the sunroof and that the seals are clean.
38 Access
Operating the button ► With the ignition on, fully close the sunroof. 2 ► Pressing the button beyond its point of resistance opens or closes the sunroof fully. ► Press and hold the front part of the button ► Pressing the button again stops the until the sunroof moves slightly, hold for a further movement in progress. 1 second, then release. ► By keeping the button pressed (without going ► Wait 2 seconds then press and hold the front beyond the point of resistance), the movement of part of the button again. The sunroof will open the glass stops when this button is released. and close again. Once the roof is fully closed ► When the sunroof is closed: pressing once again, hold for a further 2 seconds, then release. without passing the point of resistance moves it to the partially open position. ► When the sunroof is partially open: pressing once without passing the point of resistance opens or closes it fully.
The sunroof and windows can be closed by holding down the door locking control. The operation stops as soon as the locking control is released.
Opening/closing the blind ► To open the blind, pull the handle backwards until the desired position is reached. ► To close the blind, push the handle forwards until the desired position is reached. Reinitialisation Reinitialisation is required after reconnecting the battery, or if the sunroof malfunctions or moves in a jerky manner. ► Check that nothing is affecting the movement of the sunroof and that the seals are clean.
39 Ease of use and comfort
Before moving the seat backwards, Removing a head restraint Backrest angle
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit
ensure that there is no person or object ► Pull the head restraint fully up. that might prevent the full travel of the seat. ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint There is a risk of trapping or pinching and remove it completely. passengers if present in the rear seats or of ► Stow the head restraint securely. jamming the seat if large objects are placed on the floor behind the seat. Refitting a head restraint
► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides ► Turn the knob to adjust the backrest. in the corresponding seat backrest. Front seats ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will Height go. Front head restraints ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint and push it down. Before taking to the road and to make the Height adjustment ► Adjust the height of the head restraint.
most of the ergonomic layout of the PEUGEOT i-Cockpit, carry out these adjustments in the Never drive with the head restraints
following order: removed; they should be in place and – head restraint height. adjusted for the occupant of the seat. ► Pull the control upwards to raise the seat or – seat backrest angle. push it downwards to lower it until the desired – seat cushion height. Manually-adjustable seats position is obtained. – longitudinal seat position. – steering wheel reach and then height. Longitudinal Electrically-adjustable seats
– rear view mirror and door mirrors. Longitudinal
Once these adjustments have been made, check that the "head-up" ► Upwards: pull the head restraint up to the instrument panel can be viewed correctly over desired position; the head restraint can be felt to the smaller diameter steering wheel. click into position. ► Downwards: press lug A to lower the head restraint. ► Raise the control bar and slide the seat The adjustment is correct when the forwards or backwards. upper edge of the head restraint is level ► Push the control forwards or rearwards to with the top of the head. slide the seat.
40 Ease of use and comfort
Backrest angle Backrest angle Massage function 3 (Driver’s seat only)
► Turn the knob to adjust the backrest. ► Tilt the control forwards or rearwards.
Height Cushion height and angle This function provides lumbar massage; it only operates when the engine is running as well as in STOP mode of the Stop & Start system.
Activation/Deactivation ► Press this button to activate/deactivate the function. Upon activation, the indicator lamp comes on. ► Pull the control upwards to raise the seat or ► Tilt the rear of the control upwards or The massage function is activated for a period push it downwards to lower it until the desired downwards to obtain the required height and of one hour. position is obtained. angle. During this time, massage is performed in 6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage Electrically-adjustable seats Electric lumbar adjustment followed by a 4-minute break).
After one hour, the function is deactivated; the Longitudinal indicator lamp goes off.
► Press the + or - control to obtain the desired lumbar support. ► Push the control forwards or rearwards to slide the seat.
41 Ease of use and comfort
Heated seats Prolonged use of the heated seats is not As a safety measure, these adjustments ► Return control A to its central position. recommended for those with sensitive must only be carried out with the vehicle skin. stationary. Manual folding There is a risk of burns for people whose The mirrors can be folded manually (parking
perception of heat is impaired (illness, taking obstruction, narrow garage, etc.).
medication, etc.). Mirrors ► Turn the mirror towards the vehicle. To keep the heated pad intact and to prevent a short circuit: Electric folding – do not place sharp or heavy objects on the Door mirrors If the vehicle is so equipped, the mirrors can
seat, As a safety measure, the mirrors should be folded electrically from the inside, with the The function is active only with the engine – do not kneel or stand on the seat, be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots". vehicle parked and the ignition on: – do not spill liquids onto the seat, running. The objects that you see in the mirrors are ► Place control A in the centre – never use the heating function if the seat in fact closer than they appear. Take this position. On/Off is wet. into account in order to correctly judge the ► Pull control A back. ► Press the button corresponding to the seat. distance of vehicles approaching from behind. ► Each press changes the heating level; the corresponding number of indicator lamps come Steering wheel ► Lock the vehicle from the outside. on. Adjustment Electric unfolding ► To switch off the heating, press the button adjustment until all of the indicator lamps are off. ► From outside: unlock the vehicle. The system status is memorised when the ► From inside: with the ignition on, place ignition is switched off. control A in the central position and then pull it rearwards. Do not use the function when the seat is not occupied. The automatic door mirror folding/ Reduce the heating intensity as soon as unfolding function is configured via the
possible. Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. When the seat and passenger compartment ► When stationary, pull the control to release have reached a satisfactory temperature, the steering wheel. Demisting/Defrosting switch the function off; reducing electrical ► Adjust the height and reach to suit your ► Move control to the right or to the left to If the vehicle is so equipped, demisting/ consumption in turn decreases energy driving position. A select the corresponding mirror. defrosting of the heated door mirrors is consumption. ► Push the control lever to lock the steering performed when the heated rear screen is wheel. ► Move control B in any of the four directions to adjust. switched on.
42 Ease of use and comfort
► Return control A to its central position. For more information on Rear screen Automatic "electrochrome" model demisting/defrosting, refer to the 3 Manual folding corresponding section. The mirrors can be folded manually (parking obstruction, narrow garage, etc.). Interior rear view mirror ► Turn the mirror towards the vehicle. Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
Electric folding nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, If the vehicle is so equipped, the mirrors can headlamps of other vehicles, etc. be folded electrically from the inside, with the vehicle parked and the ignition on: Manual model Day/night position
► Place control A in the centre position.
► Pull control A back. This system automatically and progressively ► Lock the vehicle from the outside. transitions between day and night modes, using a sensor that measures the light entering from Electric unfolding the rear of the vehicle.
► From outside: unlock the vehicle. To ensure optimum visibility during your ► Pull the lever to change to the anti-dazzle ► From inside: with the ignition on, place manoeuvres, the mirror lightens "night” position. control A in the central position and then pull it automatically when reverse gear is engaged. ► Push the lever to change to the normal "day" rearwards. position. The automatic door mirror folding/ Adjustment unfolding function is configured via the ► Set the mirror to the normal “day” position. Rear bench seat Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. Bench seat with fixed cushions and split folding backrests (2/3-1/3) to adapt the boot load space. Demisting/Defrosting If the vehicle is so equipped, demisting/ defrosting of the heated door mirrors is performed when the heated rear screen is switched on.
43 Ease of use and comfort
Rear head restraints Never drive with passengers seated at ► Press the backrest release grip 1. passengers in the event of sudden braking or the rear when the head restraints are ► Guide the backrest 2 down to the horizontal an accident. removed; the head restraints should be in position. The contents of the boot may be thrown place and in the high position. forwards - risk of serious injury! When the backrest is released, the red The head restraint for the centre seat indicator in the release grip is visible. and those for the outer seats are not interchangeable. Heating and Ventilation Repositioning the backrests Air intake Folding the backrests First check that the outer seat belts are The air circulating in the passenger compartment lying vertically flat alongside the backrest Manoeuvring the backrests should only is filtered and originates either from the latching rings. be done when the vehicle is stationary. exterior, via the grille located at the base of the They have two positions: windscreen, or from the inside in air recirculation – A , for when the seat is in use: high position First steps: mode. ► Pull the head restraint fully up. ► Lower the head restraints. Controls – A low position, for stowing, when the seat is ► If necessary, move the front seats forward. not in use: ► Check that no person or object might Depending on version, the controls are ► Press the lug A to release the head interfere with the folding of the backrests accessible in the "Air conditioning" touch restraint and push it down. (clothing, luggage, etc.). screen menu or are grouped together in the The rear head restraints can be removed. ► Check that the seat belts are free, not control panel on the centre console. Removing a head restraint engaged in the buckles. Release them so that Air distribution the backrest can be moved.
► Release the backrest using control 1. ► Tilt the backrest slightly forwards.
► Pull the head restraint fully up. ► Put the backrest 2 in the upright position and ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint push it firmly to latch it home. and remove it completely. ► Check that the red indicator is no longer Refitting a head restraint visible in the release grip 1. ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides ► Ensure that the outer seat belts were not in the corresponding backrest. trapped during the operation. ► Push the head restraint fully down. Please note: an incorrectly latched ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint
backrest compromises the safety of and push it down.
44 Ease of use and comfort
passengers in the event of sudden braking or 1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents Avoid driving for too long with the an accident. ventilation off or with prolonged operation 3 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents The contents of the boot may be thrown 3. Adjustable and closable side air vents of interior air recirculation. Risk of misting and forwards - risk of serious injury! 4. Adjustable and closable central air vents deterioration of the air quality! 5. Air outlets to the front footwells 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells (depending on If the interior temperature is very high Heating and Ventilation version) after the vehicle has stood for a long time in the sunshine, air the passenger Air intake Advice compartment for a few moments. The air circulating in the passenger compartment Put the air flow control at a setting high is filtered and originates either from the Using the ventilation and air enough to quickly change the air in the exterior, via the grille located at the base of the conditioning system passenger compartment. windscreen, or from the inside in air recirculation ► To ensure that air is distributed evenly, mode. keep the external air intake grilles at the base Condensation created by the air Controls of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents, the conditioning results in a discharge of air outlets and the air extractor in the boot Depending on version, the controls are water underneath the vehicle. This is perfectly free from obstructions. accessible in the "Air conditioning" touch normal. ► Do not cover the sunshine sensor located screen menu or are grouped together in the on the dashboard; this sensor is used to control panel on the centre console. Servicing the ventilation and air regulate the automatic air conditioning conditioning system Air distribution system.
► Ensure that the passenger compartment ► Operate the air conditioning system for at filter is in good condition and have the filter least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to elements replaced regularly. keep it in perfect working order. We recommend using a composite passenger ► If the system does not produce cold air, compartment filter. Thanks to its special active switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer additive, this type of filter helps to purify the or a qualified workshop. air breathed by the occupants and keep the When towing the maximum load on a steep passenger compartment clean (by reducing gradient in high temperatures, switching off allergic symptoms, unpleasant odours and the air conditioning increases the available greasy deposits). engine power, enhancing the towing capacity. ► To ensure correct operation of the
air conditioning system, have it checked
45 Ease of use and comfort
according to the recommendations in the Central and side air vents Maintenance and Warranty Guide. Windscreen Stop & Start The heating and air conditioning systems Windscreen, footwells only operate when the engine is running. Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start Footwells system to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment.
For more information on the Stop & Start, Air conditioning on / off 1. Temperature adjustment refer to the corresponding section. The air conditioning system is designed to 2. Air flow adjustment operate effectively in all seasons, with the 3. Air distribution adjustment windows closed. ECO driving mode 4. Air conditioning on/off Selecting this mode reduces electrical It is used to: energy consumption, but restricts the – lower the temperature in summer, performance of the heating and air Adjusting the temperature – increase the effectiveness of the demisting in conditioning systems, although it does not ► Press one of the buttons 1 (- or +) to set the winter, above 3°C. deactivate them. temperature. ► Press button 4 to activate/deactivate the air conditioning system.
Air flow adjustment Air conditioning does not operate when Manual air conditioning ► Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) or turn the the air flow is disabled. knob 2 to decrease or increase the speed of the To obtain cool air more quickly, enable interior Press the Climate button to display the fan. air recirculation for a brief period. Then return system controls page. When the air flow is reduced to a minimum, to the intake of exterior air. ventilation stops. Switching off the air conditioning may result in some discomfort (humidity or misting). Air distribution adjustment ► Press button 3 to adjust the air flow distribution inside the passenger compartment. Automatic air conditioning Central and side air vents, footwells This system automatically controls the activation of the air conditioning system, regulating the
46 Ease of use and comfort temperature, air flow and air distribution inside 5. Automatic Comfort programme on/off The lighting of the button indicates that air is the passenger compartment. being blown in the specified direction. 3 6. Access to the secondary page The air conditioning operates with the engine 7. Automatic Comfort programme settings (Soft/ It is possible to activate all three buttons running, but the ventilation and its controls can Normal/Fast) simultaneously, for uniform distribution be accessed with the ignition on. 8. Temperature pre-conditioning (Electric) throughout the passenger compartment. Press the Climate menu button to access the system controls. Air conditioning on / off
Temperature adjustment The air conditioning system is designed to ► Press one of the buttons 1 to increase (red) operate effectively in all seasons, with the or decrease (blue) the value. windows closed. The value displayed corresponds to a level of It is used to: comfort and not to a precise temperature. – lower the temperature in summer, – increase the effectiveness of the demisting in Air flow adjustment winter, above 3°C. ► Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to ► Press button 4 to activate/deactivate the air decrease or increase the speed of the air conditioning system. booster fan. The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in Air conditioning does not operate when
progressively as the speed of the fan is the air flow is disabled. increased. To obtain cool air more quickly, enable interior When the air flow is reduced to a minimum, air recirculation for a brief period. Then return ventilation stops. to the intake of exterior air. "OFF" is displayed alongside the fan. Switching off the air conditioning may result in some discomfort (humidity or misting). Air distribution adjustment ► Press the buttons 3 to adjust the air flow Automatic Comfort distribution inside the passenger compartment. Windscreen and side windows programme
This automatic mode ensures optimum 1. Temperature adjustment Central and side air vents management of the passenger compartment 2. Air flow adjustment temperature, air flow and air distribution, based 3. Air distribution adjustment Footwells on the selected comfort level. 4. Air conditioning on/off
47 Ease of use and comfort
► Press button 5 to activate or deactivate the the comfort setting requested, there is no Once the function is deactivated, the system It is possible to manually change the air flow air conditioning system’s automatic mode . need to alter the value displayed to more returns to the previous settings. without deactivating the automatic Visibility The indicator lamp in the button lights up quickly reach the required level of comfort. programme. when the air conditioning system is operating The system automatically corrects the With Stop & Start, when demisting has automatically. temperature difference as quickly as possible. Switching off the air been activated, STOP mode is not You can adjust the intensity of the conditioning system available. automatic Comfort programme by using the ► Press this button. "OPTIONS" button to select a profile: Interior air recirculation – "Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by In wintry conditions, remove all snow or The intake of exterior air prevents the formation Its indicator lamp comes on and all of the other limiting air flow. ice on the windscreen near the camera of mist on the windscreen and side windows. indicator lamps for the system go off. – "Normal": offers the best compromise before moving off. Recirculating the interior air isolates the This action deactivates all of the functions of the between a comfortable temperature and quiet Otherwise, the operation of the equipment passenger compartment from outside odours air conditioning system. operation (default setting). associated with the camera may be affected. and fumes and allows the desired passenger The temperature is no longer regulated. A slight – "Fast": provides strong and effective air flow. compartment temperature to be achieved more flow of air can still be felt, due to the forward To change the current profile (shown by the rapidly. movement of the vehicle. corresponding indicator lamp), press button 7 Heated windscreen
► Press this button to activate/deactivate repeatedly until the desired profile is displayed: the function (confirmed by the The "Normal" or "Fast" profiles are the most Front demisting illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). comfortable for passengers in the rear seats. - defrosting This profile setting is associated with automatic The function is activated automatically mode only. However, on deactivation of the when reverse gear is engaged. AUTO mode, the indicator lamp for the most Automatic Visibility recently selected profile remains on. programme Changing the profile setting does not reactivate Maximum air conditioning This mode allows the windscreen and side
AUTO mode if it was deactivated. windows to be demisted or defrosted as quickly This function automatically adjusts the as possible. In cold weather, this system heats the bottom of In cold weather with the engine cold, the temperature setting to the lowest possible, the ► Press this button to activate/deactivate the windscreen, as well as the area alongside air flow is increased gradually until the air distribution towards the central and side air the mode (confirmed by the illumination/ the left-hand windscreen pillar. comfort setting has been reached, in order to vents, the air flow to maximum and, if necessary, extinction of the indicator lamp). Without changing the settings for the air limit the delivery of cold air into the passenger activates interior air recirculation. The programme automatically manages the air conditioning system, it allows faster release compartment. ► Press this button to activate/deactivate conditioning (depending on version), air flow of the windscreen wiper blades when they On entering the vehicle, if the interior the function (confirmed by the and air intake, and provides optimum distribution are frozen to the windscreen and helps avoid temperature is much colder or warmer than illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). towards the windscreen and side windows.
48 Ease of use and comfort
It is possible to manually change the air flow the accumulation of snow resulting from the Switch off demisting/defrosting when without deactivating the automatic Visibility operation of the windscreen wipers. you no longer need it; reducing 3 programme. electrical consumption in turn decreases On/Off energy consumption.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, STOP mode is not available.
Remote-controlled
In wintry conditions, remove all snow or heating and air ice on the windscreen near the camera before moving off. conditioning (Electric) Otherwise, the operation of the equipment This function allows you to programme the associated with the camera may be affected. vehicle to adjust the passenger compartment ► With the engine running, press this button to temperature to a pre-defined, non-modifiable activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by an temperature (approx. 21°C) before you enter the indicator lamp). vehicle, on the days and times of your choice. Heated windscreen The function is activated when the exterior temperature drops below 0°C. It is deactivated Programming automatically when the engine is switched off. (With PEUGEOT Connect Nav) In the Climate > OPTIONS menu: Rear screen demisting/ Select Temperature conditioning.
defrosting ► Press + to programme. Demisting/defrosting only operates with the ► Select the time of entry into the vehicle and engine running. the desired days. Press OK.
Depending on version, this also applies to the ► Press ON to activate this programming. In cold weather, this system heats the bottom of door mirrors. Pre-conditioning begins approximately 45 the windscreen, as well as the area alongside ► Press this button to activate/deactivate minutes before the programmed time, and is the left-hand windscreen pillar. the function (confirmed by the maintained for 10 minutes afterwards. Without changing the settings for the air illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). conditioning system, it allows faster release You can define multiple programmings. Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically of the windscreen wiper blades when they Each one is saved in the system. to prevent an excessive consumption of are frozen to the windscreen and helps avoid To optimise battery life, we recommend electrical current. programming with the vehicle plugged in.
49 Ease of use and comfort
This feature can be programmed using a Interior fittings Sun visor These applications can be managed using the
smartphone, via the steering mounted controls or the audio system ► With the ignition on, raise the concealing application. controls. MyPeugeot flap; depending on the version, the mirror is With PEUGEOT Connect Radio, the illuminated automatically. When the USB port is used, the portable programming can only be carried out using a This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket device charges automatically. smartphone, via the application. holder. A message is displayed if the power drawn For more information on Remotely operable by the portable device exceeds the current features, refer to the corresponding section. Glove box supplied by the vehicle. Operating conditions ► To open the glove box, raise the handle. For more information on how to use this equipment, refer to the Audio equipment – The function is only activated when the Never drive with the glove box open and telematics section . ignition is off and the vehicle locked. when a passenger is at the front. It may – The function is not activated if the battery cause injury during sharp deceleration! charge level is below 50%. 12 V accessory socket
– If recurrent programming is activated (e.g. 1. Grab handle USB sockets
from Monday to Friday) and two pre-conditioning sequences are performed without the vehicle 2. Sun visor Glove box being used, the programming will be deactivated. 3. 4. Door pockets 5. Storage compartment or Storage compartment with flap or Wireless smartphone charger with flap (depending on version)
► Plug in a 12 V accessory (with a maximum ► Press the top centre of the flap to open it. They allow the connection of a portable device in rated power of 120 W) using a suitable adapter. 6. Storage compartment with 12 V accessory order to recharge it. socket Observe the maximum power rating to The front right USB port 7. Cup holder avoid damaging the accessory.. also allows a smartphone to 8. Adjustable centre armrest with storage be connected by MirrorLinkTM, Android Auto® or compartment CarPlay®, enabling certain smartphone The connection of an electrical device Rear USB socket(s) (depending on version) applications to be used on the touch screen. not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a For best results, use a cable made or approved USB charger, may adversely affect the by the device manufacturer. operation of vehicle electrical systems,
50 Ease of use and comfort
These applications can be managed using the causing faults such as poor radio reception or Wireless smartphone steering mounted controls or the audio system interference with displays in the screens. 3 controls. charger
When the USB port is used, the portable FOCAL® Premium Hi-Fi device charges automatically.
system
A message is displayed if the power drawn by the portable device exceeds the current The vehicle is equipped with a high-fidelity ® supplied by the vehicle. acoustic system from the French brand FOCAL . ® For more information on how to use this 10 speakers incorporating exclusive FOCAL equipment, refer to the Audio equipment technologies offer the pleasure of pure and detailed sound inside the vehicle: and telematics section . – Central speaker/satellite speakers: Polyglass It allows wireless charging of a portable device technology delivering sound immersion and such as a smartphone, using the magnetic 12 V accessory socket spatialisation. induction principle, in accordance with the Qi 1.1
– High fidelity woofer/mid-range speakers: standard. Polyglass technology delivering balance and The portable device to be charged must be precise sound.
compatible with the Qi standard, either by design – TNF tweeters: Inverted dome aluminium or by using a compatible holder or shell. technology giving optimum sound dispersion and The charging area is identified by the Qi symbol. very detailed higher frequencies. The charger works with the engine running and – 12-way active amplification - 515 atts:W with the Stop & Start system in STOP mode.
Hybrid Class AB/Class D technology providing Charging is managed by the smartphone. ► Plug in a 12 V accessory (with a maximum breadth and finesse in the high frequency With Keyless Entry and Starting, the charger’s rated power of 120 W) using a suitable adapter. signals, as well as real power in the bass. operation may be briefly disrupted when a door TM – Subwoofer: 200 mm triple coil Power Flower is opened or the ignition is switched off. Observe the maximum power rating to technology for defined and dynamic reproduction avoid damaging the accessory.. of lower frequencies. Charging For optimum sound reproduction, it is ► Open the flap to access the charging area. The connection of an electrical device recommended that you put the boot floor ► With the charging area clear, place a device not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a in the high position (depending on version). in its centre. USB charger, may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems, The system is not designed to charge multiple devices simultaneously.
51 Ease of use and comfort
Removing/refitting 2. Front reading lamps Touch version with LED ► To remove it on the driver's side, move the seat backwards and unclip the fasteners.
Front courtesy lamp ► To refit it, position the mat and secure it by In this position, the courtesy lamp comes pressing. Do not leave any metal objects (coins, on gradually: ► Check that the mat is secured correctly. keys, vehicle remote control, etc.) in the – when the vehicle is unlocked. charging area while a device is being To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: – when the key is removed from the ignition charged, due to the risk of overheating or – Only use mats which are suitable for switch. interrupting the charging process. the fasteners already present in the vehicle; – when a door is opened. 1. Front touch-sensitive courtesy lamp these fasteners must be used. – when the remote control locking button is 2. Front touch-sensitive reading lamps Mats – Never fit one mat on top of another. activated, in order to locate the vehicle. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT It switches off gradually: Front touch-sensitive courtesy lamp Fitting may interfere with access to the pedals and – when the vehicle is locked.
hinder the operation of the cruise control/ – when the ignition is switched on. It comes on gradually: speed limiter. – 30 seconds after the last door is closed. – when the vehicle is unlocked. The approved mats have two fasteners Permanently off. – when the ignition is switched off. located underneath the seat. – when a door is opened. Permanent lighting. – when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate the vehicle. Courtesy lamps In "Permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time It switches off: varies according to the circumstances: – when the vehicle is locked. – With the ignition off, approximately 10 minutes. – when the ignition is switched on. Non touch-sensitive version – In energy saving mode, approximately 30 – 30 seconds after the last door is closed. seconds. The front and rear touch-sensitive reading lamps – With the engine running, unlimited. come on and go off at the same time as the When fitting the mat for the first time, on the courtesy lamp. driver's side use only the fasteners supplied in Reading lamps A long press on the courtesy lamp completely the enclosed sachet. ► With the ignition on, operate the deactivates it from coming on (confirmed by the The other mats are simply laid over the carpet. corresponding switch. "OFF" symbol).
Take care not to place anything in 1. Front courtesy lamp contact with the courtesy lamps.
52 Ease of use and comfort
Touch version with LED Touch-sensitive reading Boot fittings
3 lamps
1. Front touch-sensitive courtesy lamp 2. Front touch-sensitive reading lamps
3. Rear touch-sensitive reading lamps Front touch-sensitive courtesy lamp ► With the ignition on, press the corresponding It comes on gradually: reading lamp. – when the vehicle is unlocked. – when the ignition is switched off.
– when a door is opened. Interior ambient lighting – when the remote control locking button is Load space cover The interior ambient lighting casts soft, coloured 1. activated, in order to locate the vehicle. Boot lamp lighting in the passenger compartment, both day 2. It switches off: Stowing rings and night. 3. – when the vehicle is locked. Open storage wells You can activate/deactivate this function, 4. – when the ignition is switched on. Tool kit (depending on equipment) adjust the brightness and select a colour 5. – 30 seconds after the last door is closed. 6. Boot carpet or 2-position boot floor in the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu. The front and rear touch-sensitive reading lamps 7. Storage well come on and go off at the same time as the courtesy lamp. The stowing rings are designed to secure A long press on the courtesy lamp completely luggage using different types of retaining deactivates it from coming on (confirmed by the nets. "OFF" symbol). These retaining nets are available as an accessory. For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
53 Ease of use and comfort
2-position boot floor ► Take it past the retractable stops, then rest the floor on these stops. This two-position floor allows the boot volume to be optimised using the lateral stops located on the sides: Storage well – High position (100 kg max.): to obtain a flat ► Fully raise the boot carpet to access the floor up to the front seats, when the rear seats storage well. are folded down. Depending on version, it includes: – Low position (150 kg max.): maximum boot – A temporary puncture repair kit with the tool volume. kit. – A spare wheel with the tool kit. On certain versions, the adjustable boot floor cannot be fitted in the low position. Boot lamp It comes on automatically when the boot is To change the height: opened and goes off automatically when the ► Lift and pull the floor towards you using its boot is closed. central handle, then use the lateral stops to The lighting time varies according to the move it. circumstances: ► Push the floor all the way forwards to place it – when the ignition is off, approximately 10 in the desired position. minutes. – in energy economy mode, approximately 30 seconds. – with the engine running, unlimited.
To keep it in the inclined position: ► From the high position, lift the floor towards the load space cover.
54 Lighting and visibility
Headlamp dipping Exterior lighting control 4 stalk
Main lighting ► Rotate the ring forwards to switch them on and backwards to switch them off. When the lamps are switched off automatically
("AUTO" position), the foglamp and the dipped beam headlamps will remain on.
► Pull the stalk to switch between dipped and Front foglamps/Rear main beam headlamps. In the lighting off or “AUTO”, depending on foglamps
They operate with the sidelamps, dipped Automatic illumination of lamps/daytime version, and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily or main beam headlamps on. running lamps or (“headlamp flash”) by pulling the stalk. Lamps off (ignition off)/ Displays Daytime running lamps (engine running) Sidelamps only Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the lighting selected is on. Dipped or main beam headlamps ► Rotate the ring forwards: A fault with a lamp is signalled by the • once to switch on the front foglamps, permanent illumination of this warning • a second time to switch on the rear foglamp. lamp, accompanied by the display of a message ► Rotate the ring backwards: and an audible signal. • once to switch off the rear foglamp, Rear foglamps • a second time to switch off the front foglamps. They only work if the dipped beam If the lighting is switched off automatically headlamps are on.
("AUTO" position) or the dipped beam headlamps are switched off manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain on.
55 Lighting and visibility
► Rotate the ring backwards to switch the In some weather conditions (e.g. low Daytime running lamps / Three flashes foglamps off; the sidelamps will then switch off. temperature or humidity), misting on the ► Press briefly upwards or downwards, without internal surface of the glass of the headlamps Sidelamps Switching on the foglamps is prohibited going beyond the point of resistance; the and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear These LED lamps at the front and rear of the in clear weather or in rain, both day and direction indicators will flash 3 times. after the lamps have been on for a few vehicle light up automatically when the engine night. In these situations, the power of their minutes. starts. beams may dazzle other drivers. They must They perform the following functions: Parking lamps only be used in fog or falling snow (rules may – Daytime running lamps (lighting control stalk Vehicle side marking by lighting the sidelamps Never look too closely at the luminous vary depending on country). at position " " or " " with adequate ambient on the traffic side only. beam of LED or Full 0 AUTO Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when light). ► Depending on version, within one minute LED technology headlamps: risk of serious they are no longer necessary. – Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at position of switching off the ignition, move the lighting eye injury! "AUTO" with low ambient light or "Sidelamps control stalk up or down, depending which side Switching off of the lamps when the only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps"). the traffic is on (for example, when parking on ignition is switched off the left, moving the lighting control stalk upwards When the ignition is switched off, all of the turns on the right-hand sidelamps). lamps turn off immediately, except for dipped Direction indicators This is confirmed by an audible signal and the beam headlamps if automatic guide-me-home lighting of the corresponding direction indicator lighting is activated. lamp on the instrument panel. ► To switch off the parking lamps, return the lighting control stalk to the central position. Switching on the lamps after switching off the ignition Travelling abroad To reactivate the lighting control, rotate the Vehicles equipped with halogen ring, depending on version, to the "0" position headlamps: - lamps off, or to the AUTO" " position, then to If planning to use your vehicle in a country the desired position. that drives on the other side of the road, the
If the driver's door is opened, a temporary headlamp dipped beams must be adjusted to ► Left or right: lower or raise the lighting control audible signal warns the driver that the lamps avoid dazzling oncoming drivers. Contact a stalk, beyond the point of resistance. are on. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. They will go off automatically after a period of If you forget to cancel the direction time that depends on the state of charge of indicators for more than 20 seconds, the the battery (entering energy economy mode). volume of the audible signal will increase if the speed is above 50 mph (80 km/h).
56 Lighting and visibility Three flashes Headlamp beam height Automatic adjustment of 4 ► Press briefly upwards or downwards, without adjustment the Full LED technology going beyond the point of resistance; the direction indicators will flash 3 times. headlamps Manually adjusting the This system automatically adjusts the height of Parking lamps halogen or LED technology the headlamp beams according to the load in the Vehicle side marking by lighting the sidelamps vehicle. headlamps In the event of a malfunction, this warning on the traffic side only. ► Depending on version, within one minute lamp comes on on the instrument panel, of switching off the ignition, move the lighting accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. control stalk up or down, depending which side
the traffic is on (for example, when parking on The system then places the headlamp beams in the left, moving the lighting control stalk upwards the lowest position. turns on the right-hand sidelamps). Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT This is confirmed by an audible signal and the dealer or a qualified workshop. lighting of the corresponding direction indicator Do not touch the LED or Full lamp on the instrument panel. To avoid dazzling other road users, the height LED technology headlamps - risk of ► To switch off the parking lamps, return the of these headlamp beams should be adjusted electrocution! lighting control stalk to the central position. according to the load in the vehicle. 0 (Initial setting) Driver only or driver + front passenger Automatic illumination of 1 5 people 2 5 people + load in the boot headlamps 3 Driver only + load in the boot When the ring is at the "AUTO" position and 4 5 6 Not used a low level of ambient light is detected by This information is provided as a guide only. the rain/sunshine sensor, the number plate Depending on version, the unused positions may lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps be required. are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. They can also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.
57 Lighting and visibility
As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient on automatically when the ignition is switched Door mirror spotlamps This system is a driving aid. level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off. The driver remains responsible for These spotlamps facilitate access to the vehicle off, the lamps are switched off automatically. You can activate/deactivate this function the vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the by lighting the ground near the front doors. and adjust the guide-me-home lighting prevailing conditions of light, visibility and The spotlamps come on automatically: duration in the / touch screen traffic, and for observation of driving and Malfunction Driving Vehicle – when the vehicle is unlocked. menu. vehicle regulations. In the event of a malfunction of the rain/ – when a door is opened. sunshine sensor, the vehicle’s lighting Manual – when a request to locate the vehicle is comes on and this warning lamp is displayed in received from the remote control. The system becomes operational when the instrument panel, accompanied by an They also come on with the welcome lighting the vehicle exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h). audible signal and/or the display of a message. and guide-me-home lighting functions. When the speed falls below 9 mph (15 km/h), Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified They go off automatically after 30 seconds. the function is no longer operational. workshop. Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor Automatic headlamp Activation/Deactivation located at the top centre of the It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch windscreen behind the interior rear view dipping screen menu.
mirror; the associated functions would no When the ring is in the "AUTO” position, this The state of the system stays in the memory longer be controlled. ► With the ignition off, pull the lighting control system automatically switches between dipped when switching off the ignition. stalk toward you ("headlamp flash") to activate/ and main beam headlamps according to the In fog or snow, the rain/sunshine sensor deactivate the function. lighting and traffic conditions, using a camera Operation may detect sufficient light. In this case, Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off located at the top of the windscreen.
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the automatically after a period of time. the lighting will not come on automatically. traffic conditions do not allow the main beam headlamps to be lit: Welcome lighting – The dipped beam headlamps Guide-me-home and When the vehicle is unlocked, if the ambient remain lit. These indicator lamps welcome lighting light is low and the "Automatic illumination of come on on the instrument panel. headlamps" function is activated, this system If the ambient light level is very low and traffic automatically turns on certain exterior lamps conditions permit: Guide-me-home lighting as well as certain lamps in the passenger – The main beam headlamps compartment. Automatic come on automatically. These You can activate/deactivate this function indicator lamps come on on the instrument With the ring in the "AUTO" position, when the and adjust the welcome lighting duration panel. light is poor, the dipped beam headlamps come in the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu.
58 Lighting and visibility
This system is a driving aid. The function is deactivated if the foglamps are – road users that do not have their own The driver remains responsible for switched on. lighting, such as pedestrians, 4 the vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the When the foglamps are switched off, the function – vehicles whose lighting is obscured (for prevailing conditions of light, visibility and is automatically reactivated. example: vehicles running behind a safety traffic, and for observation of driving and This indicator lamp goes out when the barrier on a motorway), vehicle regulations. function is deactivated. – vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep slope, on winding roads, on crossroads. The system becomes operational when Pause the vehicle exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h). If the situation requires a change of headlamp Clean the windscreen regularly, When the speed falls below 9 mph (15 km/h), beam, the driver can take over at any time. particularly the area in front of the the function is no longer operational. ► A "headlamp flash" pauses the function: camera. • if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator The internal surface of the windscreen can lamps were on, the system changes to main also become misted around the camera. Activation/Deactivation beam, In humid and cold weather, demist the It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch • if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator windscreen regularly. screen menu. lamps were on, the system changes to Do not allow snow to accumulate on the The state of the system stays in the memory dipped beam. bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could when switching off the ignition. To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps obstruct the detection camera. again. Operation The system may suffer interference or If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the not work correctly: Cornering lighting traffic conditions do not allow the main beam – under conditions of poor visibility (snow, headlamps to be lit: This system makes use of the beam from a front heavy rain, etc.), – The dipped beam headlamps foglamp to illuminate the inside of a bend, when – if the windscreen in front of the camera is remain lit. These indicator lamps the main or dipped beam headlamps are on and dirty, misted or obscured (for example, by a come on on the instrument panel. the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h) sticker, etc.), If the ambient light level is very low and traffic (urban driving, winding road, junctions, parking – if the vehicle is facing highly reflective manoeuvres).
conditions permit: signs. – The main beam headlamps When the system detects thick fog, it come on automatically. These temporarily deactivates the function. indicator lamps come on on the instrument The system is not able to detect: panel.
59 Lighting and visibility
Do not operate the wipers on a dry Windscreen wipers Single wipe windscreen. In extremely hot or cold ► To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the ► Pull the stalk briefly towards you. weather, check that the wiper blades are not stalk to the desired position. stuck to the windscreen before operating the Fast wiping (heavy rain) Front screenwash wipers. ► Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and Normal wiping (moderate rain) hold. After using an automatic car wash, you The screenwash and windscreen wipers operate Without/With cornering lighting may temporarily notice abnormal noises Intermittent wiping (proportional to the for as long as the control stalk is pulled. Activation / Deactivation and poorer wiping performance. You do not vehicle’s speed) A final wiping cycle is performed when need to replace the wiper blades. Off screenwashing ends. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. With automatic air conditioning, any Single wipe (press down and release). Without AUTO wiping action on the screenwash control results in temporary closure of the air intake to avoid Switching on / off or odours inside the passenger compartment. This system starts: Automatic. – when the corresponding direction indicator is
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do switched on. Refer to the corresponding section. or not operate the screenwash if the – from a certain angle of rotation of the steering If the ignition has been switched off with screenwash reservoir is empty. wheel. the windscreen wiper active, it is Only operate the screenwash if there is no It becomes inactive: necessary to operate the control stalk to risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen – below a certain angle of rotation of the reactivate the wiping when the ignition is and hindering visibility. During the winter
steering wheel. switched on (unless the ignition is off for less period, use "very cold climate" rated products. – above 25 mph (40 km/h). With AUTO wiping than 1 minute). Never top up with water.
– when reverse gear is engaged. In position 1 or 2, the wiping frequency is Rear wiper
automatically reduced when the speed of Wiper control stalk the vehicle drops below 3 mph (5 km/h). When the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h) Before operating the wipers in wintry again, the wiping frequency returns to the conditions, clear any snow, ice or frost original frequency (fast or normal). from the windscreen, and from around the
wiper arms and blades.
60 Lighting and visibility
Single wipe ► Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with Special position of the ► Pull the stalk briefly towards you. the marking. 4 Off windscreen wipers Front screenwash This maintenance position is used while cleaning or replacing the wiper blades. It can also be ► Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and Intermittent wipe useful, in wintry weather (ice, snow), to release hold. the wiper blades from the windscreen. The screenwash and windscreen wipers operate Wash-wipe for as long as the control stalk is pulled. To maintain the effectiveness of the flat A final wiping cycle is performed when wiper blades, it is advisable to: Reverse gear screenwashing ends. – handle them with care. When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper – clean them regularly using soapy water. With automatic air conditioning, any will come into operation automatically if the front – avoid using them to hold cardboard on the action on the screenwash control results windscreen wipers are operating. windscreen. in temporary closure of the air intake to avoid This function is set via the Driving / – replace them at the first signs of wear. odours inside the passenger compartment. Vehicle touch screen menu. In the event of accumulation of snow or Before removing a windscreen wiper blade
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do hard frost or if a bicycle carrier is fitted to not operate the screenwash if the a towing system, deactivate the automatic screenwash reservoir is empty. rear wiper via the touch screen’s Driving/ Only operate the screenwash if there is no Vehicle menu. risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen and hindering visibility. During the winter period, use "very cold climate" rated products. Rear screenwash Never top up with water. ► Turn the ring all the way towards the
dashboard and hold. ► Operating the wiper control stalk within one Rear wiper The screenwash and the wiper operate for as minute after switching off the ignition will place long as the ring remains turned. the wiper blades in a vertical position. A final wiping cycle is performed when ► Proceed with the desired operation or the screenwashing ends. replacement of the wiper blades.
61 Lighting and visibility
After refitting a windscreen wiper blade Do not apply "Rain X" type water- Detection of rainfall is by means of a rain/ This indicator lamp goes off in the ► To return the wiper blades to their initial repellent products. sunshine sensor at the top centre of the instrument panel, accompanied by a position, switch on the ignition and operate the windscreen, behind the rear view mirror. message. ► Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you wiper control stalk. and remove it. Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor. If the ignition has been off for more than ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the When using an automatic car wash, one minute, the automatic wipers must Changing a wiper blade arm. switch off the automatic wipers and the be reactivated by pushing the control stalk ► Repeat the procedure for the other wiper ignition. downwards. Removing/refitting at the front In winter, wait until the windscreen is
blade. ► Starting with the wiper blade closest to you, completely clear of ice before activating the Malfunction once again hold each arm by the rigid section automatic wipers. If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the and lower it carefully to the windscreen. wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Switching on Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
Removing/refitting at the rear qualified workshop. ► Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it as far as possible. ► Clean the rear screen using screenwash fluid. ► Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it.
► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
► Carry out these wiper blade replacement arm. operations from the driver's side. ► Once again hold the arm by the rigid section, ► Give a short downwards push to the control ► Starting with the wiper blade farthest from then guide it carefully onto the rear screen. stalk. you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has it as far as possible. Automatic windscreen been accepted. Do not touch the wiper blades - risk of This indicator lamp comes on in the irreversible distortion. wipers instrument panel, accompanied by a Do not release them while they are moving - In AUTO mode, the windscreen wipers operate message. risk of damaging the windscreen! automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. If rain is detected, the wiping adapts to Switching off ► Clean the windscreen using screenwash the intensity of the rainfall automatically. ► Give the control stalk another brief push fluid. downwards or place the control stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2).
62 Lighting and visibility
This indicator lamp goes off in the instrument panel, accompanied by a 4 message.
If the ignition has been off for more than one minute, the automatic wipers must be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards.
Malfunction If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
63 Safety
General safety PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops, Hazard warning lamps Horn
equipped with the special tools required (risk recommendations of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic systems that could cause breakdowns or Do not remove the labels attached in serious accidents). The Manufacturer cannot different places on your vehicle. They be held responsible if this advice is not include safety warnings as well as followed. identification information for the vehicle. – Any modification or adaptation not intended or authorised by PEUGEOT or carried out For all work on your vehicle, use a without meeting the technical requirements
qualified workshop that has the technical defined by the Manufacturer will result in the ► Pressing the red button causes all the information, skills and equipment required, all suspension of the commercial warranty. direction indicators to flash.
of which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to They can operate with the ignition off. provide. Installation of accessory radio ► Press the central part of the steering wheel. communication transmitters Automatic operation of Depending on country regulations, Before installing a radio communication Pedestrian horn (Electric) certain safety equipment may be transmitter with an external aerial, you must hazard warning lamps mandatory: high visibility safety vests, without fail contact a PEUGEOT dealer for When braking in an emergency, depending on The pedestrian horn operates once the vehicle warning triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, the specification of transmitters which can the rate of deceleration, the hazard warning is moving and at speeds of up to 19 mph spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial lamps come on automatically. They switch off (30 km/h), in forward or reverse gear. flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. position, specific installation requirements), automatically when you next accelerate. Malfunction It is also possible to switch them off by pressing in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic In the event of a malfunction, this warning the button. Installing electrical accessories: Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC). lamp comes on on the instrument panel. – The fitting of electrical equipment or Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified accessories not approved by PEUGEOT may Declarations of conformity for radio workshop to have the system checked. cause excessive current consumption and equipment faults and failures with the electrical system The relevant certificates are available on the of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/ for information on the range of approved website. accessories. – As a safety measure, access to the * In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations. diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's ** In areas covered by ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ and ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’. electronic systems, is reserved strictly for The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
64 Safety
Horn Emergency or assistance If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, an emergency call is made 5 call automatically, independently of the deployment of any airbags.
‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ is a service that
can be accessed free of charge.
System operation – Upon switching on the ignition, if the indicator
lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes
out: the system is operating correctly. ► Press the central part of the steering wheel. Peugeot Connect SOS – If the indicator lamp is fixed red: system (PE112) malfunction – If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the ► In an emergency, press button 1 for more Pedestrian horn (Electric) emergency battery. than 2 seconds. The pedestrian horn operates once the vehicle In the latter two cases, emergency and The lighting of the indicator lamp and a voice is moving and at speeds of up to 19 mph assistance call services may not work. message confirm that the call has been made to (30 km/h), in forward or reverse gear. Contact a dealer or a qualified repairer as soon the emergency services*. as possible. Malfunction ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ immediately locates In the event of a malfunction, this warning your vehicle and puts you in contact with the The system fault does not prevent the lamp comes on on the instrument panel. appropriate emergency services**. vehicle from being driven. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► Pressing again immediately cancels the workshop to have the system checked. request. Data processing The indicator lamp flashes when the vehicle All processing of personal information by data is sent, and then remains lit when the "Peugeot Connect SOS" system (PE112) communication is established. complies with the framework for protection
* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations. ** In areas covered by ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ and ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
65 Safety
of personal information established by a call is made. The system is not traceable Peugeot Connect For technical reasons, in particular to Regulation 2016/679 (GDPR) and Directive and is not continuously monitored in its improve the quality of telematic services 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament normal operating mode. Assistance for customers, the Manufacturer reserves the and the Council, and in particular, seeks to The data in the system's internal memory is ► If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2 right to carry out updates to the vehicle's protect the vital interests of the data subject, automatically and continuously erased. Only for more than 2 seconds to request assistance on-board telematic system at any time. in accordance with Article 6.1, paragraph d) of the vehicle’s three most recent locations are (confirmed by a voice message*). ► Pressing again immediately cancels the Regulation 2016/679. stored. If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect request. Personal information processing is strictly When an emergency call is triggered, the data Packs offer with the SOS and Assistance limited to the management of the "Peugeot log is stored for no more than 13 hours. Privacy mode allows you to manage the Pack included, there are additional services Connect SOS" system used with the “112” level of sharing (data and/or position) available to you in your personal space, via European single emergency call number. Access to data between your vehicle and the PEUGEOT the website for your country. The "Peugeot Connect SOS" system is able You have the right to access the data brand. For information about the SOS and to collect and process only the following and, if necessary, submit a request to It can be configured in the Settings menu on Assistance Pack, please refer to the general data relating to the vehicle: chassis number, rectify, erase or restrict the processing of the touch screen. conditions for these services. type (passenger vehicle or light commercial any personal information not processed in By default, depending on equipment, vehicle), fuel type or power source, most accordance with the provisions of Regulation deactivate/reactivate geolocation by recent three locations and direction of travel, 2016/679 (GDPR). Third parties to which data simultaneously pressing the 2 buttons, then Electronic stability control and a timestamped log file recording the has been communicated shall be notified of press the "Peugeot Connect Assistance" automatic activation of the system. any rectification, erasure or restriction carried button to confirm. (ESC) The recipients of the processed data are the out in accordance with the aforementioned The electronic stability control programme emergency call handling centres designated Directive, unless doing so would be If you purchased your vehicle outside the includes the following systems: by the relevant national authorities in the impossible or require a disproportionate effort. PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you – Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic territory in which they are located, enabling You also have the right to lodge a complaint to have a dealer check the configuration of brake force distribution (EBFD). priority reception and handling of calls to the with the relevant data protection authority. these services and, if desired, modify them to – Emergency braking assistance (EBA). “112” emergency number. suit your wishes. In a multilingual country, – Anti-slip regulation (ASR). configuration is possible in the official national – Dynamic stability control (DSC). Data storage language of your choice. – Trailer stability assist (TSA). Data contained in the system’s memory is not accessible from outside the system until
* According to the geographic coverage of ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’, ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’ and the official national language chosen by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
66 Safety
For technical reasons, in particular to Anti-lock braking system When changing wheels (tyres and rims), improve the quality of telematic services ensure that these are approved for your 5 for customers, the Manufacturer reserves the (ABS) and Electronic brake vehicle. right to carry out updates to the vehicle's force distribution (EBFD) on-board telematic system at any time. These systems enhance the vehicle’s stability After an impact, have these systems and handling during braking, and enable greater checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect control while cornering, particularly on poor or qualified workshop. Packs offer with the SOS and Assistance slippery road surfaces. Pack included, there are additional services ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of available to you in your personal space, via emergency braking. Emergency braking the website for your country. EBFD manages the braking pressure wheel by assistance (EBA) For information about the SOS and wheel. In an emergency, this system enables you Assistance Pack, please refer to the general This warning lamp comes on fixed in the to reach the optimum braking pressure more conditions for these services. event of an ABS malfunction. quickly and therefore reduce the stopping The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive distance. carefully at a moderate speed. It is triggered in relation to the speed at which Electronic stability control Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a workshop as soon as possible. reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an (ESC) This warning lamp, when lit together with increase in braking efficiency. The electronic stability control programme the STOP and ABS warning lamps, includes the following systems: accompanied by a message and an audible Anti-slip regulation (ASR) – Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic signal, indicates an EBFD malfunction. / Dynamic stability control brake force distribution (EBFD). You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. – Emergency braking assistance (EBA). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (DSC) – Anti-slip regulation (ASR). workshop. Anti-slip regulation optimises traction using – Dynamic stability control (DSC). engine braking and by applying the brakes on The normal operation of the ABS may – Trailer stability assist (TSA). the driving wheels to avoid wheel spinning. It result in slight vibrations in the brake also enhances the vehicle's directional stability pedal. while accelerating. If there is a difference between the vehicle’s When braking in an emergency, press trajectory and the path desired by the driver, the very firmly and maintain this pressure. dynamic stability control system automatically uses engine braking and the brakes on one or
67 Safety
more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The electronic stability control system (ESC) trailer nose weight, worn or under-inflated path, within the limits of the laws of physics. workshop to have the systems checked. must not have any faults. tyres, faulty braking system, etc.), or to drive These systems are activated automatically every Between 37 and 99 mph (60 and 160 km/h), if at excessive speeds. ASR / DSC time the vehicle is started. the system detects oscillations (snaking) in the In certain cases, the system may not detect These systems enhance safety during They come into operation in the event of a grip movement of the trailer, it acts on the brakes to trailer snaking, particularly with a light trailer. normal driving, but should not encourage or trajectory problem. stabilise the trailer and, if necessary, reduces When driving on slippery or poor surfaces, the the driver to take extra risks or drive at high This warning lamp on the instrument engine power to slow down the vehicle. system may not be able to prevent sudden speed. panel flashes to indicate that they are This warning lamp flashes in the trailer snaking. It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow, operating. instrument panel and the brake lamps ice) that the risk of loss of grip increases. It light up to draw attention to this corrective action. is therefore important for your safety to keep Deactivation / Reactivation For information on towed loads and masses, these systems activated in all conditions, and Advanced Grip Control In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle stuck refer to the Technical data section or your particularly in difficult conditions. This special patented traction control system in mud, immobilised in snow, on soft ground, vehicle’s registration certificate Correct operation of these systems depends improves grip on snow, mud and sand. etc.), it may be useful to deactivate the ASR To ensure complete safety while driving with on compliance with the manufacturer's system to freely spin the wheels and regain a Towing device, refer to the corresponding For optimum grip on snow, it is recommendations relating to the wheels traction. section. recommended that you fit the vehicle (tyres and rims), braking and electronic Reactivate the system as soon as the level of with winter tyres. components, as well as the assembly and grip permits. Malfunction For optimum system performance, contact a repair procedures used by PEUGEOT It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch If a fault occurs, this warning lamp comes PEUGEOT dealer for advice on the right tyre dealers. screen menu. on in the instrument panel, accompanied fitting. The use of snow tyres is recommended, to Deactivation is confirmed by the by a message and an audible signal. ensure that these systems remain effective illumination of this indicator lamp in the If you wish to continue towing a trailer, reduce in winter conditions. All four wheels must be Recommendations instrument panel and the display of a message. your speed and drive carefully! fitted with tyres approved for the vehicle. The vehicle is designed principally to The ASR system is reactivated automatically Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified drive on tarmac roads, but it allows you to every time the ignition is switched back on or workshop to have the system checked. occasionally drive on other less passable from 31 mph (50 km/h). Trailer stability assist (TSA) The trailer stability assist system offers terrain. Reactivation is manual below 31 mph (50 km/h). When towing, this system reduces the risk of the enhanced safety in normal driving, However, it does not permit off-road driving vehicle or trailer snaking. such as: Malfunction provided that the recommendations on towing a trailer are observed. It should not – driving on terrain which could damage the In the event of a system malfunction, this Operation encourage the driver to take risks, such as underbody or strip away components (fuel warning lamp comes on, accompanied by The system is activated automatically when the towing a trailer in adverse operating pipe, fuel cooler, etc.) due to obstacles or an onscreen message and audible signal. ignition is switched on. conditions (overloading, failure to observe the stones in particular,
68 Safety
trailer nose weight, worn or under-inflated – driving on terrain with steep gradients and Activation/Deactivation tyres, faulty braking system, etc.), or to drive poor grip, 5 at excessive speeds. – crossing a waterway. In certain cases, the system may not detect
trailer snaking, particularly with a light trailer.
When driving on slippery or poor surfaces, the Operating modes system may not be able to prevent sudden Snow trailer snaking. This mode adapts its strategy to the conditions of grip encountered for each of the two front wheels on moving off. Advanced Grip Control (mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h)) This special patented traction control system Mud ► Press the DRIVE MODE button to choose improves grip on snow, mud and sand. This mode, when moving off, allows considerable one of the three driving modes; the different spin on the wheel with the least grip to optimise For optimum grip on snow, it is modes are displayed in the instrument panel. clearing of the mud and to regain grip. At the recommended that you fit the vehicle ► Depending on the circumstances, select same time, the wheel with the most grip is with winter tyres. "Snow", "Mud" or "Sand". controlled in such a way as to transmit as much For optimum system performance, contact a The chosen mode continues to be displayed in torque as possible. PEUGEOT dealer for advice on the right tyre the instrument panel. When moving, the system optimises wheel spin fitting. ► To deactivate, select "Normal" mode or any to respond to the driver's requirements as fully other driving mode. as possible. Recommendations The system is automatically deactivated when (mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h)) The vehicle is designed principally to the ignition is switched off. drive on tarmac roads, but it allows you to Sand occasionally drive on other less passable This mode allows little spin on the two driving Hill Assist Descent terrain. wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to However, it does not permit off-road driving move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck Control such as: in the sand. System that provides assistance when – driving on terrain which could damage the (mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h)) descending on loose or soft surfaces (gravel, underbody or strip away components (fuel mud, etc.) or a steep gradient. pipe, fuel cooler, etc.) due to obstacles or Do not use the other modes on sand as stones in particular, the vehicle may become stuck.
69 Safety
This system reduces the risk of slip or loss of The driver can select the system when the system will release the brakes to set the vehicle Seat belts control of the vehicle when descending, whether engine is running, when the vehicle is stationary gradually in motion. going forward or in reverse. or when moving at speeds up to approximately The brake lamps light up automatically when the Inertia reel During a descent, it assists the driver in 31 mph (50 km/h). system is regulating. The seat belts are equipped with an inertia reel maintaining a constant speed, depending on the If the speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h), which allows the strap length to automatically gear engaged, while progressively releasing the regulation is paused automatically, the adjust to your shape. The seat belt returns to its brakes. indicator lamp goes back to grey in the storage automatically when it is not used.
instrument panel, but the green indicator lamp in The inertia reels are fitted with a device which For the system to activate, the gradient the button remains on. automatically locks the strap in the event of a must be greater than 5%. Regulation resumes automatically when the collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls The system can be used with the gearbox in speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h) again, if the over. It can be released by pulling the strap firmly neutral. slope and pedal release conditions are met. and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
Otherwise, engage a gear corresponding to You can depress the accelerator or brake pedal Pyrotechnic pretensioning the speed to prevent the engine stalling. ► To select the system, at speeds below again at any time. This system improves safety in the event of a With an automatic gearbox, the system can 31 mph (50 km/h), press this button until frontal or side impact. be used with the selector at N, D or R. its green indicator lamp comes on; this lamp Off Depending on the severity of the impact, the appears in grey in the instrument panel. pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly ► Press the button until its indicator lamp goes When the system is regulating, the Active ► The system becomes active at speeds tightens the seat belts against the body of the off; the indicator lamp on the instrument panel Safety Brake system is automatically below 19 mph (30 km/h); this lamp comes occupants. also goes off. deactivated. on in green in the instrument panel. The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are At speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h), the system ► When the vehicle begins its descent, you can enabled when the ignition is on. is automatically deactivated; the indicator lamp in release the accelerator and brake pedals; the The system is no longer available: the button goes off. Force limiter – if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 system regulates the speed: This system reduces the pressure of the seat mph (70 km/h), – if the gearbox is in first or second gear, Malfunction belt on the chest of the occupant, thus improving the speed decreases and the their protection. – if the speed of the vehicle is being If a fault occurs with the system, this indicator lamp flashes rapidly, controlled by the Adaptive Cruise Control, warning lamp comes on in green, In the event of an impact – if the gearbox is in neutral or if the clutch pedal depending on the type of gearbox. accompanied by the display of a message in the Depending on the nature and is depressed, the speed decreases and the instrument panel. seriousness of impacts, the pyrotechnic indicator lamp flashes slowly; in this case, the Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT pretensioner device may trigger before Switching on maintained descent speed is lower. dealer or a qualified workshop. and independently of airbag deployment. By default, the system is not selected. On a descent, with the vehicle stationary, if you Deployment of the pretensioners is The state of the function is not saved when the release the accelerator and brake pedals, the accompanied by a slight discharge of ignition is switched off. harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
70 Safety
Seat belts activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge Fastening incorporated in the system. 5 ► Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the Inertia reel In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes buckle. The seat belts are equipped with an inertia reel on. ► Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly which allows the strap length to automatically Following an impact, have the seat belt by pulling the strap. adjust to your shape. The seat belt returns to its system checked, and if necessary replaced, storage automatically when it is not used. by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Unlocking The inertia reels are fitted with a device which workshop. automatically locks the strap in the event of a ► Press the red button on the buckle. collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls ► Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in. over. It can be released by pulling the strap firmly Front seat belts and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic Seat belt not fastened/ Pyrotechnic pretensioning pretensioning system, depending on version, unfastened alerts This system improves safety in the event of a and a force limiting system. frontal or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact, the Rear seat belts
pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants. The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are enabled when the ignition is on. Force limiter This system reduces the pressure of the seat 1. Front left seat belt warning lamp belt on the chest of the occupant, thus improving 2. Front right seat belt warning lamp their protection. 3. Rear left seat belt warning lamp 4. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp In the event of an impact 5. Rear right seat belt warning lamp
Depending on the nature and seriousness of impacts, the pyrotechnic Each of the rear seats has a three-point seat belt If the corresponding seat belt is not fastened pretensioner device may trigger before with inertia reel. or is unfastened, when the ignition is switched and independently of airbag deployment. The outer seats are fitted, depending on the on, the seat belts warning lamp comes on in the Deployment of the pretensioners is version, with a pyrotechnic pretensioning and instrument panel and the corresponding warning accompanied by a slight discharge of force limiting system. lamp (1 to 5) comes on in red in the seat belt and harmless smoke and a noise, due to the front passenger airbag warning lamps display.
71 Safety
If a rear seat belt is not fastened, the In order to be effective, a seat belt: Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or The airbags do not operate when the corresponding warning lamp (3 to 5) – must be tightened as close to the body as a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT ignition is switched off. comes on for around 30 seconds. possible; dealers. This equipment will only deploy once. If a – must be pulled in front of you with a smooth second impact occurs (during the same or a From about 12 mph (20 km/h) and for 2 movement, ensuring that it is not twisted; subsequent accident), the airbag will not be minutes, each warning lamp corresponding to – must only be used to secure one person; Airbags deployed again. an occupied seat whose seat belt is unfastened – must not show signs of tearing or fraying; flashes, accompanied by an audible signal. After – must not be changed or modified, in order Impact detection zones these 2 minutes, the corresponding seat warning to avoid affecting its performance. General information lamp remains on until the driver or the front/rear System designed to help improve the safety passenger fasten their seat belt. of the occupants sitting in the front seats and Recommendations for children the rear outer seats, in the event of a violent Use a suitable child seat if the passenger Advice collision. The airbags supplement the action is less than 12 years old or shorter than one of the seat belts equipped with a force limiting The driver must ensure that passengers and a half metres. system. use the seat belts correctly and that they Never use the same seat belt to secure more Electronic detectors record and analyse the are all fastened before setting off. than one child. front and side impacts sustained in the impact A. Front impact zone Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must Never carry a child on your lap. detection zones: B. Side impact zone always fasten the seat belt, even for short For more information on Child seats, refer to – In the event of violent impact, the airbags journeys. the corresponding section. deploy instantly and help better protect the When one or more airbags are deployed, Do not interchange the seat belt buckles, as occupants of the vehicle; immediately after the the detonation of the pyrotechnic charge they will not fulfil their role fully. Maintenance impact, the airbags deflate rapidly in order not incorporated in the system makes a noise and Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt In accordance with current safety to hinder the visibility or the possible exit of the releases a small quantity of smoke. is reeled in correctly. regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's occupants. This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with – In the event of a slight impact, a rear impact individuals may experience slight irritation. seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned the skills and equipment needed, which a and under certain rollover conditions, the airbags The detonation noise associated with the and reeled in correctly. PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. may not deploy; only the seat belt helps to deployment of one or more airbags may result Have the seat belts checked regularly by a protect you in these situations. in a slight loss of hearing for a short time. Installation PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, The seriousness of the impact depends on the The lower part of the strap must be particularly if the straps show signs of nature of the obstacle and the speed of the positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. damage. vehicle at the moment of collision. The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder. * For more information on Deactivating the front passenger airbag, refer to the corresponding section.
72 Safety
The airbags do not operate when the Front airbags The front airbag inflates between the thorax and ignition is switched off. head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the 5 This equipment will only deploy once. If a steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, second impact occurs (during the same or a passenger's side, to cushion their forward subsequent accident), the airbag will not be movement. deployed again. Lateral airbags Impact detection zones In the event of a serious side impact, this system protects the driver and the passengers to mitigate the risk of injury to the chest, between the hip and the shoulder. At the front, each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest frame, on the door side. At the This system protects the driver and front rear, each lateral airbag is fitted in the rear pillar. passenger in the event of a serious front impact, in order to limit the risk of head and chest Deployment A. Front impact zone injuries. They are deployed on one side in the event of a B. Side impact zone The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the serious side impact applied to all or part of the steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is side impact zone B. When one or more airbags are deployed, fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. the detonation of the pyrotechnic charge The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and incorporated in the system makes a noise and The front airbags are adaptive. In shoulder of the vehicle's occupant and the releases a small quantity of smoke. particular, they inflate less firmly in the corresponding door trim panel. This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive presence of a smaller occupant, with the seat individuals may experience slight irritation. set in a forward longitudinal position. Curtain airbags The detonation noise associated with the System contributing towards greater protection for the driver and passengers (with the exception deployment of one or more airbags may result Deployment in a slight loss of hearing for a short time. of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a They deploy, except the front passenger airbag serious side impact in order to limit the risk of if it is deactivated*, in the event of a serious front injury to the side of the head. impact to all or part of the front impact zone A. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.
* For more information on Deactivating the front passenger airbag, refer to the corresponding section.
73 Safety
Deployment fix or attach anything close to or in the way of Do not fix or attach anything to the steering Do not remove the grab handles installed on It deploys simultaneously with the corresponding the airbag release trajectory; this could cause wheel or dashboard, as this could cause the roof, as they play a part in securing the lateral airbag in the event of a serious side injuries during their deployment. injuries when the airbags are deployed. curtain airbags. impact applied to all or part of the side impact Never modify the original definition of your zone B. vehicle, particularly in the area directly around Lateral airbags The curtain airbag inflates between the front the airbags. Use only approved covers on the seats, Child seats and rear occupants of the vehicle and the After an accident or if the vehicle has been compatible with the deployment of the lateral corresponding windows. stolen, have the airbag systems checked. airbags. For information on the range of seat The regulations on carrying children are All work on the airbag systems must only covers suitable for your vehicle, contact a specific to each country. Refer to the Malfunction be performed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a PEUGEOT dealer. legislation in force in your country. If this warning lamp comes on in the qualified workshop. Do not fix or attach anything to the seat For maximum safety, please observe the instrument panel, you must contact a Even if all of the precautions mentioned backrests (clothes, etc.), as this could cause following recommendations: PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to are observed, a risk of injury or of minor injuries to the thorax or arm when the lateral – In accordance with European regulations, all have the system checked. burns to the head, chest or arms cannot be airbag is deployed. children under the age of 12 or less than 4 The airbags may not be deployed in the event of ruled out when an airbag is deployed. The Do not sit with the upper part of the body any ft 11” (150 cm) tall must travel in approved a serious impact. airbag inflates almost instantly (within a few nearer to the door than necessary. , on seats milliseconds) then deflates within the same The vehicle's front door panels include side child seats suited to their weight In the event of a minor impact or bump at fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings. time discharging the hot gas via openings impact sensors. the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle – provided for this purpose. A damaged door or any unauthorised or Statistically, the safest seats in your rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed. incorrectly executed work (modification or vehicle for carrying children are the rear In the event of a rear or front collision, none of seats. Front airbags repair) on the front doors or their interior trim the lateral airbags are deployed. – Do not drive holding the steering wheel could compromise the operation of these Children weighing less than 9 kg must by its spokes or resting your hands on the sensors - risk of malfunction of the lateral travel in the "rear facing" position, whether in Advice centre part of the wheel. airbags! the front or rear of the vehicle. Passengers must not place their feet on the Such work must only be done by a PEUGEOT It is recommended that children travel For the airbags to be fully effective, dashboard. dealer or a qualified workshop. on the rear seats of the vehicle: observe the safety recommendations Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags – ‘rear facing’ up to the age of 3, below. can cause burns or the risk of injury from a Curtain airbags – ‘forward facing’ over the age of 3. Adopt a normal upright sitting position. cigarette or pipe. Do not fix or attach anything to the roof, Fasten the seat belt ensuring it is correctly Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or as this could cause head injuries when the positioned and adjusted. hit it violently. curtain airbag is deployed. Do not leave anything between the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, object, etc.), nor
74 Safety
Do not remove the grab handles installed on Make sure that the seat belt is correctly Installing a booster seat the roof, as they play a part in securing the positioned and tightened. The chest part of the seat belt must be 5 curtain airbags. For child seats with a support leg, ensure that positioned on the child's shoulder without the support leg is in firm and steady contact touching the neck. with the floor. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt Child seats passes correctly over the child's thighs. Use a booster seat with backrest, equipped The regulations on carrying children are Advice with a belt guide at shoulder level. specific to each country. Refer to the An incorrectly installed child seat legislation in force in your country. compromises the child's safety in the Additional protections event of an accident. To prevent accidental opening of the For maximum safety, please observe the Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock". following recommendations: buckle under the child seat, as this could Take care not to open the rear windows by – In accordance with European regulations, all destabilise it. more than one third. children under the age of 12 or less than 4 Remember to fasten the seat belts or the To protect young children from the rays of the ft 11” (150 cm) tall must travel in approved harness of child seats, keeping the slack sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows. child seats suited to their weight, on seats relative to the child's body to a minimum, As a safety precaution, do not leave: fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings. even for short journeys. – a child alone and unattended in a vehicle, – Statistically, the safest seats in your When installing a child seat using the seat – a child or an animal in a vehicle which is vehicle for carrying children are the rear belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, seats. correctly on the child seat and that it secures – the keys within reach of children inside the – Children weighing less than 9 kg must the child seat firmly on the seat of the vehicle. vehicle. travel in the "rear facing" position, whether in If the passenger seat is adjustable, move it the front or rear of the vehicle. forwards if necessary. It is recommended that children travel Remove the head restraint before Child seat at the rear on the rear seats of the vehicle: installing a child seat with a backrest on a "Forward facing" or "Rearward – ‘rear facing’ up to the age of 3, passenger seat. – ‘forward facing’ over the age of 3. Ensure that the head restraint is stored or facing"
attached securely to prevent it from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.
75 Safety
"Forward facing" Deactivating the front
passenger airbag
► Move the vehicle's front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the "forward facing" child seat or the
"rearward facing" child seat itself do not touch
the vehicle's front seat. Warning label - Front passenger airbag ► Verify that the backrest of the "forward facing"
You must leave the front passenger child seat is as close as possible to the backrest airbag active. Passenger airbag OFF of the vehicle's rear seat, and is ideally in contact with it. For your child’s safety, the front "Rearward facing" passenger airbag MUST be deactivated Centre rear seat when a "rearward facing" child seat is A child seat with a support leg must never be installed on the front passenger seat. installed on the centre rear passenger seat. Otherwise, the child would be exposed to the
risk of death or serious injury in the event of Child seat at the front You must comply with the following instruction, airbag deployment. as reminded by the warning label on both sides of the passenger sun visor: Vehicles not equipped with a
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint deactivation/reactivation control Installing a "rearward facing" child seat on The front passenger airbag must be on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in deactivated before installing a rearward the front passenger seat is strictly prohibited
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the facing child seat. Otherwise, the child risks - risk of death or serious injury in the event of ► Adjust the front passenger seat to the CHILD can occur. being seriously injured or killed if the airbag deployment! highest and fully back longitudinal position, airbag deploys. with the backrest straightened. Deactivating/Reactivating the front passenger airbag For vehicles on which it is fitted, the control is located on the side of the glove box.
76 Safety
Deactivating the front Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg 5 passenger airbag
L1 "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the "rearward facing" position. Passenger airbag OFF Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
For your child’s safety, the front passenger airbag MUST be deactivated With the ignition off: when a "rearward facing" child seat is ► To deactivate the airbag, turn the key in the installed on the front passenger seat. switch to the "OFF" position. Otherwise, the child would be exposed to the ► To reactivate it, turn the key to the "ON"
risk of death or serious injury in the event of position. airbag deployment. When the ignition is switched on: L5 This warning lamp comes on and remains "RÖMER KIDFIX XP" Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX Vehicles not equipped with a lit to signal the deactivation. mountings. deactivation/reactivation control Or The child is restrained by the seat belt. Installing a "rearward facing" child seat on This warning lamp comes on for about 1 A version with a removable backrest may be the front passenger seat is strictly prohibited minute to signal the activation. used for children weighing more than 25 kg. - risk of death or serious injury in the event of However, for better protection, use a booster airbag deployment! Recommended child seats Range of recommended child seats secured seat with backrest for all children weighing up using a three-point seat belt. to 36 kg. Deactivating/Reactivating the front passenger airbag For vehicles on which it is fitted, the control is “ISOFIX" mountings located on the side of the glove box. The seats shown below are fitted with ISOFIX
compliant mountings:
77 Safety
► Pass the strap of the child seat behind the seat backrest, in between the 2 head restraint anchoring points. ► Secure the upper strap hook to ring B. ► Tighten the upper strap. When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the left-hand rear seat of the bench seat, before fitting the seat, first move the centre
rear seat belt towards the middle of the Front seat vehicle, so as to avoid the seat interfering
with the operation of the seat belt. * Depending on version. The mountings comprise three rings for each An incorrectly installed child seat in a seat, indicated by a marking: vehicle compromises the child's safety in – Two rings A, located between the vehicle seat the event of an accident. backrest and cushion. Strictly observe the fitting instructions provided in the user guide supplied with the child seat.
For information about the options for i-Size child seats * Depending on country of sale. fitting ISOFIX child seats in your vehicle, i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A. Rear seats refer to the summary table. These i-Size child seats also have: This system prevents the child seat from tipping – either an upper strap that is attached to ring B. forwards in the event of a front impact. – or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position. This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, Recommended ISOFIX child Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision. reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in the The 2 latches of ISOFIX child seats are secured For more information on the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section. vehicle. seats to them. To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: Also consult the user guide from the child – One ring B, located behind the seat, called ► Remove and stow the head restraint before seat’s manufacturer to find out how to the TOP TETHER, for fixing seats fitted with an Installing ISOFIX and i-Size universal child seats installing the child seat on this seat (refit it once install and remove the seat. upper strap. In compliance with European regulations, this table indicates the possibilities for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved
the child seat has been removed). (a) as well as the largest ISOFIX and i-Size for the seat positions fitted with ISOFIX anchoring points in the vehicle.
78 Safety
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" 5 "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" (size category: B1) base" (size category: B1) Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (size category: E) Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg Suitable for forward-facing installation only. Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Attached to rings A and ring B, referred to as
TOP TETHER, using an upper strap. Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining,
lying down.
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX This child seat can also be used in seat base which is attached to rings A. positions not equipped with ISOFIX The base has a support leg, height- mountings. In this case, it must be secured to adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor. the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt. This child seat can also be secured with a Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used child's feet do not touch the backrest. and attached to the vehicle seat using the three-point seat belt. i-Size child seats i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A. These i-Size child seats also have: – either an upper strap that is attached to ring B. – or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position. Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision. For more information on the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section. Installing ISOFIX and i-Size universal child seats In compliance with European regulations, this table indicates the possibilities for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved (a) as well as the largest ISOFIX and i-Size for the seat positions fitted withISOFIX anchoring points in the vehicle.
79 Safety
Seat number Front seats Rear seats (j) (j)
1 3 4 5 6
3 1 4 5 6
Front passenger airbag Deactivated “OFF” Activated “ON” (c) (b)
Position compatible with a universal (a) no yes (d) (f) yes yes (e) yes child seat Position compatible with an i-Size child no yes yes no yes seat Position equipped with a TOP TETHER no yes yes no yes hook
"Carrycot" type child seat no no yes (g) no yes (g) "Rearward facing" ISOFIX child seat no R3 no R3 (h) (i) no R3 (h) (i) "Forward facing" ISOFIX child seat no F3 F3 no F3 Booster child seat no B3 B3 no B3 (k)
Rules: – A position that is F3 compatible is also (a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be – A position that is i-Size compatible is also compatible for F2X and F2. installed in all vehicles using the seat belt. compatible for R1, R2 and F2X, F2, B2. – A position that is B3 compatible is also – A position that is R3 compatible is also compatible for B2. compatible for R1 and R2.
80 Safety
(b) To install a "rearward facing" child seat at Front passenger airbag activated. 5 this seat position, the front passenger airbag must be deactivated "OFF" . Seat position suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt (c) Only a "forward facing" child seat is and universally approved "rearward facing" authorised at this seat position with the front and/or "forward facing". passenger airbag activated "ON". Seat position suitable for the installation a (d) For a seat with height adjustment, adjust child seat secured using the seat belt and the seat to the highest position and move it universally approved "forward facing". fully back. Seat position where securing an i-Size child seat is authorised. (e) Never install a child seat with a support leg Seat position where securing a "forward on the centre rear seat. facing" i-Size child seat is authorised. (f) For a seat without height adjustment, the Presence of a TOP TETHER mounting at backrest must be straightened. the rear of the backrest, authorising the attachment of a "forward facing" universal (g) Installing a “Carrycot” type child seat on ISOFIX child seat. this seat may prevent the installation of Presence of a TOP TETHER mounting at additional child seats in the rear. the rear of the backrest, authorising the (h) Adjust the driver's seat to the highest attachment of a "forward facing" universal position. ISOFIX child seat. "Rearward facing" ISOFIX child seat: (i) Adjust the front passenger seat to the fully forward position. – R1: ISOFIX child seat for baby. (j) Depending on version, refer to the – R2: ISOFIX reduced size child seat. legislation in force in your country before – R3: ISOFIX large size child seat. installing a child in this seat position. "Forward facing" ISOFIX child seat: Key (k) Do not fold down the backrest. Seat position where the installation of a – F2X: ISOFIX child seat for toddlers. child seat is forbidden. – F2: ISOFIX reduced height child seat. Front passenger airbag deactivated. – F3: ISOFIX full height child seat. Child booster seat.
81 Safety
ISOFIX "carrycot" type child seat: Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a malfunction of the electric
– L1: head to the left-hand side. child lock. – L2: head to the right-hand side. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Manual child lock
With the child lock activated, it is still
Do not confuse the child lock control, possible to open the rear doors from which is red, with the back-up locking Doors and electric windows outside and/or to operate the rear electric The system prevents a rear door from being control, which is black. Versions with 2 controls windows from the driver's door.
opened using its interior handle. The red control is located on the edge of each This system is independent and in no rear door (marked by a label). circumstances does it take the place of
Electric child lock
the central locking control. Depending on version, this system prevents the Locking / Unlocking Check the status of the child lock each time opening of the rear doors using their interior you switch on the ignition. handles and/or the use of the rear electric Always keep the electronic key with you when window controls. leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.
Versions with 1 control In the event of a serious impact, the electric Doors only/Electric windows only child lock is switched off automatically to permit the exit of the rear passengers. Activation/Deactivation ► To lock, turn the red control as far as it will go ► With the ignition on, press the corresponding using the integral key: button to activate/deactivate the child lock • To the right on the left-hand rear door. (confirmed by the corresponding indicator lamp • To the left on the right-hand rear door. coming on/going out). ► To unlock, turn it in the opposite direction.
The activation/deactivation of the child lock is
also indicated by the display of a message. Electric windows only This control supplements the manual child lock for the rear doors.
82 Safety
Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a malfunction of the electric 5 child lock. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
With the child lock activated, it is still possible to open the rear doors from outside and/or to operate the rear electric windows from the driver's door.
This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of the central locking control. Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition. Always keep the electronic key with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time. In the event of a serious impact, the electric child lock is switched off automatically to permit the exit of the rear passengers.
83 Driving
Driving recommendations Do not park the vehicle or leave the ► check that the depth of water does not – Vacuum pump when braking. engine running on a flammable exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that – Vehicle tyres or aerodynamics when driving. ► Observe the driving regulations and remain surface (e.g. dry grass, dead leaves).The might be generated by other users, – Jolting and knocking noise during hill starts. vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. vehicle exhaust system is very hot, even ► deactivate the Stop & Start function, ► Monitor your environment and keep your several minutes after the engine stops. Risk ► drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In Towing hands on the wheel to be able to react to of fire! all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h), Driving with a trailer places greater anything that may happen any time. ► do not stop and do not switch off the engine. ► Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for demands on the towing vehicle and Never leave a vehicle unattended with On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety braking and maintain a longer safety distance, particular care must be taken. the engine running. If you have to leave conditions allow, make several light brake especially in bad weather. your vehicle with the engine running, apply applications to dry the brake discs and pads. ► Stop the vehicle to carry out operations that Do not exceed the maximum towable the parking brake and put the gearbox or If in doubt about the state of your vehicle, require close attention (such as adjustments). weights. drive selector into neutral or position N or P contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► During long trips, take a break every two reduce the maximum load by (depending on version). workshop. At altitude: hours. 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the lower Noise (Electric) air density at high altitudes decreases engine Important! Never leave children inside the vehicle performance. unsupervised. On the outside Never leave the engine running in a Due to the vehicle’s quiet operation when driving, closed space without sufficient New vehicle: do not tow a trailer until the On flooded roads the driver should pay particular attention. vehicle has driven at least 620 miles ventilation. Internal combustion engines emit At speeds of up to 19 mph (30 km/h), the We strongly advise against driving on flooded (1,000 kilometres). toxic exhaust gases such as carbon pedestrian horn warns other road users of the roads, as this could cause serious damage to monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death! vehicle’s presence. the engine or gearbox, as well as to the electrical If the outside temperature is high, let the systems of your vehicle. Cooling the traction battery engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the
In very severe wintry conditions (temperature below -23°C), let the engine The cooling fan comes on during vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool. run for 4 minutes before moving off, to ensure charging to cool the on-board charger and the traction battery. the correct operation and durability of the Before setting off mechanical components of your vehicle (engine and gearbox). On the inside Nose weight During use, you may hear certain perfectly ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
Never drive with the parking brake normal noises specific to electric vehicles, such heaviest items are as close as possible to the applied. Risk of overheating and If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road: as: axle and the nose weight (at the point where it damaging the braking system! – Traction battery relay when starting.
84 Driving
– Vacuum pump when braking. joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum Brakes – Vehicle tyres or aerodynamics when driving. permitted without exceeding it. 6 Braking distances are increased when towing a – Jolting and knocking noise during hill starts. Tyres trailer. To avoid overheating the brakes, the use Towing ► Check the tyre pressures of the towing of engine braking is recommended. vehicle and of the trailer, observing the Side wind Driving with a trailer places greater recommended pressures. Bear in mind that the vehicle will be more demands on the towing vehicle and Lighting susceptible to wind when towing. particular care must be taken. ► Check the electrical signalling on the trailer and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle. Do not exceed the maximum towable Anti-theft protection weights. If a genuine PEUGEOT towing device is At altitude: reduce the maximum load by used, the rear parking sensors will be Electronic immobiliser 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the lower deactivated automatically to avoid the audible The keys include an electronic engine air density at high altitudes decreases engine signal. immobiliser system, with a code that must be performance. recognised in order for starting to be possible. When driving If the system malfunctions, indicated by the New vehicle: do not tow a trailer until the display of a message, the engine will not start. Cooling vehicle has driven at least 620 miles Contact a PEUGEOT dealer. (1,000 kilometres). Towing a trailer uphill causes the coolant temperature to increase. The maximum towable If the outside temperature is high, let the load depends on the gradient and the exterior engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the temperature. The fan’s cooling capacity does not vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool. increase with engine speed. ► Reduce speed and lower the engine speed to limit heating up. Before setting off In all cases, pay attention to the coolant Nose weight temperature. If this warning lamp and the STOP ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the warning lamp come on, stop the heaviest items are as close as possible to the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as axle and the nose weight (at the point where it possible.
85 Driving
Starting / Switching off the Once the state of charge of the battery drops to ► With a Diesel engine, turn the key to position ► With the engine at idle, turn the key to the reserve level, the system switches to energy 2, ignition on, to operate the engine preheating position 1. engine with the key economy mode : the power supply is cut off system. ► Remove the key from the ignition switch. automatically to preserve the remaining battery Wait until this warning lamp goes off in the ► To lock the steering column, turn the steering Key ignition switch charge. instrument panel, then operate the starter wheel until it locks. motor by turning the key to position 3 without To facilitate unlocking of the steering Starting the engine pressing the accelerator pedal, until the engine column, it is recommended that the With the parking brake applied: starts. As soon as the engine starts, release the wheels be returned to the straight ahead ► With a , place the gear lever key. manual gearbox position before switching off the engine. in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. In wintry conditions, the warning lamp ► With an automatic gearbox, place the gear may stay on for a longer period. When Never switch off the ignition before the selector in mode N or P then fully depress the the engine is hot, the warning lamp does not complete immobilisation of the vehicle. brake pedal. come on. With the engine off, the braking and steering ► Insert the key into the ignition switch; the assistance systems are also cut off - risk of system recognises the code. If the engine does not start straight away, loss of control of the vehicle!
► Unlock the steering column by simultaneously switch off the ignition. Wait a few It has 3 positions: turning the steering wheel and the key. seconds before operating the starter motor – 1. Stop: inserting and removing the key, Check that the parking brake is correctly In certain cases, you may have to apply again. If the engine does not start after a few steering column locked. applied, particularly on sloping ground. significant force to move the steering attempts, do not keep trying - risk of – 2. Ignition: steering column unlocked, ignition When leaving the vehicle, keep the key in wheel (wheels on full lock, for example). damaging the starter motor and the engine. on, Diesel preheating, engine running. your possession and lock the vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified – 3. Starting. ► With a , operate the starter petrol engine workshop. motor by turning the key to position 3 without Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key Energy economy mode pressing the accelerator pedal, until the engine or the remote control. It would weigh In mild conditions, do not leave the After the engine has stopped (position 1. Stop), starts. As soon as the engine starts, release the down on its shaft in the ignition switch and engine to warm up while stationary, but for a maximum combined duration of about thirty key. could cause a malfunction. move off straight away and drive at moderate minutes, you can still use functions such as the With petrol engines, after a cold start, speed. audio and telematics system, courtesy lamps, windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, Ignition on position preheating the catalytic converter can cause noticeable engine vibrations for etc. It allows the use of the vehicle's electric Switching off the engine anything up to 2 minutes while stationary with For more information on Energy equipment or portable devices to be charged. ► Immobilise the vehicle. the engine running (accelerated idle speed). economy mode, refer to the corresponding section.
86 Driving
► With the engine at idle, turn the key to Key left in Starting position 1. When opening the driver's door, an alert 6 ► Remove the key from the ignition switch. message is displayed, accompanied by an ► To lock the steering column, turn the steering audible signal, to remind you that the key is wheel until it locks. still in the ignition switch at position 1 (Stop). If the key has been left in the ignition switch To facilitate unlocking of the steering at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will be column, it is recommended that the switched off automatically after one hour. wheels be returned to the straight ahead To switch the ignition back on, turn the key position before switching off the engine. to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2 (Ignition on).
Never switch off the ignition before the complete immobilisation of the vehicle. ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever With the engine off, the braking and steering Starting / Switching off the in neutral and fully depress the clutch pedal. assistance systems are also cut off - risk of ► With an automatic gearbox, select mode P loss of control of the vehicle! engine with Keyless Entry or N and press the brake pedal. and Starting ► Press the "START/STOP" button while Check that the parking brake is correctly maintaining pressure on the pedal until the applied, particularly on sloping ground. The electronic key must be present in the engine starts. When leaving the vehicle, keep the key in passenger compartment. For Diesel engines, when the temperature is your possession and lock the vehicle. For versions equipped with Proximity Keyless below zero and/or the engine is cold, starting will Entry and Starting, the electronic key is also only occur once the preheating warning lamp is off. Energy economy mode detected in the boot. If it is not detected, a message is displayed. If this warning lamp comes on after After the engine has stopped (position 1. Stop), Move the electronic key so that the engine pressing the "START/STOP" button: for a maximum combined duration of about thirty can be started or switched off. ► Keep the pedal fully depressed and do not minutes, you can still use functions such as the If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key press the "START/STOP" button again until the audio and telematics system, courtesy lamps, not detected - Back-up starting or Back-up engine is running. windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, switch-off" section. If one of the starting conditions is not met, a etc. message is displayed. For more information on Energy In some circumstances, a message indicates economy mode, refer to the that it is necessary to turn the steering wheel corresponding section.
87 Driving
while pressing the "START/STOP" button to Never leave your vehicle with the accompanied by the display of a warning assist unlocking of the steering column. electronic key still inside. message.
With petrol engines, after a cold start, preheating the catalytic converter can Starting/Switching off the Switching on the ignition cause noticeable engine vibrations for electric motor without starting the engine
anything up to 2 minutes while stationary with
the engine running (accelerated idle speed). Starting ► Place and hold the remote control against the The drive selector must be in mode P. If the engine stalls, release the clutch ► Fully depress the brake pedal and briefly reader. ► , place the gear lever pedal and fully depress it again, the press the "START/STOP" button. With a manual gearbox engine will restart automatically. ► Keep your foot on the brake pedal until the in neutral, then fully depress the clutch pedal. ► READY indicator lamp comes on and an audible With an automatic gearbox or a drive signal is emitted, indicating that the vehicle is selector, select mode P, then fully depress the Switching off ready to drive. brake pedal. ► Immobilise the vehicle, with the engine at ► With your foot on the brake, press the ► Press the "START/STOP" button.
The engine starts. idle. "Unlock" button and select mode D/B or R. ► With a manual gearbox, ideally put the gear ► Release the brake pedal, then accelerate. With the electronic key in the passenger lever into neutral. compartment, pressing the “ ” Back-up switch-off On starting, the instrument panel lights up and START/STOP ► With an automatic gearbox, ideally select the power indicator needle or cursor moves button, without pressing any of the pedals, mode P or N. to the "neutral" position. The steering column allows the ignition to be switched on without ► Press the "START/STOP" button.. automatically unlocks (you may hear a sound starting the engine. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn and feel the steering wheel move). ► Press this button again to switch off the the steering wheel to lock the steering column. Switching off ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. If the vehicle is not immobilised, the ► Press the "START/STOP" button. Key not detected engine will not switch off. Before exiting the vehicle, check that: – The drive selector is in mode P. Back-up starting With the engine off, the braking and – The READY indicator lamp is off. A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column, steering assistance systems are also cut If the driver's door is opened while the to enable the engine to be started if the system off - risk of loss of control of the vehicle! required conditions for stopping are not fails to detect the key in the recognition zone, or If the electronic key is not detected or is no satisfied, an audible signal is emitted, if the battery in the electronic key is discharged. longer in the recognition zone, a message
88 Driving
appears in the instrument panel when closing a When driving the vehicle, if this warning door or trying to switch off the engine. lamp and the STOP warning lamp come 6 ► To confirm the instruction to switch off the on, accompanied by an audible signal and the engine, press the "START/STOP" button for display of a message, this means that the approximately 5 seconds. parking brake is still applied or has not been fully In the event of a fault with the electronic key, released. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop. ► Place and hold the remote control against the Application reader. ► Pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever Emergency switch-off the vehicle. In the event of an emergency only, the engine in neutral, then fully depress the clutch pedal. When parking on a slope, turn the can be switched off without conditions (even ► With an automatic gearbox or a drive wheels against the kerb, apply the when driving). selector, select mode P, then fully depress the parking brake, engage a gear and switch off ► Press the "START/STOP" button for about brake pedal. the ignition. ► Press the "START/STOP" button. 5 seconds. The engine starts. In this case, the steering column locks as soon as the vehicle stops. Back-up switch-off Electric parking brake Manual parking brake In automatic mode, this system applies the parking brake when the engine is switched off and releases it when the vehicle moves off. Release
If the electronic key is not detected or is no ► Pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press At any time, with the engine running: longer in the recognition zone, a message the release button, then lower the lever fully. ► to apply the parking brake, briefly pull the control lever;
89 Driving
► to release it, briefly push the control lever Manual operation ► Depress the brake pedal. while pressing the brake pedal. ► Select mode D, M or R. Automatic mode is activated by default. Manual release ► Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal. With the ignition on or engine running: Indicator lamp ► Depress the brake pedal. With a drive selector ► Depress the brake pedal. This indicator lamp comes on on the ► While maintaining pressure on the brake ► Select mode , or . instrument panel and on the control lever pedal, briefly push the control lever. D B R ► Release the brake pedal and depress the to confirm the application of the parking brake, Before leaving the vehicle, check that the If you push the control lever without accelerator pedal. accompanied by the display of the message parking brake is applied: the indicator "Parking brake applied". pressing the brake pedal, the parking lamps on the instrument panel and the control With an automatic gearbox or drive The indicator lamp goes out to confirm the brake is not released and a message is lever must be on fixed. selector, if the brake does not release release of the parking brake, accompanied displayed. If the parking brake is not applied, there is an automatically, check that the front doors are by the display of the message "Parking brake audible signal and a message is displayed on correctly closed. released". opening the driver's door. Manual application The indicator lamp flashes in response to a With the vehicle stationary: When stationary with the engine running, manual request to apply or release the brake. Never leave a child alone inside the ► Pull briefly on the control lever. do not depress the accelerator pedal In the event of a battery failure, the vehicle, as they could release the parking The control lever indicator lamp flashes to unnecessarily. Risk of parking brake release. electric parking brake will not operate. brake. confirm the application request. As a safety measure, with a manual gearbox, Automatic application if the parking brake is not applied, immobilise When the vehicle is parked: on a Automatic operation With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake the vehicle by engaging a gear. steep slope, heavily loaded or during is automatically applied when the engine is As a safety measure, with an automatic towing Automatic release . gearbox or drive selector, if the parking brake With a manual gearbox, turn the wheels First ensure that the engine is running and the switched off is not applied, immobilise the vehicle by toward the pavement and engage a gear. driver's door is properly closed. It is not applied automatically if the placing the supplied chock against one of the With an automatic gearbox or a drive selector, The electric parking brake gradually releases engine stalls or enters STOP mode wheels. turn the wheels toward the pavement and automatically as the vehicle moves off. of Stop & Start. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified select mode P. With a manual gearbox workshop. ► Fully depress the clutch pedal and engage When towing, the vehicle is approved for With automatic operation, it is also
first gear or reverse. parking on slopes of up to 12%. possible to manually apply or release the ► Depress the accelerator pedal and release parking brake using the control lever. the clutch pedal. With an automatic gearbox
90 Driving
► Depress the brake pedal. Special cases With an automatic gearbox or drive ► Select mode D, M or R. selector, while mode N is selected, 6 ► Release the brake pedal and depress the Immobilising the vehicle with the opening the driver’s door triggers an audible accelerator pedal. engine running signal. It stops when the driver's door closes With a drive selector again. To immobilise the vehicle with the engine ► Depress the brake pedal. running, briefly pull the control lever. ► Select mode D, B or R. Deactivating automatic ► Release the brake pedal and depress the Parking the vehicle with the brake accelerator pedal. released operation With an automatic gearbox or drive In some situations, for example when it is In very cold conditions (ice), applying the selector, if the brake does not release extremely cold or when towing (e.g. caravan, parking brake is not recommended. automatically, check that the front doors are breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or correctly closed. automatic operation of the system. place the chocks against one of the wheels. ► Start the engine. ► Use the control lever to apply the parking When stationary with the engine running, Immobilising the vehicle with the parking brake, if it is released. do not depress the accelerator pedal brake released ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. unnecessarily. Risk of parking brake release. ► Switch off the engine. ► Hold the control lever pressed in the release ► Switch on the ignition again, without starting direction for between 10 and a maximum of 15 the engine. Automatic application seconds. ► Release the parking brake manually by With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake ► Release the control lever. pushing the control lever while keeping your foot ► Depress and hold the brake pedal. is automatically applied when the engine is on the brake pedal. . ► Pull the control lever in the “Application” switched off ► Switch off the ignition. direction for 2 seconds. It is not applied automatically if the With an automatic gearbox or drive This indicator lamp on the instrument engine stalls or enters STOP mode selector, mode P is automatically panel comes on to confirm deactivation of of Stop & Start. selected when the ignition is switched off. The the automatic functions. wheels are blocked. ► Release the control lever and the brake With automatic operation, it is also For more information on Changing to free- pedal. possible to manually apply or release the wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. From now on, the parking brake can only be parking brake using the control lever. applied and released manually using the control lever.
91 Driving
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic Failure to follow this instruction could Automatic gearbox (EAT6) M. + / - Manual operation operation (confirmed by the indicator lamp on the cause permanent damage to the gearbox ► To shift up/down through the gears, rd th 6-speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice instrument panel going off). (inadvertent engagement of 3 or 4 gear). push the control backwards/forwards. between the comfort of automatic operation or Emergency braking manual gear changing. Engaging reverse gear Two driving modes are available: Information displayed on
In the event of a fault with the brake pedal or – operation for electronic in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill, Automatic the instrument panel management of the gears by the gearbox. driver under instruction), a continuous pull on the When a position is selected in the grate with the – Manual operation for sequential changing of electric parking brake control lever will brake the gear selector, the corresponding indicator lamp the gears by the driver. vehicle. Braking continues while the control lever lights up on the instrument panel. is pulled, and ceases when the control lever is Gear selector module P. Park released. R. Reverse The ABS and DSC systems stabilise the vehicle N. Neutral during emergency braking. D. Drive (automatic operation) If emergency braking malfunctions, the message 1...6. Gear engaged during manual operation "Parking brake control faulty" will be displayed -. Instruction not processed in manual
on the instrument panel. operation If the ABS and DSC systems ► Raise the ring under the knob and move the malfunction, indicated by lighting gear selector to the left, then forwards. one or both warning lamps on the instrument P. Park Starting the vehicle Only engage reverse gear when the panel, the vehicle’s stability is no longer ensured. – Vehicle immobilised, parking brake ► With your foot on the brake pedal, vehicle is stationary with the engine at In this event, the driver must keep the vehicle applied or released. select position P or N. idle. stable by successively pulling and releasing the – Engine starting. ► Start the engine. control lever, repeating the operation until the R. Reverse If the conditions are not met, you will hear an vehicle has stopped. As a safety precaution and to facilitate – Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle audible signal, accompanied by the display of a starting the engine: stationary, engine at idle. message. – Always select neutral. N. Neutral ► With the engine running, press the brake 6-speed manual gearbox – Press the clutch pedal. – Vehicle immobilised, parking brake pedal. applied. ► Release the parking brake, unless it is th th Engaging 5 or 6 gear – Engine starting. programmed to automatic mode. ► Move the gear selector fully to the right to D. Automatic operation ► Select position R, D or M. engage 5th or 6th gear. ► Gradually release the brake pedal. The vehicle moves off immediately.
92 Driving
M. + / - Manual operation If position N is selected inadvertently Never select position N while the vehicle while driving, allow the engine to return is moving. 6 ► To shift up/down through the gears, push the control backwards/forwards. to idle, then select position D to accelerate. Never select positions P or R unless the vehicle is completely stationary. Information displayed on When the engine is running at idle with the brakes released, if position R, D or M Manual operation the instrument panel is selected, the vehicle moves even without When a position is selected in the grate with the the accelerator being pressed. To limit fuel consumption during an gear selector, the corresponding indicator lamp Never leave children unattended in the extended standstill with the engine lights up on the instrument panel. vehicle when the engine is running. running (for example, in a traffic jam), set the P. Park When carrying out maintenance with the gear selector to N and apply the parking R. Reverse engine running, apply the parking brake and brake. N. Neutral select position P. D. Drive (automatic operation) ► Selecting position M enables sequential 1...6. Gear engaged during manual operation shifting between the six gears. -. Instruction not processed in manual Automatic operation ► To shift up/down through the gears, push the operation ► Select position D for automatic changing of control backwards/forwards. the six gears. The gearbox only changes gear if the vehicle The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive speed and engine speed conditions allow; Starting the vehicle mode, without any intervention on the part of the otherwise, the rules for automatic operation are ► With your foot on the brake pedal, driver. It continuously selects the most suitable temporarily applied. select position P or N. gear according to the driving style, the road D disappears, and the gears engaged ► Start the engine. profile and the load in the vehicle. appear in succession on the instrument If the conditions are not met, you will hear an For maximum acceleration without touching the panel. audible signal, accompanied by the display of a selector, press the accelerator fully down (kick- If the engine speed is too low or too high, the message. down). The gearbox changes down automatically selected gear flashes for a few seconds, then the ► With the engine running, press the brake or holds the gear selected until the maximum gear actually engaged is shown. pedal. engine speed is reached. It is possible to change from position D to ► Release the parking brake, unless it is When braking, the gearbox changes down position M at any time. programmed to automatic mode. automatically to provide effective engine braking. When the vehicle is stationary or moving ► Select position R, D or M. If you release the accelerator sharply, the very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1 ► Gradually release the brake pedal. gearbox will not shift to a higher gear for safety automatically. The vehicle moves off immediately. reasons.
93 Driving
This symbol is displayed if a gear is not There is a risk of damaging the gearbox: Push selector engaged correctly (gear selector between – If the accelerator and brake pedals are two positions). pressed simultaneously. – In the event of a battery failure, forcing the Switching the vehicle off selector from position P to another position. Before switching off the engine, it is possible to engage position P or N to place the gearbox in neutral. Automatic gearbox (EAT8) In both cases, apply the parking brake to Automatic 8 speed gearbox with a push selector. immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed It also offers a manual mode with gear changes to automatic mode. via control paddles situated behind the steering If the selector is not in position P, when wheel. the driver's door is opened or
approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is Gearbox selector positions ► Move the selector by pressing it forwards switched off, an audible signal sounds and a P. Park (N or R) or rearwards (N or D) once or twice, message appears. For parking the vehicle: the front wheels are A. Button P passing the point of resistance if necessary. ► Return the gear selector to P; the audible blocked. To put the gearbox into Park mode. The push selector returns to its initial position signal stops and the message disappears. R. Reverse gear B. Unlock button when released. N. Neutral To unlock the gearbox and come out of P or For example, to change from P to R, while For moving the vehicle with the ignition off, or Malfunction to change to R, with the foot on the brake pressing Unlock, push forward twice without to allow it to free-wheel. crossing the point of resistance or push once In the event of a malfunction, this warning pedal. For more information on Changing to free- crossing the point of resistance: lamp comes on and a message is Press and hold this button before pushing the wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. – In the first case, the gearbox goes from to , displayed, when the ignition is switched on. selector. P N D. Driving in automatic mode C. Button M then from N to R. In this case, the gearbox goes into back-up The gearbox manages gear changes rd To change from mode D to permanent – In the second case, the gearbox goes directly mode and is locked in 3 gear. It is possible to according to the style of driving, the road manual mode. from P to R. feel a significant jolt (without risk for the gearbox) profile and the vehicle load. while changing from to and from to . (Depending on version: with Full Park Assist, P R N R M. Driving in manual mode the manual mode is accessed via the DRIVE Steering-mounted controls Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h), local speed The driver changes gear using the steering- MODE control) In mode M or D, the steering-mounted control restrictions permitting. mounted controls. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a D. Gearbox state indicator lamps (R, N, D) paddles can be used to change gear manually. qualified workshop. They cannot be used to select neutral or to engage or disengage reverse gear.
94 Driving
in order to change mode, an alert message is displayed in the instrument panel. 6 Only appropriate attempted changes of mode are accepted.
With the engine running and the brakes released, if R, D or M is selected, the vehicle moves off, even without pressing the accelerator pedal.
Never press the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time - risk of damage to the gearbox! ► Pull the "+" or "-" paddle towards you and In the event of a battery failure, you must release to shift up or down a gear, respectively. ► Move the selector by pressing it forwards place the chocks supplied with the vehicle (N or R) or rearwards (N or D) once or twice, Information displayed on tools against one of the wheels to immobilise passing the point of resistance if necessary. the vehicle. The push selector returns to its initial position the instrument panel when released. When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox Unlocking the gearbox For example, to change from P to R, while status is displayed on the instrument panel: – From mode P: pressing Unlock, push forward twice without P : Park. ► Fully depress the brake pedal. crossing the point of resistance or push once R : Reverse. ► Press the Unlock button. crossing the point of resistance: N : Neutral. ► While continuing to press the brake pedal – In the first case, the gearbox goes from P to N, D1...D8 : Automatic mode. and the Unlock button, select another mode. then from N to R. M1...M8 : Manual mode. – From neutral N, at a speed below 3 mph – In the second case, the gearbox goes directly - : Instruction not processed in manual mode. (5 km/h): from P to R. If the driver's door is opened with the ignition on, ► Fully depress the brake pedal. a message is displayed, prompting you to set the ► While continuing to depress the brake Steering-mounted controls gearbox to mode P. pedal, select another mode. In mode M or D, the steering-mounted control Engaging reverse gear paddles can be used to change gear manually. Operation ► Slow down until you come to a stop. They cannot be used to select neutral or to With the engine running, if it is necessary to engage or disengage reverse gear. press the brake pedal and/or the Unlock button
95 Driving
► Depress the brake pedal, then press the sound. It will stop when you close the driver's ► Start the engine. Gearbox malfunction button. door again. ► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, Unlock This warning lamp comes on, ► While maintaining the presses, select push rearwards to select the automatic mode , D accompanied by an audible signal and the mode R. or forwards, while pressing the Unlock button to Special aspects of automatic mode display of a message. engage reverse . Permanent manual mode R Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The gearbox selects the gear that offers Then, from D or R: Entering the mode: Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h), optimum performance, taking account of the ► Release the brake pedal. With EAT8 without Full Park Assist button: keeping to the speed limit. outside temperature, the road profile, the vehicle ► Accelerate gradually to automatically release ► With mode D initially selected. The gearbox switches to back-up mode: mode D load and the driving style. the electric parking brake. ► Press button M; the green indicator lamp in is locked in third gear, the steering-mounted For maximum acceleration, press the accelerator The vehicle moves off immediately. the button comes on. fully down (kick-down). The gearbox changes control paddles are inoperative, mode M is no With EAT8 and Full Park Assist button: down automatically or holds the selected gear With an automatic gearbox, never try to longer available. You may feel a significant jolt ► Press the DRIVE MODE control. until the maximum engine speed is reached. start the engine by pushing the vehicle. on engaging reverse gear. This will not damage ► Select "Manual" mode, which is displayed on Steering mounted controls allow the driver to the gearbox. the instrument panel. temporarily select a gear, if the vehicle speed Stopping the vehicle Exiting the mode: and engine speed conditions permit. Selector malfunction Whatever the state of the gearbox, when the ► Push forwards once to return to D. Minor malfunction or Special aspects of manual mode ignition is switched off, mode P is engaged automatically and immediately. This warning lamp comes on, ► Press button M; the indicator lamp in the The gearbox only changes from one gear to However, in mode N, mode P will be engaged accompanied by the display of a message button goes off. another if the vehicle speed and engine speed after a delay of 5 seconds (allowing for the and an audible signal. or conditions permit. process of putting the vehicle into free-wheeling Drive cautiously and visit a PEUGEOT dealer or ► Select another mode using the DRIVE MODE a qualified workshop. control. Starting the vehicle mode). Check that mode P has been engaged and In certain cases, the selector indicator lamps From mode P: Switching off the ignition that the electric parking brake was applied may no longer come on, but the gearbox state is ► Fully depress the brake pedal. To switch off the ignition, the vehicle must be automatically; if not, apply it manually. still displayed on the instrument panel. ► Start the engine. stationary. The corresponding indicator lamps in the ► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, Major malfunction selector and the electric parking brake Changing to free-wheeling press the Unlock button. This warning lamp comes on, control lever must be on, as well as those in the For more information on Changing to free- ► Push once or twice rearwards to select accompanied by the display of a instrument panel. wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. the automatic mode D, or forwards to engage message. reverse R. If you open the driver's door while mode Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, away From neutral N: N is engaged, an audible signal will from traffic, and call a PEUGEOT dealer ► Fully depress the brake pedal. or a qualified workshop.
96 Driving
Gearbox malfunction Drive selector (Electric) B : Automatic forward drive with regenerative braking activated. 6 This warning lamp comes on, The drive selector is a pulse selector with a accompanied by an audible signal and the regenerative braking function. Operation display of a message. The drive selector provides traction control Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. based on the driving style, the road profile and Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h), the vehicle load. keeping to the speed limit. With regenerative braking activated, it also The gearbox switches to back-up mode: mode D manages engine braking when the accelerator is locked in third gear, the steering-mounted pedal is released. control paddles are inoperative, mode is no M P. Park longer available. You may feel a significant jolt For parking the vehicle: the front wheels on engaging reverse gear. This will not damage are blocked. the gearbox. R. Reverse gear N. Neutral Selector malfunction For moving the vehicle with the ignition off Minor malfunction and allowing it to free-wheel. This warning lamp comes on, For more information on Changing to accompanied by the display of a message free-wheeling, refer to the corresponding and an audible signal. section. A. Button P Drive cautiously and visit a PEUGEOT dealer or D/B. Automatic forward drive (D) or automatic To put the gearbox into Park mode. a qualified workshop. forward drive with regenerative braking (B) B. Unlock button In certain cases, the selector indicator lamps To unlock the selector and come out of P or may no longer come on, but the gearbox state is Information displayed on change to R, with the foot on the brake pedal. still displayed on the instrument panel. Press and hold this button before pushing the the instrument panel selector. Major malfunction When the ignition is switched on, the drive C. Selector state indicators (R, N, D/B) This warning lamp comes on, selector status is displayed on the instrument ► Move the selector by pushing it forwards ( accompanied by the display of a panel: N or R) or backwards (N or D/B) once or twice, message. P : Park. passing the point of resistance if necessary. R : Reverse. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, away The push selector returns to its initial position N : Neutral. from traffic, and call a PEUGEOT dealer when released. : Automatic forward drive. or a qualified workshop. D
97 Driving
For example, to change from P to R, either Driving modes are selected using the following ECO – the vehicle is completely stationary, with your push forwards twice without passing the point of control: foot on the brake pedal,
Reduces energy consumption by restricting the resistance or push just once, passing the point performance of the heating and air conditioning – certain slope conditions are met, of resistance: systems, although it does not deactivate them. – the driver’s door is closed. – In the first case, the selector goes from P to N, Free-wheeling in ECO mode: depending on Do not leave the vehicle while it is being then from N to R. version, with the EAT8 gearbox, moving into held temporarily by hill start assist. – In the second case, the selector goes directly "free-wheeling" is encouraged to slow the vehicle If someone needs to get out of the vehicle from P to R. down without using engine braking. You can with the engine running, apply the parking Regenerative braking save fuel by anticipating the need to slow down brake manually. After that, ensure that the and lifting your foot fully off the accelerator pedal. parking brake indicator lamp and the indicator The regenerative braking function emulates Further reduces traction battery electrical energy lamp P in the electric parking brake control engine braking, slowing the vehicle with no need consumption by limiting engine torque. lever are on fixed. to depress the brake pedal. When the driver SPORT releases the accelerator pedal, the vehicle slows Pressing the control displays the modes on the The hill start assist function cannot be down more quickly and recharges the battery. instrument panel. Enables more dynamic driving, acting on the deactivated. However, use of the parking ► From mode D/B, moving the push selector With an electric motor, you cannot select a mode power steering, accelerator and gear changes brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its backwards activates/deactivates the function. if the READY lamp is off. with an automatic gearbox and the possibility of operation. The D on the instrument panel is replaced with When the message disappears, the selected displaying the vehicle’s dynamic settings on the a B. mode is activated and remains indicated on the instrument panel. The state of the function is not saved when the instrument panel (except NORMAL mode). MANUAL Operation
With Advanced Grip Control, additional driving ignition is switched off. Permanent "Manual" mode with an automatic modes are available, offering enhanced traction gearbox and Full Park Assist. The driver must always be ready to use control. Enables manual gear changing using the the brake pedal: in certain situations (e.g. For more information on Advanced Grip steering-mounted paddles. full battery, extreme temperatures), the Control, refer to the corresponding section. regenerative braking level may be temporarily Whenever the ignition is switched on, NORMAL limited and deceleration may be reduced. mode is selected by default. Hill start assist NORMAL This system keeps your vehicle briefly stationary Restores the vehicle’s original settings. (for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill
Driving modes Reduces traction battery electrical energy start, while you transfer your foot from the brake The number and type of driving modes available consumption by limiting engine torque. pedal to the accelerator pedal. On an ascending slope, with the vehicle depend on the vehicle’s engine and equipment. This system is only active when: stationary, the vehicle is held for a short time when you release the brake pedal:
98 Driving
– the vehicle is completely stationary, with your – provided you are in first gear or neutral with a Operation foot on the brake pedal, manual gearbox. 6 Depending on the driving situation and the – certain slope conditions are met, – provided you are in mode or with an D M vehicle's equipment, the system may advise – the driver’s door is closed. automatic gearbox. skipping one or more gears. – provided you are in mode D or B with a drive Do not leave the vehicle while it is being Gear engagement recommendations are only selector.
held temporarily by hill start assist. optional. In fact, the configuration of the road, If someone needs to get out of the vehicle the traffic density and safety remain determining with the engine running, apply the parking factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, brake manually. After that, ensure that the the driver remains responsible for deciding parking brake indicator lamp and the indicator whether or not to follow the system’s advice. lamp P in the electric parking brake control This function cannot be deactivated. lever are on fixed. With an automatic gearbox, the system is only active in manual operation. The hill start assist function cannot be
deactivated. However, use of the parking The information appears in the instrument brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its On a descending slope, with the vehicle panel in the form of an arrow and the operation. stationary and reverse gear engaged, the recommended gear. vehicle is held for a short time when you The system adapts its gear shift release the brake pedal. Operation recommendation according to the driving Malfunction conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the driver’s requirements (power, acceleration, braking, These warning lamps come on in etc.). the event of a malfunction. The system never suggests: Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified – engaging first gear, workshop to have the system checked. – engaging reverse. Gear efficiency indicator This system helps reduce fuel consumption by Stop & Start
recommending the most appropriate gear. On an ascending slope, with the vehicle The Stop & Start function puts the engine stationary, the vehicle is held for a short time temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during when you release the brake pedal: phases when the vehicle is stopped (red lights,
99 Driving
queues, etc.). The engine restarts automatically any risk of injury caused by the engine – With a manual gearbox: with the gear lever in Engine restarting (START mode) - START mode - as soon as the driver wishes to restarting automatically. neutral and the clutch pedal released. The engine automatically restarts as soon as the move off again. – With an automatic gearbox: with the brake driver indicates the intention of moving off again. Primarily designed for urban use, the function pedal depressed until the vehicle stops or the ► With a manual gearbox: with the clutch is intended to reduce fuel consumption and gear selector in position N, with the vehicle pedal fully depressed. exhaust emissions as well as the noise level stopped. ► With an automatic gearbox: when stationary. Time counter • With the selector in position D or M: with the The function does not affect the functionalities of Driving on flooded roads A time counter adds up the time spent in standby brake pedal released. the vehicle, in particular the braking. Before entering into a flooded area, it is • With the selector in position N and the brake strongly recommended that you deactivate during a journey. It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on. pedal released: with the selector at D or M. Deactivation/Reactivation the Stop & Start system. • With the selector in position P and the brake The function is activated by default when the For more information on Driving Special cases: pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, ignition is switched on. recommendations, particularly on flooded The engine will not go into standby if all of the D or M. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch roads, refer to the corresponding section. conditions for operation are not met and in the • Reverse gear engaged. screen menu. following cases. A message in the instrument panel confirms the Special cases – Steep slope (ascending or descending). change of status. Operation – Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h) The engine restarts automatically if all the When the function is deactivated, if the engine Main conditions for operation since the last engine start (with the key or the operating conditions are met again and in the was in standby, it restarts immediately. following cases. – The driver’s door must be closed. “START/STOP” button). Associated indicator lamps – The driver's seat belt must be fastened. – Needed to maintain a comfortable temperature – With a manual gearbox: vehicle speed Function activated. – The state of charge of the battery must be in the passenger compartment. exceeds 2.5 mph (4 km/h), sufficient. – Demisting active. – With an automatic gearbox, in mode N, vehicle Function deactivated or malfunction. – The temperature of the engine must be within In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes speed exceeds 0.6 mph (1 km/h). its nominal operating range. for a few seconds, then goes off. In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes – The outside temperature must be between for a few seconds, then goes off. Opening the bonnet 0°C and 35°C. After the engine has restarted, STOP Before doing anything under the bonnet, mode is not available until the vehicle Malfunctions deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid Putting the engine into standby has reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). In the event of a malfunction, this warning (STOP mode) lamp flashes for a few moments, then The engine automatically goes into standby During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode remains on, accompanied by an onscreen as soon as the driver indicates the intention of is not available for a few seconds after message. stopping. coming out of reverse gear or turning the Have the vehicle checked by a PEUGEOT steering wheel. dealer or a qualified workshop.
100 Driving
Engine restarting (START mode) The vehicle stalls in STOP mode Driving with under-inflated tyres, particularly in adverse conditions (heavy load, high 6 The engine automatically restarts as soon as the All of the instrument panel warning lamps come driver indicates the intention of moving off again. on if there is a fault. speed, long journey): ► With a manual gearbox: with the clutch ► Switch off the ignition then start the engine – worsens road-holding. pedal fully depressed. again with the key or the "START/STOP" button. – lengthens braking distances. ► With an automatic gearbox: – causes premature wear of the tyres. The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V • With the selector in position D or M: with the – increases energy consumption. battery of specific technology and brake pedal released. specification. • With the selector in position N and the brake The inflation pressures defined for the All work concerning the battery must be pedal released: with the selector at D or M. vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a • With the selector in position P and the brake label. qualified workshop. pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, For more information on the Identification D or M. markings, refer to the corresponding section. • Reverse gear engaged. Under-inflation detection Special cases Checking tyre pressures This system automatically checks the pressures This check should be done when the The engine restarts automatically if all the of the tyres while driving. tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or operating conditions are met again and in the It compares the information given by the wheel after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at following cases. speed sensors with reference values, which moderate speeds). – With a manual gearbox: vehicle speed must be reinitialised every time the tyre Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures exceeds 2.5 mph (4 km/h), pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. shown on the label. – With an automatic gearbox, in mode N, vehicle The system triggers an alert as soon as it speed exceeds 0.6 mph (1 km/h). detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or Snow chains In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes more tyres. The system does not have to be for a few seconds, then goes off. Under-inflation detection does not reinitialised after fitting or removing snow Malfunctions replace the need for vigilance on the part chains. of the driver. In the event of a malfunction, this warning This system does not avoid the need to lamp flashes for a few moments, then Under-inflation alert regularly check the tyre pressures (including remains on, accompanied by an onscreen This is signalled by the fixed illumination the spare wheel), especially before a long message. of this warning lamp, accompanied by an journey. Have the vehicle checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
101 Driving
audible signal and, depending on equipment, the vehicle and conform to the values written on the speed to climactic conditions, traffic and certain types of paint could interfere with the display of a message. the tyre pressure label. the state of the road. operation of the radar.
► Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive Check the pressures of the four tyres before It is the driver's responsibility to constantly steering movements and avoid sudden braking. performing the reinitialisation. check the traffic, to assess the relative ► Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do The system does not advise if a pressure is distances and speeds of other vehicles and to so. incorrect at the time of reinitialisation. anticipate their movements before indicating and changing lane. The loss of pressure detected does not With the vehicle stationary, the system is The systems cannot exceed the limits of the always cause visible bulging of the tyre. reinitialised via the Driving / laws of physics. Driving aids camera Do not rely on just a visual check. Vehicle touch screen menu.. This camera and its associated functions may be impaired or not work if the windscreen ► Using a compressor, such as the one in Malfunction Driving aids the temporary puncture repair kit, check the You should hold the steering wheel area in front of the camera is dirty, misty, These warning lamps come on in pressures of the four tyres when cold. with both hands, always use the interior and frosty, covered with snow, damaged or the event of a malfunction. ► If it is not possible to make this check exterior rear view mirrors, always keep the masked by a sticker. A message appears, accompanied by an audible immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed. feet close to the pedals and take a break On versions with camera alone, this message signal. ► In the event of a puncture, use the every two hours. indicates to you that the camera is obstructed: In this case, the tyre under-inflation monitoring temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel "Driving aids camera: visibility limited, see function is no longer performed. user guide". (depending on equipment). Manoeuvring aids Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT In humid and cold weather, demist the The driver must always check the The alert is kept active until the system is dealer or a qualified workshop. windscreen regularly. surroundings of the vehicle before and during reinitialised. Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting, the whole manoeuvre, in particular using the heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle Driving and manoeuvring mirrors. Reinitialisation (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun, aids - General reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel, Reinitialise the system after adjusting one or Radar alternating shade and light) can also impair more tyre pressures and after changing one or recommendations The operation of the radar as well as the detection performance. more wheels. associated functions may be impaired through Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in In the event of a windscreen replacement, the accumulation of dirt (mud, frost, etc.), in Before reinitialising the system, make any circumstances, replace the need for contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified certain difficult weather conditions (very heavy sure that the pressures of the four tyres vigilance on the part of the driver. workshop to recalibrate the camera; rain, snow) or if the bumper is damaged. are correct for the conditions of use of the The driver must comply with the Highway otherwise, the operation of the associated If the front bumper is to be repainted, contact Code, must remain in control of the vehicle in driving aids may be disrupted. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop; all circumstances and must be able to retake control of it at all times. The driver must adapt
102 Driving certain types of paint could interfere with the Other cameras Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound operation of the radar. The images from the camera(s) waves: pedestrians may not be detected. 6
displayed on the touch screen or on the instrument panel may be distorted by the Maintenance relief. Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and In the presence of areas in shade, or in the field of vision of the cameras regularly. conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate
When washing your vehicle at high pressure, lighting, the image may be darkened and with direct the spray from at least 30 cm away Driving aids camera lower contrast. from the radar, sensors and cameras. This camera and its associated functions Obstacles may appear further away than they may be impaired or not work if the windscreen actually are. Mats area in front of the camera is dirty, misty, The use of mats not approved by frosty, covered with snow, damaged or Sensors PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of masked by a sticker. The operation of the sensors as well as the speed limiter or cruise control. On versions with camera alone, this message the associated functions may be disturbed To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: indicates to you that the camera is obstructed: by sound interference such as that emitted ► ensure that the mat is secured correctly, "Driving aids camera: visibility limited, see by noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries, ► never fit one mat on top of another. user guide". pneumatic drills), by the accumulation of In humid and cold weather, demist the snow or dead leaves on the road or in the Units of speed windscreen regularly. event of damaged bumpers and mirrors. Ensure that the units of speed displayed Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting, When reverse gear is engaged, an audible on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors those for the country you are driving in. (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun, may be dirty. If this is not the case, when the vehicle is reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel, A front or rear impact to the vehicle can stationary, set the display to the required alternating shade and light) can also impair upset the sensors’ settings, which is not units of speed so that it complies with what is detection performance. always detected by the system: distance authorised locally. In the event of a windscreen replacement, measurements may be distorted. In case of doubt, contact a PEUGEOT dealer contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The sensors do not systematically detect or a qualified workshop. workshop to recalibrate the camera; obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs) otherwise, the operation of the associated or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences). driving aids may be disrupted. Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ blind spots may not be detected or may no longer be detected during the manoeuvre.
103 Driving
Speed Limit Recognition Sign detected Suggested speed Qualifier plate Display of the and Recommendation (calculated) detected speed associated with the qualifier Refer to the General recommendations on the Entry into an Without PEUGEOT plate use of driving and manoeuvring aids. intersection area Connect Nav Example: 10 mph or 20 km/h Speed limit if If an approved towing
(depending on towing device is fixed to the the units of the vehicle: instrument panel) 56 mph (90 km/h)
With PEUGEOT (for example) Connect Nav Speed limit 43 mph (70 km/h) Display of the applicable over a (for example) speed in force in the certain distance country in which you Example: This system displays the maximum authorised are driving. speed in the instrument panel, according to – Certain qualifier plates are detected by the the speed limits in the country in which you are camera: driving, using: Speed limit for 56 mph (90 km/h) – Speed limit signs detected by the camera. Qualifier plate Display of the vehicles whose (for example) – Speed limit details from the navigation system detected speed associated gross vehicle mapping. with the qualifier weight or gross plate You should update your navigation train weight is less mapping regularly in order to receive Speed limit in rain If the wiper control than 3.5 tonnes
accurate speed limit information from the Examples: stalk is in the
system. "intermittent wipe" or "automatic wipe" – Signs indicating an intersection area detected position (in order by the camera: to activate the rain sensor): 68 mph (110 km/h) (for example)
104 Driving
The automatic reading of road signs is a Information displayed on Qualifier plate Display of the driving aid system and does not always 6 detected speed associated display speed limits correctly. the instrument panel
with the qualifier The speed limit signs present on the road plate always take priority over the display by the Speed limit in snow If the exterior system. Example: temperature is below The system is designed to detect signs that 3 °C: conform to the Vienna Convention on road 19 mph (30 km/h) signs. (for example) with a "snowflake" Specific speed limits, such as those for symbol heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. Speed limit at 19 mph (30 km/h) The display of the speed limit in the certain times (for example) instrument panel is updated as you pass Example: with a "clock" symbol a speed limit sign intended for cars (light 1. Detected speed limit indication vehicles). or 2. End of speed limit indication
Activation / Deactivation The units for the speed limit (mph or By default, the system is automatically activated km/h) depend on the country you are at every engine start. driving in. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch
This should be taken into account so that you screen menu. The system is active but is not detecting speed observe the speed limit. limit information. For the system to operate correctly when you change country, the units for speed in the instrument panel must be those for the country you are driving in.
On detecting speed limit information, the system displays the value.
105 Driving
Recommendation 2. Memorise the speed setting Depending on the road conditions, several speeds may be displayed. ► Press button 2once to save the suggested Information displayed on the
speed value. In the case of suggested maximum speeds, the instrument panel A message is displayed to confirm the request.
first time the vehicle exceeds the suggested ► Press button 2again to confirm and save the
speed by more than 3 mph (5 km/h) (e.g. 59 In addition to Speed Limit Recognition and new speed setting. mph (95 km/h)), the speed is displayed flashing The display then reverts to its previous state. Recommendation, the driver can select the for 10 seconds. speed displayed as a speed setting for the speed 3. Speed limit indication limiter or cruise control using the speed limiter or 4. Speed memorisation prompt Extended Traffic Sign Operating limits cruise control memorisation button. 5. Current speed setting Recognition The system does not take account of reduced If rain is detected, the system will propose to the Refer to the General recommendations on the speed limits, especially those imposed in the driver a speed setting lower than the speed read/ Memorising the speed use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
following cases: obtained from the mapping in order to adapt to – Atmospheric pollution. the weather conditions (example: on a motorway, – Towing. the proposed speed will be 68 mph (110 km/h) – Driving with a space-saver type spare wheel instead of 81 mph (130 km/h).
or snow chains fitted. – Tyre repaired using the temporary puncture For more information on the Speed This additional system recognises these road ► Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control. repair kit. limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive signs and displays them in the instrument panel The speed limiter/cruise control information is – Young drivers. cruise control, refer to the corresponding if the appropriate display mode is selected. displayed. The system may not display the speed limit if it sections. One-way street: if you start driving the wrong Upon detecting a sign suggesting a new speed does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset way down a one-way street, an alert message, setting, the system displays the value and period and in the following situations: including the sign's symbol, is displayed in the Steering mounted controls " " flashes for a few seconds, prompting you – Road signs that are obstructed, non-standard, MEM instrument panel (request to check the traffic to save it as the new speed setting. damaged or bent. direction). – Obsolete or incorrect maps. If there is a difference of less than 6 mph Other signs: when approaching one of these (9 km/h) between the speed setting and signs, the sign’s symbol is displayed in the the speed displayed by the Speed Limit instrument panel. Recognition and Recommendation, the "MEM" symbol is not displayed. 1. Speed limiter/cruise control mode selection
106 Driving
Depending on the road conditions, several The actual road signs always take priority Steering-mounted control speeds may be displayed. over the display from the system. 6 ► Press button 2once to save the suggested The signs must comply with the Vienna speed value. Convention on road signs.
A message is displayed to confirm the request.
► Press button 2again to confirm and save the Activation / Deactivation new speed setting. The display then reverts to its previous state. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. Extended Traffic Sign Recognition Speed limiter Refer to the General recommendations on the Refer to the General recommendations on the use of driving and manoeuvring aids. use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
This system prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the
driver (speed setting). 1. ON (LIMIT position) / OFF The speed limiter is switched on manually. 2. Reduce the speed setting The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h). This additional system recognises these road 3. Increase the speed setting The speed setting remains in the system signs and displays them in the instrument panel 4. Pause / resume speed limiter with the speed memory when the ignition is switched off. if the appropriate display mode is selected. setting previously stored One-way street: if you start driving the wrong 5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit way down a one-way street, an alert message, Recognition and Recommendation (MEM including the sign's symbol, is displayed in the display) instrument panel (request to check the traffic For more information on the Speed Limit direction). Recognition and Recommendation, refer to Other signs: when approaching one of these the corresponding section. signs, the sign’s symbol is displayed in the instrument panel.
107 Driving
Information displayed on Adjusting the limit speed ► Release the accelerator pedal to return to Malfunction below the programmed speed. the instrument panel setting When the limit speed is exceeded but this is not
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in due to action by the driver (in case of a steep order to set the speed. slope, for example), an audible signal triggers To modify the limit speed setting based on the
immediately. vehicle’s current speed: Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then ► Briefly press button or to change the On a steep descent or in the event of 2 3 fixed) in the event of a speed limiter malfunction. value in steps of + or - 1 mph (1.6 km/h). sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT ► Press and hold button or to change the not be able to prevent the vehicle from 2 3 dealer or a qualified workshop. value in steps of + or - 5 mph (8 km/h). exceeding the speed setting. 6. Speed limiter on/pause To modify the cruise speed setting based on the Brake if necessary to control the speed of 7. Speed limiter mode selected speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition your vehicle. Cruise control - particular 8. Programmed speed value and Recommendation, as shown on the recommendations 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit instrument panel: recognition and recommendation system ► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed For the safety of everyone, only use the (depending on version) to confirm the memorisation request. cruise control where the driving
► Press button 5 again to save the suggested conditions allow running at a constant speed Switching on/pausing speed. Once the speed of the vehicle returns to the and keeping an adequate safety distance. The speed is immediately shown on the ► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position to programmed setting, the speed limiter functions Remain vigilant when the cruise control instrument panel as the new speed setting. select the speed limiter; the function is paused. again: the display of the speed setting becomes is activated. If you hold one of the speed ► If you are satisfied with the limit speed setting fixed again. setting modification buttons down, a very (most recent speed setting programmed in the Temporarily exceeding the rapid change in the speed of your vehicle may system), press button 4 to switch the speed speed setting Switching off occur. limiter on. ► Press the accelerator pedal down fully. ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "OFF" position: When descending a steep hill, the cruise ► Pressing button 4 again temporarily pauses the display of information on the speed limiter control system cannot prevent the vehicle the function. disappears. from exceeding the set speed. Brake if necessary to control the speed of your An audible warning will sound if the vehicle. vehicle's speed exceeds the speed On steep climbs or when towing, the set setting for an extended period. The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and speed may not be reached or maintained. the displayed speed setting flashes.
108 Driving
Malfunction Exceeding the programmed speed programmed by the driver (speed setting), setting without using the accelerator pedal. 6 The speed setting can be exceeded Cruise control is switched on manually. temporarily by pressing the accelerator It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph pedal (the programmed speed flashes). (40 km/h).
To return to the speed setting, release With a manual gearbox, third gear or higher must Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then the accelerator pedal (when this speed is be engaged. fixed) in the event of a speed limiter malfunction. reached again, the display of the speed stops With an automatic gearbox, mode D or second Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT flashing). gear or higher in mode M must be engaged. dealer or a qualified workshop. With a drive selector, mode D or B must be Operating limits engaged. Cruise control - particular Never use the system in the following Cruise control remains active after situations: changing gear, regardless of the gearbox recommendations – In an urban area with the risk of type, on engines fitted with Stop & Start. pedestrians crossing the road. For the safety of everyone, only use the – In heavy traffic (except versions with the Switching off the ignition cancels any cruise control where the driving Stop & Go function). speed setting. conditions allow running at a constant speed – On winding or steep roads. and keeping an adequate safety distance. – On slippery or flooded roads. Remain vigilant when the cruise control – In poor weather conditions. Steering mounted control is activated. If you hold one of the speed – Driving on a speed circuit. setting modification buttons down, a very – Driving on a rolling road. rapid change in the speed of your vehicle may – When using snow chains, non-slip covers occur. or studded tyres. When descending a steep hill, the cruise control system cannot prevent the vehicle from exceeding the set speed. Brake if Cruise control necessary to control the speed of your vehicle. Refer to the General recommendations on the On steep climbs or when towing, the set use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to Cruise control - particular recommendations. speed may not be reached or maintained. ON ( position) / OFF This system automatically keeps the 1. CRUISE vehicle’s speed at the cruise value
109 Driving
2. Activate cruise control at the current speed / Switching on/pausing Pressing and holding button 2 or Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then 3 results in a rapid change in the speed fixed) in the event of a cruise control system decrease speed setting ► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position of the vehicle. malfunction. 3. Activate cruise control at the current speed / to select cruise control mode; the function is Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT increase speed setting paused. dealer or a qualified workshop. 4. Pause / resume cruise control with the speed ► Press button 2 or 3 to activate cruise control As a precaution, we recommend setting setting previously saved and save a speed setting when the vehicle has a cruise speed fairly close to the current 5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit reached the desired speed; the vehicle’s current speed of your vehicle, to avoid any sudden Drive Assist Plus Recognition and Recommendation (MEM speed is saved as the speed setting. acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle. Only available on versions with the EAT8 display) ► Release the accelerator pedal. To modify the cruise speed setting using the automatic gearbox and gear selector. ► Pressing button 4 temporarily pauses the For more information on the Speed Limit speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition This system automatically adjusts the speed and function. Recognition and Recommendation, refer to and Recommendation shown on the instrument corrects the trajectory, using the Adaptive Cruise ► Pressing button 4 again restores operation of the corresponding section. panel: Control with Stop & Go function in conjunction the cruise control (ON). ► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed with the Lane Positioning Assist. Information displayed on Operation of the cruise control can also to confirm the memorisation request. These two functions must be activated and in the instrument panel be paused temporarily: ► Press button 5 again to save the suggested operation. – by pressing the brake pedal. speed. This system is especially suitable for driving on – automatically, if the electronic stability The speed is immediately shown on the motorways and main roads. control (ESC) system is triggered. instrument panel as the new speed setting. For more information on Adaptive Cruise Control and Lane Positioning Assist, refer to Switching off the corresponding sections. Modifying the cruise speed ► Turn the thumbwheel to the " " position: 1 OFF The system assists the driver by acting the cruise control information disappears from setting on the steering, acceleration and braking,
the screen. Cruise control must be active. within the limits of the laws of physics and the 6. Cruise control pause/resume To modify the cruise speed setting, based on the capabilities of the vehicle. Certain road 7. Cruise control mode selection current speed of the vehicle: Malfunction
infrastructure elements or vehicles present on 8. Speed setting value ► Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the the road may not be properly seen or may be 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit value in steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h). poorly interpreted by the camera and radar, recognition and recommendation system ► Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the resulting in an unexpected change in (depending on version) value in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h). direction, a lack of steering correction and/or
inappropriate management of acceleration or braking.
110 Driving
Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then Adaptive Cruise Control If the driver operates a direction indicator fixed) in the event of a cruise control system to overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise 6 malfunction. Refer to the General recommendations on the control allows the vehicle to temporarily Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to approach the vehicle in front to assist the dealer or a qualified workshop. Cruise control - particular recommendations. overtaking manoeuvre, without ever This system automatically maintains the speed exceeding the speed setting. of your vehicle at a value which you set (speed Drive Assist Plus setting), while keeping a safe distance from the Some vehicles present on the road may vehicle in front (target vehicle), and which has Only available on versions with the EAT8 not be properly seen or may be poorly been set beforehand by the driver. The system automatic gearbox and gear selector. interpreted by the camera and/or radar (e.g. a automatically manages the acceleration and This system automatically adjusts the speed and lorry), which may lead to a poor assessment deceleration of the vehicle. corrects the trajectory, using the Adaptive Cruise of the distances and lead to the vehicle With the Stop & Go function, the system Control with Stop & Go function in conjunction inappropriately accelerating or braking. with the Lane Positioning Assist. manages the braking until the vehicle comes to a These two functions must be activated and in complete stop and the restarting of the vehicle. operation. The brake lamps come on if the vehicle Steering mounted control This system is especially suitable for driving on is slowed down by the system. motorways and main roads. It can be dangerous to drive if the brake For more information on Adaptive Cruise lamps are not in perfect working order. Control and Lane Positioning Assist, refer to the corresponding sections.
The system assists the driver by acting on the steering, acceleration and braking,
within the limits of the laws of physics and the capabilities of the vehicle. Certain road To do so, it has a camera located at the top of infrastructure elements or vehicles present on the windscreen and, depending on version, a 1. ON (CRUISE position) / OFF the road may not be properly seen or may be radar located in the front bumper. 2. Activation of cruise control at the current poorly interpreted by the camera and radar, speed / decrease speed setting Primarily designed for driving on main resulting in an unexpected change in 3. Activation of cruise control at the current roads and motorways, this system only direction, a lack of steering correction and/or speed / increase speed setting works with moving vehicles driving in the inappropriate management of acceleration or same direction as your vehicle. braking.
111 Driving
4. Pause / resume cruise control with the speed Pressing and holding button 2 or When the driver attempts to reactivate Deactivating the system setting previously saved 3 results in a rapid change in the speed cruise control, after the function has been ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 upwards to the OFF Confirmation of the restarting of the vehicle of the vehicle. paused, the message "Activation not possible, position. after automatic stop (versions with Stop & Go unsuitable conditions" is briefly displayed if function) Pausing / resumption of cruise control reactivation is not possible (safety conditions Information displayed on 5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit ► Press 4 or depress the brake pedal. To not met). the instrument panel
Recognition and Recommendation (MEM pause cruise control, it is also possible to: display) • shift from mode D to N; Changing the programmed speed setting 6. Display and adjustment of the distance • depress the clutch pedal for more than 10 with the Speed Limit Recognition and setting to the vehicle in front seconds; Recommendation function • press the electric parking brake control. ► Press 5 to accept the speed suggested by Use ► Press 4 to restart cruise control. Cruise the function on the instrument panel, then press control may have been paused automatically: again to confirm. Activating the system (pause) • when the speed of the vehicle goes below 19 To prevent sudden acceleration or
► With the engine running, turn the thumbwheel mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox. deceleration of the vehicle, select a downwards to the position. Cruise • when the speed of the engine goes below 1 CRUISE speed setting relatively close to the vehicle's 7. Vehicle detected by the system (full symbol) control is ready to operate (grey display). 1100 rpm with a manual gearbox. current speed. 8. Cruise control active (colour not grey) Switching on cruise control and setting • by triggering of the ESC system. 9. Speed setting value With an EAT8 gearbox or a drive selector, the speed Changing the inter-vehicle distance 10. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit following braking that has brought the vehicle to Recognition and Recommendation With a manual gearbox, your speed must be ► Press 6 to display the distance setting a complete stop, if the traffic conditions do not 11. Vehicle held stationary (versions with between 19 and 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h). thresholds ("Distant", "Normal" or "Close"), then allow the vehicle to begin moving again within automatic gearbox or drive selector) With an EAT8 automatic gearbox or a drive press again to select a threshold. 3 seconds of stopping, press button 4 or the selector, your speed must be between 0 and accelerator pedal to move off. After a few seconds, the option is accepted and 112 mph (0 and 180 km/h). If the driver takes no action after the vehicle will be memorised when the ignition is switched ► Press button 2 or 3: the current speed has been stopped, the electric parking brake is off. becomes the speed setting (minimum 19 mph
applied automatically after about 5 minutes. Temporarily exceeding the speed setting (30 km/h)) and cruise control is immediately Inter-vehicle distance setting activated (green display). Cruise control remains active after ► Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Distance 12. monitoring and cruise control are deactivated 13. Position of the vehicle detected by the ► Press 3 to increase or 2 to decrease the changing gear, regardless of the gearbox system speed setting (steps of 5 mph (km/h) if held type. while acceleration is maintained. "Cruise control pressed). suspended" is displayed.
112 Driving
Deactivating the system Messages and alerts Within 3 seconds, the vehicle gradually and automatically begins moving again. 6 ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 upwards to the OFF The display of these messages or alerts position. After 3 seconds, the driver must accelerate or is not sequential. press button 4 to move off again.
Information displayed on "Cruise control paused" or "Cruise control While the vehicle is immobilised, the the instrument panel suspended" following a brief acceleration following recommendations apply: by the driver. – The driver should not leave the vehicle. "Cruise control active", no vehicle – Do not open the boot. detected. – Do not drop off or pick up passengers. "Cruise control paused", vehicle detected. – Do not engage reverse gear.
"Cruise control active", vehicle detected. When moving off again, watch out for cyclists, pedestrians and animals, as "Take back control" (orange). they may not be detected properly.
7. Vehicle detected by the system (full symbol) ► Brake or accelerate, depending on the 8. Cruise control active (colour not grey) context. Operating limits 9. Speed setting value "Take back control" (red). Cruise control operates by day and night, in fog 10. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit or moderate rainfall. Recognition and Recommendation ► Take back control of the vehicle Certain situations cannot be managed by the 11. Vehicle held stationary (versions with immediately: the system cannot manage the system and require driver intervention. automatic gearbox or drive selector) current driving situation. Elements not detected by the system:
"Activation not possible, conditions – Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals. unsuitable". The system refuses to – Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, activate cruise control, as the necessary etc.).
conditions are not fulfilled. Stop & Go function 12. Inter-vehicle distance setting "To move off again, press the 13. Position of the vehicle detected by the system accelerator pedal or press the II button” (button 4). The system has brought the vehicle to a – Vehicles crossing your lane. complete stop.
113 Driving
– Vehicles driving in the opposite direction. Pay particular attention: ► With the Adaptive Cruise Control with Stop & Situations in which the driver must pause the – When motorcycles are present and Go function activated, press this button. cruise control system: when there are vehicles staggered across the The action is confirmed by: traffic lane. – The indicator lamp in the button lighting up – When entering a tunnel or crossing a green.
bridge. – The following symbol being displayed on the Using a camera located at the top of the instrument panel. windscreen, the system identifies lane markings The colour of the symbol on the instrument panel If any of the following malfunctions and steers the vehicle inside this lane to keep it depends on the operating status of the system: occurs, do not use the system: in the lateral position chosen by the driver. – Following an impact on the windscreen (grey colour) This function is primarily suitable for driving on close to the camera or on the front bumper One or more operating conditions is not – Vehicles in a tight bend. motorways and main roads. (versions with radar). met; the system is paused. – When approaching a roundabout. – Brake lamps not working. Conditions for operation (green colour) All operating conditions are met; the – Adaptive Cruise Control active. system is active. If the vehicle has undergone any of the – Traffic lane marked out by lines on both sides. (orange colour) following modifications, do not use the – ESC system operational. System malfunction. system: – ASR system activated. If the driver no longer wishes to use the system – Carrying long objects on roof bars.
– No trailer detected. for a while, they can deactivate it by pressing the – Towing. – No 'space-saver' spare wheel in use. – When following a narrow vehicle. button again. – Front end of the vehicle modified (for – Vehicle not subject to strong lateral g-forces. Reactivate cruise control when conditions permit. The indicator lamp in the button goes off and the example by adding long-range headlamps or – Direction indicators not activated. Situations in which the driver is prompted to symbol disappears from the instrument panel. painting the front bumper). immediately resume control: – Excessively sharp deceleration by the vehicle Activation/Deactivation The system status is saved when the
in front of you. ignition is switched off. Active Lane Keeping
Assist Cruise control
Refer to the General recommendations on the The driver must hold the steering wheel properly. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. When cruise control is activated, the symbol is displayed in green: by small steering actions, the system directs the vehicle and keeps it in the – When a vehicle cuts in sharply between your
position chosen by the driver, in the traffic lane. vehicle and the one in front.
114 Driving
► With the Adaptive Cruise Control with Stop & This position is not necessarily the centre of the If the function is suspended due to the Go function activated, press this button. lane. prolonged release of the force holding 6 The action is confirmed by: The driver can feel movements in the steering the steering wheel, you must reactivate it by – The indicator lamp in the button lighting up wheel. pressing the button again. green. The driver can change the position of the vehicle – The following symbol being displayed on the at any time, by turning the steering wheel. Automatic pause instrument panel. When the driver feels that the vehicle’s position – Triggering of the ESC. The colour of the symbol on the instrument panel is appropriate, whilst keeping hands on the – Prolonged failure to detect one of the lane limit depends on the operating status of the system: steering wheel, they must release the pressure markings. In this case, the active lane departure (grey colour) to let the system resume control of the steering, warning function can take over, and the system One or more operating conditions is not but the vehicle will not be automatically centred will reactivate itself once the operating conditions met; the system is paused. within the lane. are again met. (green colour) In response to action by the driver: All operating conditions are met; the Pausing/Suspending the suspension system is active. system (orange colour) – Activation of the direction indicators. System malfunction. The driver must act promptly if they – Travelling outside the lane limits. If the driver no longer wishes to use the system believe that the traffic conditions or the – Too tight a grip on the steering wheel or for a while, they can deactivate it by pressing the state of the road surface require their dynamic action on the steering wheel. button again. intervention, by moving the steering wheel to – Action on the brake pedal (resulting in a pause The indicator lamp in the button goes off and the temporarily suspend system operation. Any until cruise control is reactivated) or accelerator symbol disappears from the instrument panel. action on the brake pedal that results in cruise pedal (suspension for as long as the pedal is control being paused will also cause the depressed). The system status is saved when the system to be paused. – Pausing of the cruise control. ignition is switched off. – Deactivation of the ASR. If the system detects that the driver is not Cruise control holding the wheel firmly enough, it The driver must hold the steering wheel properly. triggers a series of gradual alerts and then When cruise control is activated, the symbol is deactivates itself if there is no response from displayed in green: by small steering actions, the driver. the system directs the vehicle and keeps it in the position chosen by the driver, in the traffic lane.
115 Driving
Driving situations and related alerts The tables below describe the displays associated with the main driving situations. The display of these alerts is not sequential.
Button indicator lamp Cruise control Symbols Display Comments thumbwheel
Off CRUISE Cruise control paused; lane positioning assist not active.
(grey) (grey)
Off CRUISE Cruise control active; lane positioning assist not active.
(green) (grey)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus active, operates normally (correction is made at the steering wheel).
(green) (green)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus paused. Operating limits 70
The Lane Keeping Assist system may
(grey) issue an alert when the vehicle is (grey) travelling in a long straight lane on a smooth
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus active; not all conditions road surface even if the driver is holding the required for lane positioning assist have steering wheel properly.
been met. (green)/(grey) (grey) The system may fail to operate or may produce
unsuitable corrections to the steering in the Green OFF or LIMIT Cruise control not active; not all conditions following situations: required for lane positioning assist have
– Poor visibility (insufficient road lighting,
been met. (grey) snowfall, rain, fog). (grey)
116 Driving
Button indicator lamp Cruise control Symbols Display Comments 6 thumbwheel
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus suspended: cruise control and lane positioning assist are suspended.
(green)/(grey) (grey)
Messages Driving situations "Activate cruise control to use the lane positioning assist system" Activation of lane positioning assist while cruise control is not active. "Unsuitable conditions, Activation on stand-by" Activation of lane positioning assist while not all conditions are met. "Keep your hands on the steering wheel" Prolonged driving without holding the steering wheel, holding it improperly or without applying any force. "Hold the steering wheel" Actual or imminent loss of lane positioning assist. "Retake control" Simultaneous loss of cruise control and lane positioning assist.
Operating limits – Dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, The system must not be activated in the low sun, reflections on a wet road surface, following situations: The Lane Keeping Assist system may leaving a tunnel, alternating light and shade). – Driving with a "space-saver" type spare issue an alert when the vehicle is – Windscreen area in front of the camera being wheel. travelling in a long straight lane on a smooth dirty, misted up, frost-covered, snow-covered, – When towing, especially with an road surface even if the driver is holding the damaged or masked by a sticker. unconnected or unapproved trailer. steering wheel properly. – Lane markings eroded, partially hidden (snow, – Poor weather conditions. mud) or multiple (roadworks, surface joints). – Driving on slippery road surfaces (risk of The system may fail to operate or may produce – Travelling in a tight bend. aquaplaning, snow, ice). unsuitable corrections to the steering in the – Winding roads. – Driving on racing circuits. following situations: – Presence of a tarmac joint on the road. – Driving on a rolling road. – Poor visibility (insufficient road lighting, snowfall, rain, fog).
117 Driving
Malfunction – Direction indicators not activated. Driving situations and related alerts – ESC system activated and operational. A system malfunction is indicated The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations. by the Service warning lamp The system helps the driver only if there These alerts are not displayed sequentially. coming on and this (orange) symbol, is a risk of the vehicle unintentionally Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments accompanied by an alert message and an wandering from the lane it is being driven in. It message audible signal.
does not manage the safe driving distance, vehicle speed or brakes. OFF Function deactivated.
The driver must hold the steering wheel with
Active Lane Keeping both hands in a way that allows control to While the direction indicators are on and for Assistance be maintained in circumstances where the a few seconds after switching them off, the (grey) system considers that any change of trajectory is Refer to the General recommendations on the system is not able to intervene (for example, if ON System active, conditions not met: intentional and no correction is triggered during use of driving and manoeuvring aids. the central dividing line disappears). – speed below 40 mph (65 km/h), this period. Using a camera located at the top of the – no lane marking recognised, However, with the Blind Spot Monitoring System windscreen to identify lane markings on the road (grey) – ASR/DSC systems deactivated or operation of ESC Operation system activated, if the driver starts changing and at the edges of the road (depending on system triggered, Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle lanes and another vehicle is detected in the version), the system corrects the trajectory of the – "sport" driving. involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings vehicle's blind spot, the system will correct the vehicle while alerting the driver if it detects a risk detected or a lane limit (e.g. grass border), it trajectory even though the direction indicators ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the function (for of unintentionally crossing a line or hard shoulder makes the necessary trajectory correction to are on. example, due to detection of a trailer or use of the "space- (depending on version). return the vehicle to its initial path. For more information on the Blind Spot saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle). This system is particularly useful on motorways The driver will notice a turning movement of the Monitoring System, refer to the corresponding (grey) and main roads.
steering wheel. section. ON Lane marking detection. This warning lamp flashes during If the system detects that the driver is not Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h). trajectory correction. holding the wheel firmly enough during The driver can prevent the correction by an automatic correction of trajectory, it (green)
keeping a firm grip on the wheel (during interrupts the correction. An alert is triggered ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the an avoiding manoeuvre, for example). to encourage the driver to take back control of risk of unintentional crossing is detected (orange line). The correction is interrupted immediately if the vehicle. Conditions for operation – Vehicle speed between 40 and 112 mph (65 the direction indicators are operated. (orange)/(green)
and 180 km/h). – Road marked with a central dividing line. – Steering wheel held in both hands.
118 Driving Driving situations and related alerts 6 The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations. These alerts are not displayed sequentially.
Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments message
OFF Function deactivated.
(grey)
ON System active, conditions not met: – speed below 40 mph (65 km/h),
– no lane marking recognised, (grey) – ASR/DSC systems deactivated or operation of ESC system triggered, – "sport" driving.
ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the function (for example, due to detection of a trailer or use of the "space-
saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle). (grey)
ON Lane marking detection. Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
(green)
ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the risk of unintentional crossing is detected (orange line).
(orange)/(green)
119 Driving
► Press this button to deactivate / reactivate the Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments system at any time. message Deactivation is signalled by the lighting of
ON – If, while correcting the trajectory, the system determines the indicator lamp in the button and this that the correction will not be enough and that a solid line warning lamp in the instrument panel.
will be crossed (orange line): the driver is warned that they The system is automatically reactivated every (orange)/(green) must provide additional trajectory adjustment. time the ignition is switched on.
"Hold the wheel" – If the steering wheel is not held properly, an audible warning sounds, accompanied by a message, until Malfunction the trajectory correction is completed or the driver has In the event of a system grasped the steering wheel correctly. malfunction, these warning lamps The duration of audible warnings will increase if multiple come on on the instrument panel, accompanied corrections are performed in quick succession. The by an onscreen message and an audible signal. warning will become continuous, persisting until the driver Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT responds. dealer or a qualified workshop.
Operating limits – Inactivity by the driver detected during – Driving on damaged, unstable or very slippery correction. (ice) road surfaces, Active Blind Spot The system goes into standby automatically in – Poor weather conditions. the following cases: The following situations may interfere Monitoring System – Driving on a speed circuit. – ESC deactivated or operation triggered. with the operation of the system or Refer to the General recommendations on the – Driving on a rolling road. – Speed below 43 mph (70 km/h) or greater prevent it from working: use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
than 112 mph (180 km/h), – Insufficient contrast between the road Deactivation / Activation
– Electrical connection of a trailer. surface and the side of the road (e.g. shade). – Use of a"space-saver" spare wheel detected – Lane markings worn, hidden (snow, mud) (as detection is not immediate, deactivation of or multiple (roadworks, etc.),
the system is recommended). – Running close to the vehicle in front (the
– Dynamic driving style detected, pressure on lane markings may not be detected). the brake or accelerator pedal. – Roads that are narrow, winding. – Driving where there are no lane markings. – Activation of the direction indicators. Risk of undesirable operation
– Crossing the inside line on a bend. We recommend deactivating the system in the This system includes sensors, placed on the – Driving in a tight corner. following driving situations: sides of the bumpers, and warns the driver of
120 Driving
► Press this button to deactivate / reactivate the the potentially dangerous presence of another The system is automatically deactivated system at any time. vehicle (car, truck, motorcycle) in the blind spot when towing with a towing device 6 Deactivation is signalled by the lighting of areas of their vehicle (areas hidden from the approved by PEUGEOT. the indicator lamp in the button and this driver's field of vision). warning lamp in the instrument panel. The system is automatically reactivated every Conditions for operation time the ignition is switched on. – All vehicles are moving in the same direction and in adjacent lanes. Malfunction – The speed of the vehicle must be between 7 In the event of a system and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h) for the alert and malfunction, these warning lamps between 40 and 87 mph (65 and 140 km/h) for a
come on on the instrument panel, accompanied correction of trajectory. The warning is given by a fixed warning lamp by an onscreen message and an audible signal. – The system must be activated to trigger a that appears in the door mirror on the side in Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT change of trajectory. question: dealer or a qualified workshop. – When you overtake a vehicle with a speed – immediately, when being overtaken; difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h). – after a delay of about one second, when – When another vehicle overtakes you with a Active Blind Spot overtaking a vehicle slowly. speed difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h). Monitoring System In addition to this alert, a correction of trajectory – Traffic is flowing normally. will be felt if you attempt to cross a line with the – Overtaking a vehicle over a certain period of Refer to the General recommendations on the direction indicator activated, to help you avoid a time and the vehicle being overtaken remains in use of driving and manoeuvring aids. collision.
the blind spot. – You are driving on a straight or slightly curved Activation / Deactivation road. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch – Your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan, screen menu. etc. When starting the vehicle, the warning lamp comes on in each mirror to indicate that the system is activated. The state of the system stays in the memory when switching off the ignition.
This system includes sensors, placed on the sides of the bumpers, and warns the driver of
121 Driving
Operating limits – In the presence of non-moving objects (parked Take care not to cover the warning zone in – Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs, etc.). the door mirrors, or the detection zones on braking). – Oncoming traffic. the front and rear bumpers with adhesive – Driving on a winding road or a sharp corner. labels or other objects; they may hamper – When overtaking or being overtaken by a correct operation of the system. very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) which is both detected in the rear blind spot and present in the driver’s front field of vision. Active Safety Brake – When overtaking quickly. – In very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in with Distance Alert and front and behind are confused with a lorry or a Intelligent emergency stationary object. braking assistance – If the Park Assist or Full Park Assist function The vehicle has a multifunction camera located is activated. Refer to the General recommendations on the at the top of the windscreen and, depending on use of driving and manoeuvring aids. version, a radar located in the front bumper.
Malfunction If the event of a malfunction, this warning This system does not avoid the need for lamp comes on in the instrument panel, vigilance on the part of the driver.
accompanied by the display of a message. This system is designed to assist the driver Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified This system: and improve road safety. workshop to have the system checked. – warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of It is the driver's responsibility to continuously collision with the vehicle in front, a pedestrian or, monitor traffic conditions in accordance with The system may suffer temporary depending on version, a cyclist. applicable driving regulations. interference in certain weather conditions – reduces the vehicle's speed to avoid a (rain, hail, etc.). collision or limit its severity. As soon as the system detects a In particular, driving on a wet surface or potential obstacle, it prepares the braking moving from a dry area to a wet area can The system also takes motorcyclists and circuit in case automatic braking is needed. cause false alerts (for example, the presence animals into account; however, animals This may cause a slight noise and a slight of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot below 0.5 m tall and objects on the road are sensation of deceleration. angle is interpreted as a vehicle). not necessarily detected.
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the This system is comprised of three functions: sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow. No alert will be given and no correction will be – Distance Alert. made in the following situations: – Intelligent emergency braking assistance.
122 Driving
– Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency Deactivation / Activation diameter) is detected, or if a fault with brake braking). pedal switch or at least two brake lamps is 6
By default, the system is automatically activated detected. at every engine start. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. It can be dangerous to drive if the brake Deactivation of the system is signalled by lamps are not in perfect working order. the illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by the display of a message. It is possible that warnings are not given, are given too late or seem unjustified. Operating conditions and The driver must always stay in control of the limits vehicle and be prepared to react at any time to avoid an accident. Vehicle moving forward. The vehicle has a multifunction camera located ESC system in working order. at the top of the windscreen and, depending on ASR system activated. After an impact, the function version, a radar located in the front bumper. Seat belts fastened for all passengers. automatically stops operating. Contact a This system does not avoid the need for Stabilised speed on unwinding roads. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to vigilance on the part of the driver. In the following cases, deactivating the system have the system checked. This system is designed to assist the driver via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: and improve road safety. – Towing a trailer. Distance Alert It is the driver's responsibility to continuously – Carrying long objects on roof bars. This function warns the driver that their vehicle is monitor traffic conditions in accordance with – Vehicles with snow chains fitted. at risk of a collision with the vehicle in front, or a applicable driving regulations. – Before using an automatic car wash, with the pedestrian or cyclist present in their traffic lane. engine running. As soon as the system detects a – Before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in Modifying the alert trigger threshold a workshop. potential obstacle, it prepares the braking This trigger threshold determines the sensitivity – Towed vehicle, engine running. circuit in case automatic braking is needed. with which the function warns of the risk of – Following an impact to the windscreen close to This may cause a slight noise and a slight collision. the detection camera. sensation of deceleration. The threshold is set via the Driving / The system is automatically deactivated Vehicle touch screen menu. after the use of certain types of ► Select one of the three pre-defined "space-saver" type spare wheel (smaller thresholds: "Far", "Normal" or "Close".
123 Driving
The last threshold selected is memorised when the "Close" trigger threshold has been driver does not react quickly enough and does steering wheel and/or firmly depressing the the ignition is switched off. selected. not operate the vehicle's brakes. accelerator pedal. It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a Operation Intelligent emergency collision where the driver fails to react. The brake pedal may vibrate slightly Depending on the degree of risk of collision while the function is operating. detected by the system and the alert trigger braking assistance Operation If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, threshold chosen by the driver, several different If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid a The system operates subject to the following automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 levels of alert may be triggered and displayed in collision, this system will supplement the braking, conditions: seconds. the instrument panel. within the limits of the laws of physics. – The vehicle's speed does not exceed 37 mph The system takes account of the vehicle This assistance will only be provided if the driver (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected. dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the one presses the brake pedal. – The vehicle's speed does not exceed 50 mph Malfunction in front, the environmental conditions and the (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle or a cyclist In the event of a system malfunction, this operation of the vehicle (actions on the pedals, Active Safety Brake is detected. warning lamp comes on on the instrument the steering wheel, etc.) to trigger the alert at the – The vehicle's speed is between 6 mph and panel, accompanied by an onscreen message best moment. 53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) (versions with and an audible signal. Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, camera only) or 87 mph (140 km/h) (versions Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified indicating that the vehicle in front is very with camera and radar) when a moving vehicle workshop to have the system checked. close. is detected. If these warning lamps come on The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. This warning lamp immediately flashes after the engine has been switched Level 2 (red): visual and audible alert, (for approximately 10 seconds) when the off and then restarted, contact a PEUGEOT indicating that a collision is imminent. function acts on the vehicle’s braking. dealer or a qualified workshop to have the The message "Brake!" is displayed. With an automatic gearbox or drive selector, in system checked. Level 3: in some cases, a vibration alert in the the event of automatic emergency braking until form of micro-braking can be given, confirming the vehicle comes to a complete stop, keep the the risk of collision. brake pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle Distraction detection from moving off again. Refer to the General recommendations on the Where the speed of your vehicle is too With a manual gearbox, in the event of automatic use of driving and manoeuvring aids. high approaching another vehicle, the emergency braking until the vehicle comes to a Take a break in case of feeling tired or at least first level of alert may not be displayed: the complete stop, the engine may stall. every 2 hours. level 2 alert may be displayed directly. The function comprises the "Driver Attention the level 1 alert is not displayed This function, also called automatic emergency The driver can maintain control of the Important: Alert" system combined with the "Driver Attention when there is a stationary obstacle or when braking, intervenes following the alerts if the vehicle at any time by firmly turning the Alert by camera" system.
124 Driving
steering wheel and/or firmly depressing the These systems are in no way designed As soon as the speed of the vehicle accelerator pedal. to keep the driver awake or to prevent drops below 40 mph (65 km/h), the 6 the driver from falling asleep at the wheel. system goes into standby. The brake pedal may vibrate slightly It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if feeling The driving time is counted again once the while the function is operating. tired. speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h). If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 Activation / Deactivation Driver Attention Alert by seconds. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch camera screen menu. Malfunction The state of the system stays in the memory In the event of a system malfunction, this when the ignition is switched off. warning lamp comes on on the instrument panel, accompanied by an onscreen message Driver Attention Alert and an audible signal. The system triggers an alert as soon as it Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified detects that the driver has not taken a workshop to have the system checked. break after two hours of driving at a speed above If these warning lamps come on 40 mph (65 km/h). after the engine has been switched This alert is issued via the display of a message off and then restarted, contact a PEUGEOT encouraging the driver to take a break,
dealer or a qualified workshop to have the accompanied by an audible signal. Using a camera placed at the top of the system checked. If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert windscreen, the system assesses the is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped. driver's level of vigilance, fatigue or distraction by The system resets itself if one of the following identifying variations in trajectory compared to Distraction detection conditions is met: the lane markings. Refer to the General recommendations on the – With the engine running, the vehicle has been This system is particularly suited to fast roads use of driving and manoeuvring aids. stationary for more than 15 minutes. (speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)). Take a break in case of feeling tired or at least – The ignition has been switched off for a few At a first-level alert, the driver is warned by the every 2 hours. minutes. “ ” message, accompanied by an The function comprises the "Driver Attention – The driver's seat belt is unfastened and their Take care! audible signal. Alert" system combined with the "Driver Attention door is opened. After three first-level alerts, the system triggers Alert by camera" system. a further alert with the message "Dangerous
125 Driving
driving: take a break", accompanied by a more Rear parking sensors this button opens the window for adjusting the Side parking sensors pronounced audible signal. volume of the audible signal. The system is switched on by engaging reverse In certain driving conditions (poor road gear, as confirmed by an audible signal. surface or strong winds), the system may The system is switched off when you come out Visual assistance give alerts independent of the driver's level of of reverse gear. vigilance. Audible assistance
The following situations may interfere
with the operation of the system or Using four additional sensors located on the prevent it from working: sides of the bumpers, the system records the – lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, position of obstacles during the manoeuvre and mud) or multiple (roadworks); This supplements the audible signal by indicates them when they are located alongside – close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings displaying bars on the screen that represent the the vehicle.
not detected); distance between the obstacle and the vehicle – roads that are narrow, winding, etc. The system signals the presence of obstacles Only fixed obstacles are indicated (white: more distant, orange: close, red: very within the sensors’ detection zone. correctly. Moving obstacles detected at close). The proximity information is given by an the beginning of the manoeuvre may be When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" intermittent audible signal, the frequency of indicated mistakenly, while moving obstacles Parking sensors symbol is displayed on the screen. which increases as the vehicle approaches the that appear alongside the vehicle but were Refer to the General recommendations on the obstacle. not previously recorded will not be indicated. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. Front parking sensors When the distance between the vehicle and Supplementing the rear parking sensors, the the obstacle becomes less than about thirty Objects memorised during the front parking sensors are triggered when an centimetres, the audible signal becomes manoeuvre will no longer be stored after obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the continuous. switching off the ignition. vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). The sound emitted by the speaker (right or Front parking sensor operation is suspended if left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in located. Deactivation / Activation forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer detected It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch
Adjusting the audible signal or the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). screen menu. Using sensors located in the bumper, this With PEUGEOT Connect Radio or The state of the system stays in the memory system signals the proximity of obstacles The sound emitted by the speaker (front PEUGEOT Connect Nav, pressing when the ignition is switched off.
(e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) present in or rear) locates the obstacle relative to their field of detection. the vehicle, in front or behind it.
126 Driving
Side parking sensors Malfunction 6 In the event of a malfunction when shifting to reverse, one of these warning lamps comes on on the instrument panel, accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal (short beep).
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The rear parking sensors system will be workshop to have the system checked. deactivated automatically if a trailer or Using four additional sensors located on the bicycle carrier is connected to a towing device sides of the bumpers, the system records the installed in accordance with the Visiopark 1 position of obstacles during the manoeuvre and manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the General recommendations on the indicates them when they are located alongside In this case, the outline of a trailer is displayed use of driving and manoeuvring aids. the vehicle. at the rear of the image of the vehicle. Only fixed obstacles are indicated The parking sensors are deactivated while the correctly. Moving obstacles detected at Park Assist and Full Park Assist functions are the beginning of the manoeuvre may be measuring a space. indicated mistakenly, while moving obstacles For more information on the Park Assist or the that appear alongside the vehicle but were Full Park Assist, refer to the corresponding not previously recorded will not be indicated. section.
Objects memorised during the When the vehicle is started, the visual manoeuvre will no longer be stored after and audible aids will be available after switching off the ignition. the touch screen has started up. As soon as reverse gear is engaged with the engine running, this system displays views of your vehicle’s close surroundings on the touch Deactivation / Activation Operating limits screen using a camera located at the rear of the It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may tilt, vehicle. screen menu. affecting distance measurements. The state of the system stays in the memory when the ignition is switched off.
127 Driving
Principle of operation Rear vision AUTO mode
Using the rear camera, the vehicle's close
surroundings are recorded during manoeuvres To activate the camera, located on the tailgate, This mode is activated by default. at low speed. engage reverse and keep the speed of the Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic An image from above your vehicle in its close vehicle below 6 mph (10 km/h). view changes from the rear view (standard) to The screen is divided into two parts with a surroundings is reconstructed (represented The system is deactivated: the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is contextual view and a view from above the between the brackets) in real time and as the – Automatically, at speeds above approximately approached at the level of the red line (less than vehicle in its close surroundings. manoeuvre progresses. 12 mph (20 km/h), 30 cm) during a manoeuvre. The parking sensors supplement the information It facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when – Automatically, if the tailgate is opened. on the view from above the vehicle. parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle – When changing out of reverse gear. Standard view Various contextual views may be displayed: to be seen. It is automatically deleted if the – By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left – Standard view. vehicle remains stationary for too long. corner of the touch screen. – 180° view. – Zoom view. AUTO mode is activated by default. In this mode, the system chooses the best view to display (standard or zoom). You can change the type of view at any time during a manoeuvre. The system status is not saved when the ignition is switched off.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the screen.
128 Driving
AUTO mode The blue lines 1 represent the width of your Obstacles may appear further away than vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction they actually are. 6 changes according to the position of the steering It is important to monitor the sides of the wheel. vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm mirrors. from the rear bumper; the two blue lines 3 and 4 Parking sensors also provide additional represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. information about the area around the vehicle. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the view selection menu. 180° view Zoom view
This mode is activated by default. Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic view changes from the rear view (standard) to the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is approached at the level of the red line (less than 30 cm) during a manoeuvre. Standard view
The camera records the vehicle's surroundings during the manoeuvre in order to create a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a manoeuvred around nearby obstacles. parking space, making it possible to see the This view is available with AUTO mode or in the approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. view selection menu. This view is not recommended for carrying out a complete manoeuvre.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the It features 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C. screen.
129 Driving
This view is only available via the view selection Operation A manoeuvre selection page is displayed on the menu. touch screen: by default, the "Entry" page if the ► When approaching a parking area, reduce vehicle has been running since the ignition was the speed of your vehicle to 19 mph (30 km/h) switched on, otherwise, the "Exit" page. or less. Park Assist ► Select the type and side of the manoeuvre to Refer to the General recommendations on the Activating the function activate the parking space search. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. The selected manoeuvre can be changed at The function is activated in the Vehicle / This system provides active parking assistance: any time, even while searching for an available Driving touch screen menu. it detects a parking space and then steers in the space. Select "Park Assist". appropriate direction to park in the space while This indicator lamp comes on to confirm the driver controls the driving direction, gear Activating the function deactivates the the selection.
changes, acceleration and braking. Blind Spot Monitoring System. To help the driver monitor the manoeuvre, Parking space search When the system finds an available space, "OK" the system automatically triggers the display You can deactivate the function at any ► You should drive at a distance of between is displayed on the parking view, accompanied of Visiopark 1 and activates the parking sensors. time until the parking space entry or exit 0.50 m and 1.50 m from the row of parked by an audible signal. The system measures the available parking manoeuvre begins, by pressing the arrow vehicles, without ever exceeding 19 mph Preparing for the manoeuvre spaces and calculates the distances to obstacles located in the top left-hand corner of the (30 km/h), until the system finds an available using ultrasonic sensors built into the front and display page. space. ► Move very slowly until the request to stop rear bumpers of the vehicle. The parking space search stops over this limit. the vehicle is displayed: "Stop the vehicle“,
The function automatically deactivates once the accompanied by the “STOP” sign and an audible Selecting the type of manoeuvre vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h). signal. Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions For ''parallel'' parking, the space must at page is displayed on the screen. a minimum be equal to the length of your ► To prepare for the manoeuvre, follow the vehicle plus 0.60 m. instructions. For ''bay'' parking, the width of the space The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by must be equal to the width of your vehicle the message "Manoeuvre under way", plus 0.70 m. The system assists with the following accompanied by an audible signal. manoeuvres: Reversing is indicated by this message: If the parking sensors function has been “Release the steering wheel, reverse”. A. Entering a "parallel" parking space deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle menu Visiopark 1 and the parking sensors are B. Leaving a "parallel" parking space of the touch screen, it will be automatically automatically activated to help you monitor C. Entering a "bay" parking space reactivated when the system is activated.
130 Driving
your vehicle's close surroundings during the manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarf, tie, etc.). manoeuvre. Risk of injury! 6 It is the driver's responsibility to constantly During the manoeuvre monitor the traffic, especially vehicles coming The system controls the vehicle’s steering. It towards you. gives instructions on the manoeuvring direction The driver should check that no objects or when starting "parallel" entry and exit parking people are obstructing the vehicle’s path. manoeuvres, and for all "bay" entry manoeuvres. There instructions are displayed as a symbol The images from the camera(s) accompanied by a message: displayed on the touch screen may be "Reverse". distorted by the terrain. In shady areas, or in inadequate sunlight When the system finds an available space, " " OK “Go forwards". or lighting conditions, the image may be is displayed on the parking view, accompanied darkened and with lower contrast by an audible signal. The manoeuvring status is indicated by these symbols: The manoeuvre can be permanently interrupted Preparing for the manoeuvre Manoeuvre in progress (green). at any time, either by the driver or automatically ► Move very slowly until the request to stop by the system. the vehicle is displayed: "Stop the vehicle“, Manoeuvre cancelled or finished (red) Interruption by the driver: accompanied by the “STOP” sign and an audible (the arrows indicate that the driver must – taking over control of the steering. signal. resume control of the vehicle). – activating the direction indicator lamps on the Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions The maximum speeds during manoeuvres are opposite side to that of the manoeuvre. page is displayed on the screen. indicated by these symbols: – unfastening the driver's seat belt. ► To prepare for the manoeuvre, follow the 5 mph or 7 km/h, for parking space entry. – switching off the ignition. instructions. 7 Interruption by the system: The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by 3 mph or 5 km/h, for parking space exit. – vehicle exceeding the speed limit of the message "Manoeuvre under way", 5 5 mph (7 km/h) during parking space entry accompanied by an audible signal. manoeuvres, or 3 mph (5 km/h) during parking During manoeuvring phases, the steering Reversing is indicated by this message: space exit manoeuvres. wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold “Release the steering wheel, reverse”. – activation of anti-slip regulation on a slippery the steering wheel or put your hands between Visiopark 1 and the parking sensors are road. the spokes of the steering wheel. Watch out automatically activated to help you monitor – opening of a door or the boot. for any objects that could interfere with the – engine stall.
131 Driving
– system malfunction. – The system may indicate that a space has If the vehicle has undergone any of the In the event of a power steering – after 10 manoeuvres to enter or exit a parallel been found but will not offer it because of a fixed following modifications, do not use the malfunction, this warning lamp is parking space and after 7 manoeuvres to enter a obstacle on the opposite side of the manoeuvre, function: displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied parking bay. which would not allow the vehicle to follow a – When carrying an object extending beyond by a warning message. Interrupting the manoeuvre automatically trajectory required for parking. the dimensions of the vehicle (ladder on the You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. deactivates the function. – The system may indicate that a space has roof bars, bicycle carrier on the tailgate, etc.). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The manoeuvre symbol is displayed in red, been found but the manoeuvre will not be – With a non-approved towball in place. workshop. accompanied by the "Manoeuvre cancelled" triggered, because the width of the lane is – With snow chains fitted. message on the touch screen. insufficient. – When driving on a small-diameter or A message prompts the driver to take back – The system is not designed for performing the "space-saver" type spare wheel. Full Park Assist control of the vehicle. parking manoeuvre on a sharp bend. – When the wheels fitted are a different size Refer to the General recommendations on the The function is deactivated after a few – The system does not detect spaces that from the original ones. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. seconds; this warning lamp goes off and are much larger than the vehicle itself or that – After modifying one or both bumpers This system provides active parking assistance the function returns to the initial display. are delimited by obstacles that are too low (added protection). for vehicles fitted with the EAT8 automatic (pavements, studs, etc.) or too thin (trees, posts, – If the sensors have been repainted other gearbox or a gear selector: it detects a free End of the parking space entry or exit wire fences, etc.). than by the PEUGEOT dealer network. "parallel" or "bay" parking space and then manoeuvre – If the boot is heavily loaded, the tilt of the – With sensors not approved for the vehicle. operates the vehicle, parking it with no need for The vehicle stops as soon as the manoeuvre is vehicle towards the rear may interfere with the driver intervention. It also allows you to drive out completed. distance measurements. of a "parallel parking" space automatically. The manoeuvring symbol is displayed in red Malfunctions The system controls the steering, direction, Do not use the function under the accompanied by the message “ When the function is not activated, the acceleration and braking. The system measures Manoeuvre following exterior conditions: ” on the touch screen. temporary flashing of this indicator lamp the available parking spaces and calculates completed – Alongside a soft shoulder (e.g. ditch) or Deactivation of the function is confirmed and an audible signal indicate a system the distances to obstacles using 12 ultrasonic quay or on the edge of a drop. by this indicator lamp going off, malfunction. sensors built into the front and rear bumpers of – When the road surface is slippery (e.g. ice). accompanied by an audible signal. If the malfunction occurs while the system is in the vehicle. If entering a parking space, the driver may be use, the indicator lamp goes off. To help the driver monitor the successful If any of the following malfunctions required to complete the manoeuvre. If the parking sensor malfunction completion of the manoeuvre, the system occurs, do not use the system: occurs during use, indicated by automatically displays the Visiopark 1 and – If a tyre is under-inflated. one of these warning lamps coming on, it causes activates the parking sensors.
Operating limits – If one of the bumpers is damaged. the function to deactivate. – The system may suggest an inappropriate – If one of the cameras is faulty. In the event of a malfunction, have the system parking space (parking prohibited, work in checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified progress with damaged road surface, location workshop. alongside a ditch, etc.).
132 Driving
In the event of a power steering Sequence malfunction, this warning lamp is 6 Once the system is activated, the following steps displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied will be performed successively: by a warning message. – Select the type of manoeuvre via the touch You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. screen. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified – Search for an available space. workshop. – Prepare for the manoeuvre. – Perform the manoeuvre. Full Park Assist – Finalise the manoeuvre.
Refer to the General recommendations on the It is possible to deactivate the system at use of driving and manoeuvring aids. To initiate parking assistance when any time until the start of the manoeuvre, This system provides active parking assistance approaching a parking area: by pressing the red arrow in the upper left for vehicles fitted with the EAT8 automatic ► Reduce the speed of the vehicle to a corner of the screen. maximum of 19 mph (30 km/h).
gearbox or a gear selector: it detects a free "parallel" or "bay" parking space and then Full Park Assist is not always able to operates the vehicle, parking it with no need for react automatically and appropriately due driver intervention. It also allows you to drive out to the performance limits inherent to the of a "parallel parking" space automatically. system. The system controls the steering, direction, The manoeuvre remains the responsibility acceleration and braking. The system measures of the driver, who must not leave the driving the available parking spaces and calculates position and must never try to lock the system the distances to obstacles using 12 ultrasonic control button. sensors built into the front and rear bumpers of The driver's seat belt must remain fastened the vehicle. during the manoeuvre. To help the driver monitor the successful ► Press the button on the gear selector or, on completion of the manoeuvre, the system the touch screen, select Driving / Vehicle > Full automatically displays the Visiopark 1 and Park Assist. Choice of the type of activates the parking sensors. Activating the system deactivates Blind
manoeuvre and search for Spot Monitoring System. space Depending on whether the vehicle has been driven or not since the ignition was switched on,
133 Driving
the function proposes the entry to or exit from a This symbol will be displayed Manoeuvre interrupted. parking space on the touch screen. automatically when the instruction has ► Select the type and side of the manoeuvre to been applied. Manoeuvre completed or abandoned activate the parking space search. When all instructions have been validated, a (white arrows indicate that the driver must Illumination of this lamp confirms new screen is displayed, indicating that you can take back control of their vehicle). activation. undertake the manoeuvre. The direction of the manoeuvre is indicated by It is possible to change the type of manoeuvre ► To undertake the manoeuvre, press these symbols: at any time, including during the available space this button. Forward gear. search phase. ► While holding down the button, gradually ► Drive at a distance of 0.50 to 1.50 m from the release the brake pedal. Reverse gear. row of parked vehicles, not exceeding 19 mph The button must be held down (30 km/h), until the system finds an available The central arrow is green whilst the vehicle throughout the manoeuvre. space (indicated by OK on the display and an is moving, or white to indicate the next audible signal). The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by manoeuvring direction. For "parallel" parking, the space must at the display of a screen with the message Throughout the whole manoeuvre, least equal to the length of your vehicle "Manoeuvre under way", accompanied by an indicated by the green "AUTO" symbol, plus 1 m. audible signal. the driver must hold the selector button down. For "bay" parking, the space must at least Visiopark 1 and the parking sensors are automatically activated to help you monitor the equal to the width of your vehicle plus 0.70 m. During manoeuvring phases, the steering immediate area around your vehicle during the wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold manoeuvre. Preparing for the the steering wheel or put your hands between Performing the manoeuvre the spokes of the steering wheel. Watch out manoeuvre for any objects that could interfere with the As soon as the driver releases the brake ► Move very slowly until the request to stop manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarf, tie, etc.). pedal, the system automatically takes control the vehicle and the "STOP" sign are displayed, Risk of injury! of choosing the travel direction, forwards or accompanied by an audible signal. reverse, acceleration, braking and the steering Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions If the vehicle slows down significantly, direction. page is displayed on the screen. the brake lamps may come on. The manoeuvring status is indicated by these ► To prepare for the manoeuvre, you must fulfil symbols: all of these instructions. Pausing/resuming the manoeuvre Manoeuvre in progress. The manoeuvre can be interrupted temporarily at any time, either automatically by the system if
134 Driving an obstacle is detected, or by driver action. If the – Activation of the direction indicator lamps on End of manoeuvre driver notices a hazard, they may also interrupt the opposite side to that of the manoeuvre. 6 The vehicle stops as soon as the manoeuvre is the manoeuvre permanently. – In certain cases, when a wheel of the vehicle completed. To suspend the manoeuvre, the driver can: hits a pavement or a low obstacle. This symbol is displayed, accompanied by – Release the function control button. – Triggering of anti-slip regulation on a slippery the message "Manoeuvre completed" on – Depress the brake pedal. road. the touch screen. – Resume control of the steering. – Engine stalling. When the function is deactivated, this – Change the gearbox status (except changing – Sudden appearance in the field of the indicator lamp on the instrument panel to ). manoeuvre of an obstacle not detected by the P goes off and the original display is restored. The vehicle is immediately immobilised if the system before the manoeuvre was started, – If entering a parking space, the driver may manoeuvre is suspended. with the obstacle remaining for more than 30 be required to complete the manoeuvre. This is confirmed by the display of this seconds. The gearbox changes to P 4 seconds after symbol, accompanied by the message – After 10 manoeuvres to enter or exit a completion of the manoeuvre. " ". "parallel" parking space and after 7 manoeuvres Manoeuvre suspended – When exiting a parking space, the gearbox Resuming the manoeuvre after resolving the to enter a "bay" parking space, changes to N when the manoeuvre is complete. – System malfunction during the manoeuvre. conditions for suspending it: A message and symbols prompt the driver to ► Release all controls (brake pedal, function Abandoning the manoeuvre immediately take back control of the vehicle. control button, steering wheel, etc.). triggers the vehicle’s brakes and automatically The gearbox automatically changes to mode ► Press the function control button again. deactivates the function. P if no action is taken by the driver within 30 This symbol is displayed, accompanied by Permanent interruption after suspending the secondss. manoeuvre: the message "Manoeuvre abandoned" ► Depress the brake pedal and engage a gear. on the touch screen. Operating limits A message prompts the driver to take back Abandoning the manoeuvre – The system may suggest an inappropriate control of the vehicle. The manoeuvre is abandoned in the following parking space (parking prohibited, work in The function is deactivated after a few situations: progress with damaged road surface, location seconds; this indicator lamp goes off on – No action by the driver within 30 seconds of alongside a ditch, etc.). the instrument panel and the initial display is the manoeuvre being suspended. – The system may indicate that a space has resumed. – Intentional application of the parking brake. been found but will not offer it because of a fixed The system automatically engages gearbox – Gearbox mode P engaged by the driver. obstacle on the opposite side of the manoeuvre, mode P after 4 seconds. – Driver's seat belt unfastened. which does not allow the vehicle to follow the – Opening of a door or the boot. trajectory required for parking.
135 Driving
– The system may indicate that a space has Do not use the function if the vehicle has In the event of a power steering been found but the manoeuvre will not be been subject to one of the following malfunction, this warning lamp is triggered because the width of the lane is modifications: displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied insufficient. – When carrying an object extending beyond by a message. – The system is not designed to perform parking the dimensions of the vehicle (ladder on the You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. manoeuvres on a steep slope or on a sharp roof bars, bicycle carrier on the tailgate, etc.). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified curve. – With a non-approved towball in place. workshop. – The system does not detect spaces that – With snow chains fitted. are much larger than the vehicle itself or that – When driving on a small-diameter or are delimited by obstacles that are too low "space-saver" type spare wheel. (pavements, studs, etc.) or too thin (trees, posts, – When the wheels fitted are a different size wire fences, etc.). from the original ones. – The system may be impaired by incorrect – After modifying one or both bumpers inflation of the vehicle’s tyres. (added protection). – The tilting of the vehicle if the boot is heavily – If the sensors have been repainted outside loaded can affect the distance measurements. the PEUGEOT dealer network. – With sensors not approved for the vehicle. Do not use the function under the following exterior conditions: – Alongside a soft shoulder (ditch) or quay or Malfunctions on the edge of a drop. When the function is not activated, the – When the road surface is slippery (ice). temporary flashing of this warning lamp and an audible signal indicate a Full Park Assist Do not use the function in the presence malfunction. of one of the following malfunctions: If the malfunction occurs while the system is in – If a tyre is under-inflated. use, the warning lamp goes off. – If one of the bumpers is damaged. If a parking sensor malfunction, – If one of the cameras is faulty. indicated by one of these warning – If the brake lamps are not working. lamps coming on, occurs during Full Park Assist use, the function is deactivated. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
136
PEUGEOT & TOTAL PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE!
For over 20 years, the PEUGEOT TOTAL partnership has set new performance standards in achieving success in the toughest conditions, with victories in the Le Mans 24 Hours, the World Rally Championship and the Dakar Rally. To obtain these exceptional results, the Peugeot Sport teams chose TOTAL QUARTZ, a high-tech lubricant that protects the engine in the most extreme conditions. TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects of time. TOTAL QUARTZ INEO FIRST is a very high-performance lubricant developed jointly by the Peugeot and Total R&D teams. Specially formulated for the engines in Peugeot vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces
CO2 emissions and keeps your engine clean.
Practical information
Compatibility of fuels fuels could prevent the engine from operating and audible signal are repeated with increasing
correctly. In these temperature conditions, use frequency as the fuel level drops towards 0.
winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid more than 50 % full. running out of fuel. Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard At temperatures below -15 °C (+5 °F) to avoid For more information on Running out of fuel containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle (Diesel), refer to the corresponding section. respectively. under shelter (heated garage). Stop & Start
Travelling abroad Never refuel with the engine in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition. Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 Certain fuels could damage your vehicle’s and EN16709 standards and containing up to engine. 7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester In certain countries, the use of a particular Refuelling respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even fuel may be required (specific octane rating, When refuelling, at least 5 litres must be added occasionally, imposes special maintenance specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct in order to be registered by the fuel gauge. conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". operation of the engine. Opening the filler cap may create a noise caused For all additional information, consult a dealer. by an inrush of air. This vacuum is entirely normal, resulting from the sealing of the fuel Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 Refuelling system. standard. To refuel in complete safety: Fuel tank capacity: approximately 44 litres ► Always switch off the engine. The use of any other type of (bio) fuel (Petrol) or 41 litres (Diesel). (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, Reserve level: approximately 5 litres. domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system). Low fuel level When the low fuel level is reached, this The only fuel additives authorised for use warning lamp comes on on the instrument are those that meet the B715001 (petrol) panel, accompanied by an onscreen message or B715000 (Diesel) standards. and an audible signal. When it first comes on, about 5 litres of fuel remain. Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp Diesel at low temperature appears every time the ignition is switched on, At temperatures below 0 °C (+32 °F), the accompanied by an onscreen message and formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel an audible signal. When driving, this message
138 Practical information
If you have put in the wrong fuel for the Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type vehicle, you must have the fuel tank filler nozzle. 7 drained and filled with the correct fuel before It remains possible to use a fuel jerrycan starting the engine. to fill the tank. The vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, which helps to reduce the level of harmful Travelling abroad emissions in the exhaust gases. As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be For petrol engines, you must use unleaded different in other countries, the presence fuel. of the misfuel prevention device may make The filler neck is narrower, admitting unleaded refuelling impossible. petrol nozzles only. Before travelling abroad, it is advisable to check with a PEUGEOT dealer if the vehicle Misfuel prevention (Diesel) is suitable for the distribution equipment of the (Depending on country of sale.) countries visited. ► With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear- This mechanical device prevents filling the tank central part of the filler flap to open it. of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. ► Take care to select a pump that delivers the Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention Charging system correct fuel type for the vehicle's engine (see a device appears when the filler cap is removed. reminder label on the inside of the filler flap). (Electric) ► Turn the filler cap to the left. Operation ► Remove the filler cap and hang it on its 400 V electrical system carrier (on the filler flap). The electrical traction system, which operates at ► Introduce the filler nozzle and push it in as far a voltage of approximately 400 V, is identified by as possible before starting to refuel (to minimise orange cables, and its components are marked the risk of splashing). with this symbol: ► Fill the tank. Do not continue after the nozzle’s third cut-
out. Doing so may cause malfunctions. ► Refit the filler cap. When a petrol filler nozzle is inserted into the ► Turn it to the right. fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes into ► Push the fuel filler flap to close it. contact with the flap. The system remains closed and prevents filling.
139 Practical information
When washing Before washing the vehicle, always check that the charging flap is closed correctly. Never wash the vehicle while the battery is on charge.
High-pressure washing To avoid damaging electrical This label is intended solely for use by components, it is expressly prohibited to use firefighters and maintenance services in high-pressure washing to clean the front An electric vehicle’s power train can the event of any work on the vehicle. compartment or the vehicle underbody. become hot during use and after No other person must touch the device shown Do not use a pressure greater than 80 bar switching off the ignition. on this label. when washing the bodywork. Observe the warning messages shown on labels, particularly inside the flap. In the event of an accident or impact Never allow water or dust to enter the All work on or modifications to the vehicle’s The electrical system or the traction connector or charging nozzle - risk of electrical system (including the traction battery may be seriously damaged in the electrocution or fire! battery, connectors, orange cables and event of an accident or impact involving the Never connect / disconnect the charging other components visible from the interior or vehicle underbody. nozzle or cable with wet hands - risk of exterior) is strictly prohibited - risk of severe Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch electrocution! burns or potentially fatal electric shock off the ignition. (short-circuit/electrocution)! Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified In the event of a problem, always contact a workshop without delay. Traction battery PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. This battery stores the energy that powers In the event of exposure to a fire the electric motor and the thermal comfort Immediately exit and evacuate all equipment in the passenger compartment. It is passengers from the vehicle. Never attempt discharged during use, and must therefore be to fight the fire yourself - risk of electrocution! regularly recharged. There is no need to wait You must immediately contact the emergency for the traction battery to fall to its reserve level services, informing them that the incident before recharging. involves an electric vehicle.
140 Practical information
Battery life may vary according to the type of Charging connectors and driving, the route, thermal comfort equipment State of charging Meaning 7 usage and battery component ageing. indicator lamps indicator lamp
Fixed white Welcome lighting The traction battery ageing process is when flap is opened. influenced by multiple factors, including climate conditions, the distance travelled and Fixed blue Deferred charge. how often it has been fast-charged. Flashing green Charging. Fixed green Charging finished. In the event of damage to the traction battery Fixed red Malfunction. It is strictly prohibited to work on the vehicle yourself. In case of impact, even light, against the Do not touch liquids coming from the battery, charging flap, do not use it. and in the event of skin contact with these Do not remove or modify the charging products, wash abundantly with water and connector - risk of fire!
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified contact a doctor as soon as possible. 1. Charging connectors workshop. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified 2. Deferred charge activation button workshop to have the system checked. 3. Nozzle locking indicator lamp Red: nozzle positioned correctly and locked Charging cables in the connector. The charging cable supplied with the vehicle is Charging indicator lamp 4. suitable for electrical systems in the country of sale. If you travel abroad, refer to the following table to check your charging cable’s compatibility with local electrical systems. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for more information and to obtain suitable charging cables.
141 Practical information
In the event of damage, do not use the cable Domestic socket Public fast charging station Control unit and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (Domestic charging - single-phase alternating (Fast charging - direct current (DC))
workshop for a replacement. current (AC))
Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) (Accelerated charging - single-phase or three- phase alternating current (AC))
Mode 2 with a standard socket A: 8 A maximum charging current.
Mode 4 (DC) charging cable
(integrated in the public fast charging station) POWER Depending on version, in mode 3 with a Green: electrical connection established;
Wallbox accelerated charging unit: 32 A charging can begin. Mode 2 with a Green’Up socket B: 16 A maximum charging current. CHARGE maximum charging current. Mode 3 (AC) charging cable Flashing green: charging in progress or Mode 2 (AC) charging cable with built-in temperature pre-conditioning activated. control unit Fixed green: charging complete.
FAULT Red: anomaly; charging not permitted or must be stopped immediately. Check that everything is connected correctly and that the
electrical system is not faulty. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact a Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Upon plugging the charging cable into a
Do not remove or modify the charging unit. Risk of electrocution and/or fire! domestic socket, all of the indicator lamps come on briefly. Mode 2 charging cable with built-in Refer to the charging unit user manual for If no indicator lamps come on, check the control unit operating instructions. Avoiding damage to the cable is essential. domestic socket's circuit-breaker.
142 Practical information
Control unit – If the circuit breaker has tripped, contact a 7. Never attempt to repair or open this professional to check that your electrical system 7 charging cable. It contains no repairable is suitable and carry out any necessary repairs. parts - replace the charging cable if it is – If the circuit-breaker has not tripped, avoid damaged. using the charging cable and contact a 8. Never immerse this charging cable in water. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. 9. Never use this charging cable with an Recommendations on the control unit label extension cable, a multi-plug socket, a conversion adaptor or on a damaged electrical socket. 10. Do not unplug the plug from the wall as a means of stopping charging. 11. Do not force the connector if it is locked into
the vehicle. POWER 12. Immediately stop charging, by locking and Green: electrical connection established; then unlocking the vehicle using the remote charging can begin. control key, if the charging cable or wall CHARGE 1. Refer to the handbook before use. socket feel burning hot to the touch. Flashing green: charging in progress or Incorrect use of this charging cable may 2. 13. This charging cable includes components temperature pre-conditioning activated. result in fire, property damage and serious liable to cause electrical arcing or sparks. Fixed green: charging complete. injury or death by electrocution! Do not expose to flammable vapours. FAULT Always use a correctly earthed power 3. 14. Only use this charging cable with PEUGEOT Red: anomaly; charging not permitted socket, protected by a 30 mA residual vehicles. or must be stopped immediately. Check that current device. 15. Never plug the cable into the wall socket (or everything is connected correctly and that the 4. Always use an electrical socket protected unplug it) with wet hands. electrical system is not faulty. by a circuit-breaker appropriate for the If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact a electrical circuit’s current rating. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. 5. The weight of the control unit must not be Charging the traction Upon plugging the charging cable into a borne by the electrical socket, plug and domestic socket, all of the indicator lamps come cables. battery (Electric) on briefly. 6. Never use this charging cable if it is To recharge, connect the vehicle to a domestic If no indicator lamps come on, check the defective or in any way damaged. electrical system (for domestic or accelerated domestic socket's circuit-breaker. charging) or a fast public charging station (for fast charging).
143 Practical information
For a full charge, follow the desired charging Vehicle not used for an extended charging points. Leave the area and ask a For fast charging procedure without pausing it, until it ends period third party to recharge the vehicle. automatically. Charging may be performed either Fully recharge the traction battery every Before charging immediately or deferred. three months. Follow the domestic charging Check that the fast public charging For domestic or accelerated charging You can stop charging at any time by unlocking procedure. station and its charging cable are compatible with the vehicle. the vehicle and removing the nozzle. Before carrying out this charging operation, Before charging If the exterior temperature is below: For more information on the charging displays check that the accessory battery is not Depending on the context: – 0°C, charging times may be extended. on the Instrument panel and the Touch screen, disconnected or discharged. If it is, refer to ► Have a professional check that the – -20°C, charging is still possible, but refer to the corresponding section. the corresponding section for information on electrical system to be used complies with charging times may be extended even further Depending on version, the deferred reconnecting or recharging it. applicable standards and is compatible with (the battery has to be heated first). charge function is configured via either the vehicle. the touch screen or the MyPeugeot application. Precautions ► Have a professional electrician install For more information on the Deferred charging a dedicated domestic power socket or (During charging) Electric vehicles were developed in accordance function, refer to the corresponding section. accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) Do not remain in or near the vehicle. with the guidelines on maximum electromagnetic compatible with the vehicle. While charging is in progress, opening the It is also possible to monitor the charging fields issued by the International Commission Use the charging cable supplied with the driver's door will interrupt charging. progress using the MyPeugeot on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP - application. vehicle. 1998 Guidelines). After charging For more information on Remotely operable Wearers of pacemakers or equivalent Check that the charging flap is closed. features, refer to the corresponding section. devices should consult a doctor to (During charging) Never work under the bonnet: enquire about any applicable precautionary – Some areas remain very hot, even an hour As a safety measure, the engine will not measures, or contact the manufacturer of their Connection after charging ends - risk of burns! start if the charging cable is plugged into implanted electronic medical device to check that ► Before charging, check that the drive selector – The fan may start at any time - risk of cuts the connector on the vehicle. A warning is it is guaranteed to operate in an environment is in mode P and the ignition is off, otherwise or strangulation! displayed on the instrument panel. compliant with the ICNIRP guidelines. charging is not possible. ► Open the charging flap by pressing the If in doubt Cooling the traction battery After charging push-button, and check that there are no foreign Domestic or accelerated charging: do The cooling fan comes on during Check that the charging flap is closed. bodies on the charging connector. not remain inside or near the vehicle, or near charging to cool the on-board charger and the Do not leave the cable connected to the the charging cable or charging unit, even for traction battery. domestic power socket - risk of short-circuit a short time. or electrocution in the event of contact with or Fast charging: do not use the system immersion in water! yourself and avoid approaching public fast
144 Practical information
For fast charging Domestic charging (mode 2) If charging has finished but the cable is still connected, opening the driver's door 7 Before charging restarts charging for around 20 seconds. Check that the fast public charging station and its charging cable are compatible Accelerated charging (mode 3)
with the vehicle. If the exterior temperature is below:
– 0°C, charging times may be extended.
– -20°C, charging is still possible, but charging times may be extended even further (the battery has to be heated first).
(During charging) ► Follow the instructions for use of the Do not remain in or near the vehicle. accelerated charging unit (Wallbox). While charging is in progress, opening the ► Connect the charging cable from the control ► Remove the protective cover on the charging driver's door will interrupt charging. unit to the domestic socket. noozle. When the connection is made, all of the indicator ► Insert the nozzle into the charging connector. After charging lamps on the control unit light up, then only the The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing Check that the charging flap is closed. POWER indicator lamp remains on in green. in green of the charging indicator lamp in the ► Remove the protective cover on the charging flap. noozle. If this is not the case, charging has not started; Connection ► Insert the nozzle into the charging connector. restart the procedure, ensuring that the ► Before charging, check that the drive selector The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing connection is correct. is in mode P and the ignition is off, otherwise in green of the CHARGE indicator lamps in the The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to charging is not possible. flap, then on the control unit. indicate that the nozzle is locked. ► Open the charging flap by pressing the If this is not the case, charging has not Fast charging (mode 4) push-button, and check that there are no foreign started; restart the procedure, ensuring that all bodies on the charging connector. connections are properly established. The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to indicate that the nozzle is locked.
145 Practical information
► Depending on version, remove the protective Domestic charging (mode 2) Fast charging (mode 4) Comply with the maximum authorised cover from the lower section. The end of charging is indicated by the charger towable weight, as indicated on your ► Connect the charging cable to the vehicle and by the fixed lighting of the green indicator vehicle's registration certificate, on the connector, following the instructions for use of lamp in the flap. manufacturer's label and in the Technical the fast public charging station. ► Hang up the nozzle on the charging station. data section of this guide. The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing ► Depending on version, replace the protective Complying with the maximum authorised in green of the charging indicator lamp in the nose weight (towball weight) also includes
cover on the lower section and close the flap. charging flap. the use of accessories (bicycle carriers, If this is not the case, charging has not started; tow boxes, etc.). restart the procedure, ensuring that the connection is correct. Towing device Observe the legislation in force in the The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to Load distribution country where you are driving. indicate that the nozzle is locked. ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to the Electric motor
Disconnection axle, and the nose weight approaches the
Electric vehicles must never be equipped maximum permitted without exceeding it. with towing devices. Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing It is therefore not possible to tow a trailer or engine performance. The maximum towable load caravan. must be reduced by 10% per 1,000 metres of
altitude. Before disconnecting the nozzle from the When charging is complete, the green CHARGE Use genuine towing devices and their Towing device with quickly charging connector: indicator lamp on the control unit comes on fixed. wiring harnesses approved by detachable towball ► If the vehicle is unlocked, lock it and then ► Replace the protective cover on the charging PEUGEOT. We recommend having them unlock it. nozzle and close the charging flap. fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► If the vehicle is locked, unlock it. ► Disconnect the control unit end of the workshop. Presentation The red indicator lamp in the flap goes out to charging cable from the domestic socket. If not fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer, they must This genuine towing device can be fitted and confirm that the charging nozzle is unlocked. Accelerated charging (mode 3) still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle removed with no need for tools. ► Within 30 seconds, remove the charging The end of charging is indicated by the charging manufacturer's instructions. nozzle. control unit and by the fixed lighting of the green Certain driving or manoeuvring aid functions indicator lamp in the flap. are automatically deactivated while an ► Hang up the nozzle on the charging unit and approved towing system is in use. close the charging flap.
146 Practical information
Comply with the maximum authorised A. Locked position (the green marks are towable weight, as indicated on your 7 opposite each other); the wheel is in contact vehicle's registration certificate, on the with the towball (no gap). manufacturer's label and in the Technical B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite data section of this guide. the green mark); the wheel is no longer Complying with the maximum authorised in contact with the towball (gap of around nose weight (towball weight) also includes 5 mm). the use of accessories (bicycle carriers, tow boxes, etc.). Trailers with LED lamps are not compatible with the wiring harness of this
Observe the legislation in force in the device. 1. Carrier country where you are driving. 2. Protective plug 3. Connection socket To ensure complete safety while driving Electric motor 4. Safety eye with a Towing device, refer to the Electric vehicles must never be equipped 5. Detachable towball corresponding section. with towing devices. 6. Locking/unlocking wheel It is therefore not possible to tow a trailer or 7. Security key lock Before each use caravan. 8. Label to note the key references Verify that the towball is correctly fitted,
checking the follow points: – the green mark on the wheel is aligned with Towing device with quickly the green mark on the towball, – the wheel is in contact with the towball detachable towball (position A), – the security key lock is closed and the Presentation key removed; the wheel can no longer be This genuine towing device can be fitted and operated, removed with no need for tools. – the towball must not be able to move in its carrier; test by attempting to shake it with your hand.
If the towball is not locked, the trailer can become detached - risk of an accident!
147 Practical information
During use Fitting the towball ► Insert the trailer plug and rotate it by a Never release the locking system with a quarter turn to connect it to the connection trailer or load carrier on the towball. socket 3 on the carrier. Never exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle - the Gross Train Removing the towball Weight or GTW. ► Grasp the trailer plug, perform a quarter turn Always comply with the maximum authorised and pull to disconnect it from the connection load on the towing device: if it is exceeded, socket 3 on the carrier. this device may become detached from the ► Detach the cable on the trailer from the safety vehicle - risk of an accident! eye 4 on the carrier.
Before driving, check the headlamp height ► Detach the trailer from the towball. ► Check that the mechanism has correctly adjustment and check that the lamps on the ► Refit the protective cover to the towball.
locked into place (position A). trailer operate correctly. ► Remove the cap from the lock and press it ► Below the rear bumper, remove the protective ► Close the lock 7 using the key. For more information on Headlamp height onto the head of the key.
► Remove the key. The key cannot be removed adjustment, refer to the corresponding plug 2 from the carrier 1. while the lock is open. section. ► Insert the end of the towball 5 into the carrier 1 and push it upwards; it will lock into position ► Clip the cap onto the lock.
automatically. After use When travelling without a trailer or load carrier, remove the towball and fit the protective plug into the carrier, to provide clear visibility of the number plate and/or its lighting.
► Insert the key into the lock 7. ► Open the lock using the key.
► Remove the protective cover from the ► The wheel 6 rotates a quarter turn anti- towball. clockwise; take care to keep your hands clear! ► Attach the trailer to the towball. ► Attach the cable on the trailer to the safety eye 4 on the carrier.
148 Practical information
► Insert the trailer plug and rotate it by a Maintenance quarter turn to connect it to the connection 7 Correct operation is only possible if the towball socket on the carrier. 3 and its carrier are kept clean. Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure Removing the towball jet wash, the towball must be removed and the ► Grasp the trailer plug, perform a quarter turn protective plug fitted to the carrier. and pull to disconnect it from the connection socket 3 on the carrier. Affix the enclosed label in a clearly visible ► Detach the cable on the trailer from the safety location, close to the carrier or in the eye 4 on the carrier. boot.
► Detach the trailer from the towball. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► Hold the towball 5 firmly in one hand; using ► Refit the protective cover to the towball. workshop for any work on the towball system. the other hand, pull and turn the wheel 6 fully in ► Remove the cap from the lock and press it a clockwise direction; do not release the wheel. onto the head of the key.
► Extract the towball from the bottom of its carrier 1. Roof bars ► Release the wheel; it automatically stops in As a safety measure and to avoid the unlocked position (position B).
damaging the roof, it is essential to use the transverse bars approved for the vehicle. Observe the instructions on fitting and use contained in the guide supplied with the roof bars.
Maximum load distributed over the roof
bars, for a loading height not exceeding ► Insert the key into the lock 7. 40 cm: 70 kg. ► Open the lock using the key. As this value may change, please verify the maximum load quoted in the guide supplied with the roof bars. ► Refit the protective plug 2 to the carrier 1. If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed ► Stow the towball in its bag away from knocks of the vehicle to the profile of the road to and dirt. avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings on the vehicle.
149 Practical information
Be sure to refer to national legislation in order Fitting on longitudinal bars Snow chains ► Fit the chains following the instructions to comply with the regulations for transporting provided by the manufacturer. objects that are longer than the vehicle. In wintry conditions, snow chains improve ► Move off gently and drive for a few moments, traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h). when braking. Recommendations ► Stop the vehicle and check that the snow Distribute the load uniformly, taking care The snow chains must be fitted only to chains are correctly tightened. to avoid overloading one of the sides. the front wheels. They must never be It is strongly recommended that before Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels. setting off, you practise fitting the snow as possible to the roof. chains on a level and dry surface. The transverse bars must be fixed at the Secure the load securely. Take account of the legislation specific to Drive gently: the vehicle will be more engraved markings on the longitudinal bars. each country on the use of snow chains Avoid driving with snow chains on roads susceptible to the effects of side winds and its and the maximum authorised speed. that have been cleared of snow to avoid stability may be affected. Fitting directly to the roof damaging the vehicle's tyres and the road Regularly check the security and tight Use only chains designed to be fitted to the type surface. If the vehicle is fitted with alloy fastening of the roof bars, at least before each of wheel fitted to the vehicle: wheels, check that no part of the chain or its trip. Original tyre size Maximum link size fixings is in contact with the wheel rim. Remove the roof bars once they are no longer needed. 215/65R16 9 mm (Polaire XP9) 215/60R17 9 mm (Polaire XP9) Very cold climate screen Sunroof 215/55R18 10 mm (Depending on country of sale.) Check that the load does not pass below (Polaire 0112) the roof bars so that it does not impede the This removable protective screen prevents the movements of the sunroof - risk of major For more information on snow chains, contact a accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. It consists of a first element for the upper part damage! You must only attach the transverse bars to of the front grille and a second element for the the four fixing points located on the roof frame. Installation tips lower part. ► To fitthe chains during a journey, stop the These points are concealed by the vehicle doors For fitting / removing, it is recommended vehicle on a flat surface at the side of the road. when the doors are closed. that you contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a ► Apply the parking brake and position any The roof bar fixings have a stud which must be qualified workshop. inserted into the opening of each fixing point. wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent movement of the vehicle.
150 Practical information
► Fit the chains following the instructions Before any operation, ensure that the Removing provided by the manufacturer. engine is off and the cooling fan has 7 ► Move off gently and drive for a few moments, stopped. without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h). ► Stop the vehicle and check that the snow It is essential to remove them when: chains are correctly tightened. – the exterior temperature exceeds It is strongly recommended that before 10°C. setting off, you practise fitting the snow – towing. chains on a level and dry surface. – the speed is above 75 mph (120 km/h).
For the side screen Avoid driving with snow chains on roads Fitting ► Insert a finger into the notch in the lower part that have been cleared of snow to avoid of the side screen. damaging the vehicle's tyres and the road ► Pull towards you to unclip the unit. surface. If the vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, check that no part of the chain or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.
Very cold climate screen (Depending on country of sale.) This removable protective screen prevents the
accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan. ► Hold the side screen in front of the lower left For the central screen with horizontal grille It consists of a first element for the upper part ► Press the upper fixing brackets to release grille of the bumper. of the front grille and a second element for the them from the grille. ► First insert the lower fixing brackets into the lower part. ► Gently tilt the central screen downwards. bumper. For fitting / removing, it is recommended ► Pull towards you to unclip the unit. ► Tilt the side screen upwards until the side and that you contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a then upper fixing brackets click into the bumper. qualified workshop. ► Check that the unit is firmly held by pressing around the edges. Repeat the same process to fit the central screen into the upper grille of the bumper.
151 Practical information
If a telephone call is in progress at the functions, such as the air conditioning and the Cooling of the engine when stopped time, it will be maintained for around 10 heated rear screen. The engine cooling fan may start after minutes via the audio system’s hands-free The deactivated functions are reactivated the engine has been switched off. system. automatically as soon as conditions permit. Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the fan! Exiting the mode Bonnet
These functions are automatically reactivated the Opening Stop & Start For the central screen with vertical grille next time the vehicle is used. ► Open the left-hand front door. Before doing anything under the bonnet, ► Insert a flat screwdriver into the holes to To restore the use of these functions you must switch off the ignition to avoid any reach the upper fixing brackets of the central immediately, start the engine and let it run: risk of injury resulting from an automatic screen. – For less than 10 minutes, to use the change to START mode. ► Press on each upper fixing bracket in turn to equipment for approximately 5 minutes. release them from the grille. – For more than 10 minutes, to use the ► Pull towards you to unclip the unit. equipment for approximately 30 minutes. Let the engine run for the specified duration to ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. Energy economy mode To recharge the battery, avoid repeatedly or
The location of the interior bonnet This system manages the duration of use of continuously restarting the engine. release lever prevents opening the ► Pull the interior release lever, located at the certain functions, in order to conserve a sufficient A flat battery prevents the engine from bonnet when the left-hand front door is bottom of the door frame, towards you.
level of charge in the battery with the ignition off. starting. closed. After switching off the engine, you can still For more information on the 12 V battery, use functions such as the audio and telematic refer to the corresponding section. system, the wipers and the dipped beam When the engine is hot, handle the headlamps or courtesy lamps, for a combined exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay duration of approximately 40 minutes. with care (risk of burns), using the protected Load reduction mode area. When the bonnet is open, take care not to Selecting the mode This system manages the use of certain damage the safety catch. A confirmation message is displayed when functions according to the level of charge Do not open the bonnet under very windy energy economy mode is entered, and the active remaining in the battery. conditions. functions are placed on standby. When the vehicle is being driven, the load
reduction function temporarily deactivates certain
152 Practical information
Cooling of the engine when stopped ► Lift the exterior safety catch and raise the Petrol engine The engine cooling fan may start after bonnet. 7 the engine has been switched off. ► Unclip the stay from its housing and place it Take care with objects or clothing that in the support slot to hold the bonnet open. could be caught in the blades of the fan! Closing Opening ► Hold the bonnet and pull out the stay from the
support slot. ► Open the left-hand front door.
► Clip the stay in its housing. Diesel engine ► Lower the bonnet and release it near the end
of its travel.
► Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked correctly. Because of the presence of electrical equipment under the bonnet, it is strongly
recommended that exposure to water (rain, washing, etc.) be limited.
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir ► Pull the interior release lever, located at the 2. Engine coolant reservoir bottom of the door frame, towards you. Engine compartment 3. Brake fluid reservoir The engine shown here is an example for 4. Battery/Fuses illustrative purposes only. 5. Remote earth point (-) The locations of the following elements may 6. Fusebox vary: 7. Air filter –. Air filter 8. Engine oil filler cap – Engine oil dipstick. 9. Engine oil dipstick – Engine oil filler cap. The Diesel fuel system operates under very high pressure. All work on this circuit must be carried out
only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
153 Practical information
Electric motor The fluids must comply with the It is normal to top up the oil level between two Oil grade
manufacturer's requirements and with services (or oil changes). It is recommended Before topping up or changing the engine the vehicle's engine. that you check the level, and top up if necessary, oil, check that the oil is suitable for the engine every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). and complies with the recommendations in the service schedule supplied with the vehicle Take care when working under the In order to maintain the reliability of the (or available from your PEUGEOT dealer and bonnet, as certain areas of the engine engine and emissions control system, qualified workshops). may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the never use additives in the engine oil. cooling fan could start at any time (even with Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate
the ignition off). the contractual warranty in the event of Checking using the dipstick engine failure. 1. Screenwash fluid reservoir For the location of the dipstick, please refer 2. Engine coolant reservoir Used products to the illustration of the corresponding engine 3. Brake fluid reservoir Topping up the engine oil level compartment. 4. Battery / Fuses Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please ► Grasp the dipstick by its coloured grip and 5. Remote earth point (-) fluids with the skin. refer to the corresponding under-bonnet engine pull it out completely. 6. Fusebox Most of these fluids are harmful to health and compartment illustration. ► Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean, 7. 400 V electrical system very corrosive. ► Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills lint-free cloth.
8. Emergency circuit-breaker for firefighters and on engine components (risk of fire). maintenance technicians Do not discard used oil or fluids into ► Wait a few minutes before checking the level sewers or onto the ground. again using the dipstick. For more information on the Charging system Empty used oil into the containers reserved ► Top up the level if necessary. (Electric), refer to the corresponding section. for this purpose at a PEUGEOT dealer or a ► After checking the level, carefully screw the qualified workshop. oil filler cap back on and replace the dipstick in
Checking levels its tube. ► Reinsert the dipstick and push fully down, Check all of the following levels regularly in Engine oil Within 30 minutes of adding oil, the oil accordance with the manufacturer's service then pull it out again to visually check the oil The level is checked, with the engine level indication in the instrument panel schedule. Top them up if required, unless level: the correct level is between marks A (max) having been switched off for at least 30 when the ignition is switched on is not valid. otherwise indicated. and B (min). minutes and on level ground, either using the oil If a level drops significantly, have the Do not start the engine if the level is: level indicator in the instrument panel when the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT – above mark A: contact a PEUGEOT dealer or Brake fluid ignition is switched on (for vehicles equipped dealer or a qualified workshop. a qualified workshop. The level of this fluid should be close to with an electric gauge), or using the dipstick. – below mark B: top up the engine oil the "MAX" mark. If not, check the brake immediately. pad wear.
154 Practical information
Oil grade To know how often the brake fluid should be Screenwash fluid Before topping up or changing the engine replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing 7 Top up to the required level when oil, check that the oil is suitable for the engine schedule. necessary. and complies with the recommendations in Clean the cap before removing it to refill. the service schedule supplied with the vehicle Use only DOT4 brake fluid from a sealed Fluid specification (or available from your PEUGEOT dealer and container. The fluid must be topped up with a ready-to-use qualified workshops). mixture. Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate In winter (temperatures below zero), a liquid the contractual warranty in the event of Engine coolant containing an agent to prevent freezing must engine failure. It is normal to top up this fluid between be used which is appropriate for the prevailing two services. conditions, in order to protect the elements of the Topping up the engine oil level The check and top-up must only be done with system (pump, tank, ducts, jets, etc.). the engine cold. For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please Filling with pure water is prohibited under A low level presents a risk of serious damage to refer to the corresponding under-bonnet engine all circumstances (risk of freezing, the engine. compartment illustration. limestone deposits, etc.). The level of this fluid should be close to the ► Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills " " mark but should never exceed it. on engine components (risk of fire). MAX If the level is close to or below the " ” mark, it ► Wait a few minutes before checking the level MIN AdBlue (BlueHDi) is essential to top up. again using the dipstick. An alert is triggered when the reserve level is When the engine is hot, the temperature of this ► Top up the level if necessary. reached. fluid is regulated by the fan. ► After checking the level, carefully screw the For more information on Indicators and in As the cooling system is pressurised, wait at oil filler cap back on and replace the dipstick in particular the AdBlue range indicators, refer to least one hour after switching off the engine its tube. the corresponding section. before carrying out any work. To avoid the vehicle being immobilised in Within 30 minutes of adding oil, the oil In order to avoid the risk of scalding if you need accordance with regulations, you must top up the level indication in the instrument panel to top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around AdBlue tank. when the ignition is switched on is not valid. the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to For more information on AdBlue® (BlueHDi), allow the pressure to drop. and in particular on the supply of AdBlue, refer to Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap the corresponding section. Brake fluid and top up to the required level. The level of this fluid should be close to the "MAX" mark. If not, check the brake pad wear.
155 Practical information
Checks Versions equipped with Stop & Start are warning lamp comes on temporarily, Manual parking brake fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of accompanied by a message warning of the risk If you notice excessive brake lever travel Unless otherwise indicated, check these specific technology and specification. of the filter clogging. or decreased effectiveness, the parking components in accordance with the Its replacement should be carried out only by As soon as the traffic conditions permit, brake must be adjusted, even between two manufacturer's service schedule and according a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at services. to your engine. least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp This system must be checked by a PEUGEOT Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT goes off. dealer or a qualified workshop. Passenger compartment dealer or a qualified workshop. If the warning lamp stays on, this Only use products recommended by filter indicates a low Diesel additive level. Electric parking brake PEUGEOT or products of equivalent Depending on the environment and the For more information on Checking levels, This system does not require any routine quality and specification. use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, refer to the corresponding section. servicing. However, in the event of a In order to optimise the operation of city driving), change it twice as often, if problem, do not hesitate to have the system components as important as those in the necessary. Following prolonged operation of the checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers A clogged passenger compartment filter vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you workshop. very specific products. can adversely affect air conditioning may, in exceptional circumstances, notice For more information on the Electric system performance and generate water vapour coming from the exhaust while parking brake, refer to the 12 V battery undesirable odours. accelerating. This has no impact on the corresponding section. The battery does not require any vehicle’s behaviour or the environment. maintenance. Air filter However, check regularly that the terminals New vehicle Brake pads Depending on the environment and the are correctly tightened (versions without quick During the first few particle filter Brake wear depends on the style of use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, release terminals) and that the connections are regeneration operations, you may notice a driving, particularly in the case of vehicles city driving), change it twice as often, if clean. "burning" smell. This is perfectly normal. used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary. necessary to have the condition of the brakes For more information on the precautions checked, even between vehicle services. to take before any work on the 12 V Oil filter Manual gearbox Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the battery, refer to the corresponding section. Change the oil filter each time the engine The gearbox does not require any brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads oil is changed. maintenance (no oil change). are worn. Particle filter (Diesel) Automatic gearbox After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in wintry conditions, ice can form on the When the particle filter is The gearbox does not require any brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may approaching saturation, this maintenance (no oil change).
156 Practical information
Manual parking brake be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to dry and less than 1.6 mm; it is essential to replace the defrost them. tyres. 7 If you notice excessive brake lever travel Using different size wheels and tyres from those or decreased effectiveness, the parking specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, wheel brake must be adjusted, even between two Brake disc/drum wear rotation, ground clearance, the speedometer services. For any information on checking brake reading and have an adverse effect on road This system must be checked by a PEUGEOT disc/drum wear, contact a PEUGEOT holding. dealer or a qualified workshop. dealer or a qualified workshop. Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles can cause the ESC to mistime. Electric parking brake Wheels and tyres This system does not require any routine The inflation pressure of all tyres, Shock absorbers servicing. However, in the event of a including the spare wheel, must be It is not easy for drivers to detect when problem, do not hesitate to have the system checked on "cold” tyres. shock absorbers are worn. Nevertheless, checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure the shock absorbers have a major impact on workshop. label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven road holding and braking performance. For more information on the Electric for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles For your safety and driving comfort, it is parking brake, refer to the (10 kilometres) at over 31 mph (50 km/h), add important to have them regularly checked by a corresponding section. 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. label. Timing and accessory kits Brake pads Under-inflation increases energy consumption. Non-compliant tyre The timing and accessory kits are used Brake wear depends on the style of pressure causes premature wear on tyres and from the time the engine is started until it driving, particularly in the case of vehicles has an adverse effect on the vehicle's road is switched off. It is normal for them to wear over used in town, over short distances. It may be holding - risk of an accident! time. necessary to have the condition of the brakes A faulty timing or accessory kit can damage checked, even between vehicle services. Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces the the engine, rendering it unusable. Observe the Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the braking and road holding performance of the recommended replacement frequency, stated in brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads vehicle. It is recommended to regularly check the distance travelled or time elapsed, whichever is are worn. condition of the tyres (tread and sidewalls) and reached first. After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in wheel rims as well as the presence of the valves. wintry conditions, ice can form on the When the wear indicators no longer appear set brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may back from the tread, the depth of the grooves is
157 Practical information
AdBlue® (BlueHDi) An alert system is triggered once the reserve Supply of AdBlue® In the event of contact with the skin, wash the
level is reached: it is then possible to drive for a affected area with soap and running water. In the It is recommended that the AdBlue® be topped further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the tank is event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating empty and the vehicle blocked. the eyes with large amounts of water or with an that the reserve level has been reached. eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek For more information on the Warning In order to ensure that the SCR system medical attention if you feel a persistent burning and indicator lamps and the associated operates correctly: sensation or irritation. alerts, or the Indicators, please refer to the – Use only AdBlue® fluid that meets the ISO If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth corresponding sections. 22241 standard. with clean water and then drink plenty of water. – Never transfer AdBlue® to another In certain conditions (high temperature, for ® Once the AdBlue tank is empty, a container: it would lose its purity. example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot system required by legislation prevents – Never dilute AdBlue® with water. be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia To respect the environment and ensure starting of the engine. vapours have an irritant effect on mucous AdBlue® can be obtained from a PEUGEOT compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without If the SCR system is faulty, the level of membranes (eyes, nose and throat). adversely affecting the performance or fuel emissions from the vehicle will no longer meet dealer or a qualified workshop. ® consumption of its Diesel engines, PEUGEOT the Euro 6 standard: the vehicle becomes Store AdBlue out of the reach of has taken the decision to equip its vehicles polluting. Storage recommendations children, in its original container. with a system that associates SCR (Selective In the event of a confirmed SCR system AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel Particle Filter malfunction, it is essential to visit a above +25°C. Containers should be stored in a Procedure (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. cool area and protected from direct sunlight. Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that After 685 miles (1,100 km), a device is Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface. SCR system automatically activated to prevent the engine at least a year. In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature Using a liquid called AdBlue® that contains from starting. If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has of the vehicle is above -11 °C. Otherwise the urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of In both cases, a range indicator indicates completely thawed out in the ambient air. AdBlue® may be frozen and so cannot be poured the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and the distance that can be travelled before the ® Never store AdBlue containers in your into its tank. Park the vehicle in a warmer area water, which are harmless to health and the vehicle is stopped. vehicle. for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried environment. out. The AdBlue® is contained in a special Freezing of the AdBlue® ® tank holding about 15 litres. AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below Precautions for use Never put the AdBlue into the Diesel Its capacity allows a driving range of around -11°C. AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This fluid is fuel tank. approximately 5,600 miles (9,000 km), which The SCR system includes a heater for the non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when may vary considerably depending on your AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving kept in a cool place). If any AdBlue® is splashed, or if there are driving style. in very cold conditions. any spillages on the bodywork, rinse
158 Practical information
In the event of contact with the skin, wash the immediately with cold water or wipe with a ► Turn the blue cap of the AdBlue® tank a 6th of affected area with soap and running water. In the damp cloth. a turn anti-clockwise and remove it. 7 event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using a ► With a container of AdBlue®: after checking the eyes with large amounts of water or with an sponge and hot water. the expiry date, read the instructions on the eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek label carefully before pouring the contents of the medical attention if you feel a persistent burning Important: in the event of a top-up after container into the vehicle's AdBlue tank. ® sensation or irritation. a breakdown because of a lack of ► With an AdBlue pump: introduce the nozzle If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth AdBlue, it is essential to wait around 5 and fill the tank until the nozzle automatically with clean water and then drink plenty of water. minutes before switching on the ignition, cuts out. In certain conditions (high temperature, for without opening the driver’s door, In order not to overfill the AdBlue® tank: example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot unlocking the vehicle, introducing the key – Add between 10 and 13 litres using be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia into the ignition switch, or introducing the AdBlue® containers. vapours have an irritant effect on mucous key of the “Keyless Entry and Starting” – Stop after the nozzle’s first automatic cut- membranes (eyes, nose and throat). system into the passenger compartment. out, if you are refilling at a service station. Store AdBlue® out of the reach of Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10 The system only registers AdBlue® top-ups of children, in its original container. seconds before starting the engine. 5 litres or more. ► Switch off the ignition and remove the key ® Procedure from the switch to switch off the engine. If the AdBlue tank is completely empty – which is confirmed by the message Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that or "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible" – it is the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface. ► With Keyless Entry and Starting, press the "START/STOP" button to switch off the engine. essential to add at least 5 litres.
In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature of the vehicle is above -11 °C. Otherwise the AdBlue® may be frozen and so cannot be poured into its tank. Park the vehicle in a warmer area Free-wheeling for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried In certain situations, you must allow the vehicle out. to free-wheel (while being towed, on a rolling road, in an automatic car wash, or being Never put the AdBlue® into the Diesel transported by rail or sea freight, etc.). fuel tank. The procedure varies according to the type of gearbox and parking brake. ®
If any AdBlue is splashed, or if there are any spillages on the bodywork, rinse
159 Practical information
With manual or EAT6 Release procedure ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the automatic gearbox and ► With the vehicle stationary and the engine control lever to release the parking brake. running, select mode N and switch off the ► Release the brake pedal, switch off the electric parking brake ignition. ignition. If the 5-second time limit is exceeded, the / Within 5 seconds: ► Switch on the ignition again. gearbox engages mode P; it is then necessary to ► While depressing the brake pedal, move the restart the procedure. Release procedure push selector forwards or backwards to confirm Reverting to normal operation ► With the engine running and while depressing mode N. ► While depressing the brake pedal, restart the the brake pedal, move the gear selector to the ► Switch off the ignition. engine. neutral position. If the 5-second time limit is exceeded, the ► While depressing the brake pedal, switch off gearbox engages mode P; it is then necessary to Keyless Entry and Starting the ignition. restart the procedure. You must not depress the brake pedal ► Release the brake pedal, then switch on the while switching the ignition on or off. If you do, Reverting to normal operation ignition again. the engine will start, requiring you to restart ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the ► Press button P on the selector. the procedure. control lever to release the parking brake. ► Release the brake pedal, then switch off the With EAT8 automatic ignition. gearbox or drive selector Advice on care and Reverting to normal operation and electric parking brake maintenance ► While depressing the brake pedal, start the
/ engine. General recommendations With EAT8 automatic Release procedure Observe the following recommendations to avoid gearbox and manual parking ► With the vehicle stationary and the engine damaging the vehicle. running, select mode N and switch off the Exterior brake ignition. Never use a high-pressure jet wash in / Within 5 seconds: ► Switch on the ignition again. the engine compartment - risk of ► While depressing the brake pedal, move the damaging the electrical components! push selector forwards or backwards to confirm Do not wash the vehicle in bright sunshine or mode N. extremely cold conditions.
160 Practical information
When washing the vehicle in an controls in the dashboard and centre console. Use a high-flow hose at a temperature automatic roller-brush car wash, be sure Be vigilant! between 25°C and 40°C. 7 to lock the doors and, depending on version, Sweep the jet of water across the surface to move the electronic key away. be cleaned, perpendicular to it. When using a pressure washer, hold the Bodywork Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water. lance at least 30 cm from the vehicle High-gloss paint (particularly when cleaning areas containing chipped paint, sensors or seals). Do not use abrasive products or Leather Promptly clean up any stains containing solvents, petrol or oil to clean the Leather is a natural product. Appropriate regular chemicals liable to damage the vehicle's paint bodywork. care is essential for its durability. (including tree resin, bird droppings, insect Never use an abrasive sponge to clean It must be protected and nourished using a secretions, pollen and tar). stubborn stains. Risk of scratching the specific leather product, to keep it supple and If justified by the environment, clean the paintwork! preserve its original appearance. Do not apply polish in strong sunshine, or to vehicle more frequently to remove salty Do not clean leather using unsuitable plastic or rubber parts. deposits (in coastal areas), soot (in industrial cleaning agents such as solvents, areas) and mud (in wet or cold areas). These detergents, petrol or pure alcohol. substances can be highly corrosive. Use a soft sponge and soapy water or a When cleaning items partly made from Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified pH neutral product. leather, take care not to damage the other workshop for advice on removing stubborn Gently wipe the bodywork with a clean materials with the specific leather product. stains requiring special products (such as tar microfibre cloth. or insect removers). Apply polish with the vehicle clean and dry. Before cleaning greasy stains or liquids, Preferably, have paint touch-ups performed Comply with the instructions for use stated on quickly mop up any surplus. by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the product. Before cleaning, wipe off any residues liable workshop. to scuff the leather, using a cloth that has Decals been dampened with demineralised water Interior (Depending on version) and thoroughly wrung out. When washing the vehicle, never use a Do not use a high pressure washer to Clean leather using a soft cloth moistened water hose or high-pressure jet to clean clean the vehicle. Risk of damaging or with soapy water or a pH-neutral product. the interior. detaching the decals! Dry with a soft, dry cloth. Liquids carried in cups or other open containers can spill, presenting a risk of damage if they come into contact with the
161 In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle Assembling and placing the For more information on Refuelling and on Misfuel prevention (Diesel), refer to As a safety precaution, before leaving your triangle the corresponding section. vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put on your 1.5 BlueHDi engines high visibility vest. ► Switch on the ignition (without starting the Storage compartment engine).
► Wait around 1 minute and switch off the ignition. ► Operate the starter motor to start the engine. If the engine does not start at the first attempt, do not keep trying, but restart the procedure.
Tool kit For versions supplied with a triangle as original Set of tools supplied with the vehicle. equipment, refer to the illustration above. Its content depends on your vehicle's equipment: For other versions, refer to the assembly – Temporary puncture repair kit. instructions provided with the triangle. – Spare wheel.
► Put the triangle in place behind the vehicle, There is a compartment in the interior trim of the as required by local legislation. Access to the tools tailgate to store a warning triangle. Depending on version, the tool kit is stored in a ► After opening the tailgate, release the cover Running out of fuel bag or in a storage box in the boot.
by turning the screw a quarter turn to the left. (Diesel) With Diesel engines, the fuel system must be primed if you run out of fuel. Before starting to prime the system, it is essential to put at least 5 litres of Diesel into the fuel tank.
162 In the event of a breakdown
On the boot carpet or floor With temporary puncture repair kit workshop to obtain the one that was intended
by the manufacturer. 8 The jack meets European standards, as defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/ CE. The jack does not require any maintenance.
List of tools
With spare wheel
1. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (depending on equipment) 2. Socket for the wheel security bolts (located in
the glove box) (depending on equipment)
Under the boot carpet or floor For adapting the wheelbrace to the special ► Raise the boot floor (depending on version), These tools are specific to the vehicle ‘security’ bolts. then the boot carpet by pulling the strap to and may vary according to the level of 3. Removable towing eye access the tools. equipment. Do not use them for any other purpose. For more information on Towing the vehicle and using the removable towing eye, refer to the corresponding section. The jack must only be used to change a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. Do not use any jack other than the one supplied with the vehicle. If the vehicle does not have its original jack, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
163 In the event of a breakdown
With temporary puncture repair kit 5. Wheelbrace Repair procedure
For removing the wheel trim and the wheel bolts. Do not remove any foreign bodies (e.g. nail, screw) which have penetrated into 6. Jack with integrated handle To raise the vehicle. the tyre. 7. Wheel bolt cap remover (depending on ► Park the vehicle without obstructing traffic equipment) and apply the parking brake. For removing the wheel bolt head finishers on ► Follow the safety instructions (hazard alloy wheels. warning lamps, warning triangle, high visibility For more information on the Spare wheel, refer jacket, etc.) according to the legislation in force to the corresponding section. in the country in which you are driving. 4. 12 V compressor with a cartridge of sealant ► Switch the ignition off. and a speed limit sticker ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be For temporary repair of a tyre and to adjust Temporary puncture repaired, and place it in a clean area. the tyre pressure. repair kit For more information about the Temporary puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view section. explanatory videos.
With spare wheel Made up of a compressor and a sealant
cartridge, it allows you to carry out a temporary repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage. It is designed to repair most punctures located
on the tyre tread. ► Connect the pipe from the bottle of sealant to The vehicle's electric system allows the the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten connection of the compressor to the 2 V firmly. power supply for long enough to repair a tyre ► Connect the pipe from the compressor to the after a puncture. bottle of sealant. ► Check that the compressor switch is in For more information on the Tool kit, position "O".
refer to the corresponding section.
164 In the event of a breakdown
► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk the compressor. of blowback). 8 ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the If after approximately 7 minutes, the vehicle's 12 V socket. pressure of 2 bar is not reached, this ► Affix the speed limit sticker. indicates that the tyre is not repairable; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.
► Move the switch to position "O". ► Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles The speed limit sticker must be affixed ► Disconnect the compressor's electric plug (5 kilometres) at reduced speed (between inside the vehicle in the area close to the from the vehicle's 12 V socket. 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)) to plug the driver, to remind them that a wheel is in ► Remove the kit. puncture. temporary use. ► Refit the cap on the valve. ► Stop to check the repair and the tyre ► Remove and store the bottle of sealant. pressure using the kit. The tyre inflation pressures are given on The sealant product is harmful if With a tyre repaired using this type of kit, this label. swallowed and causes irritation to the do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
eyes. (80 km/h) and do not drive more than Keep this product out of the reach of children. 125 miles (200 km). The use-by date of the fluid is marked on the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
bottle. workshop to have the tyre changed. ► Switch the ignition on.
After use, do not discard the bottle in standard waste, take it to a PEUGEOT dealer or an authorised waste disposal site. Checking/adjusting tyre Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of pressures sealant, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or The compressor can be used, without injecting a qualified workshop. sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the
tyre pressures. ► Switch on the compressor by moving the ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre and keep switch to position "I" until the tyre pressure it in a clean place. reaches 2 bar. The sealant product is injected ► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. under pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect ► Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten firmly.
165 In the event of a breakdown
► Check that the compressor switch is in Removing the spare wheel ► Tighten the central nut sufficiently to retain
Spare wheel position "O". the wheel correctly. ► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view ► Depending on version, put the tool box back the compressor. explanatory videos. in place in the middle of the wheel and clip it in ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the place. vehicle's 12 V socket. For more information on the Tool kit, ► Switch the ignition on. refer to the corresponding section. Removing a wheel The tyre inflation pressures are given on Parking the vehicle
this label. Immobilise the vehicle where it does Accessing the spare wheel ► Slacken the central nut. not obstruct traffic: the ground must be level, ► Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt). stable and non-slippery. ► Lift the spare wheel towards you from the With a manual gearbox, engage first gear
rear. to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, ► Start the compressor by placing the switch at ► Take the wheel out of the boot. unless it is programmed to be in automatic position "I" and adjust the pressure to the value mode, and switch off the ignition. shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label. To Putting the spare wheel back in place With an automatic gearbox, select mode P deflate: press the black button located on the The punctured wheel cannot be placed in to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, compressor pipe, near the valve connection. the boot under the floor. unless it is programmed to be in automatic mode, and switch off the ignition.
If after 7 minutes the pressure of 2 bar is not reached, the tyre is damaged; Check for the fixed illumination of the parking The spare wheel is stored under the boot carpet. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified brake warning lamps in the instrument panel. To access the spare wheel, first refer to the Tool workshop for assistance. The occupants must get out of the vehicle kit section. and wait where they are safe. ► Once the correct pressure is reached, put the Depending on version, the spare wheel If necessary, place a chock under the wheel switch in position "O". may be a standard steel or 'space-saver' diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed. ► Remove the kit and stow it. wheel. Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a
► Refit the cap on the valve. jack; use an axle stand. Should the pressure of one or more tyres ► Put the spare wheel back in place in its be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise housing. Wheel with wheel trim the under-inflation detection system. ► Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns. When removing the wheel, first remove For more information on Tyre under-inflation ► Position the fastening device (nut and bolt) in the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture detection, refer to the corresponding section. the middle of the wheel. using the wheelbrace.
166 In the event of a breakdown
► Tighten the central nut sufficiently to retain When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel the wheel correctly. trim, starting by placing its aperture in line 8 ► Depending on version, put the tool box back with the valve and then pushing it into place in place in the middle of the wheel and clip it in all round its edge with the palm of your hand.
place. Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle Immobilise the vehicle where it does ► Place the foot of jack 6 on the ground and not obstruct traffic: the ground must be level, ensure that it is directly below the front A or stable and non-slippery. rear B jacking point on the underbody, whichever is closest to the wheel to be changed.
With a manual gearbox, engage first gear to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, unless it is programmed to be in automatic
mode, and switch off the ignition. With an automatic gearbox, select mode P to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake,
unless it is programmed to be in automatic mode, and switch off the ignition. ► To remove the wheel bolt cover on each of Check for the fixed illumination of the parking the bolts, use tool 7 (alloy wheels). brake warning lamps in the instrument panel. ► Fit security socket 2 on wheelbrace 5 to The occupants must get out of the vehicle slacken the security bolt.
and wait where they are safe. ► Slacken the other bolts using the If necessary, place a chock under the wheel wheelbrace 5 only. ► Extend jack 6 until its head comes into
diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed. contact with jacking point A or B; contact area A Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a or B on the vehicle must be properly inserted jack; use an axle stand. into the central part of the head of the jack. ► Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient Wheel with wheel trim space between the wheel and the ground to When removing the wheel, first remove admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily. the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture using the wheelbrace.
167 In the event of a breakdown
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the Fitting a steel or "space-saver" type After changing a wheel ground is slippery or loose, the jack may spare wheel slip or collapse - risk of injury! If the vehicle is equipped with alloy wheels, Take care to position the jack strictly at the washers do not make contact with the one of the jacking points A or B under the steel or "space-saver" type spare wheel. The vehicle, ensuring that the head of the jack is wheel is secured by the conical contact of centred under the contact area of the vehicle. each bolt.
Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle and/or of the jack collapsing - risk of With a "space-saver" type spare wheel injury! Deactivate certain driving aid functions ► Lower the vehicle again fully. (Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise control,
► Fold jack 6 and remove it. etc.).
Do not exceed the maximum authorised speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Driving with more than one “space-saver” type spare wheel is prohibited.
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible to have ► Fit the wheel on the hub. the tightness of the bolts and the pressure of
► Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible. the spare wheel checked.
► Remove the bolts and store them in a clean ► Pre-tighten the security bolt using the Have the punctured tyre examined. After place. wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. ► Tighten the security bolt using the inspection, the technician will advise you on ► Remove the wheel. ► Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must wheelbrace 5 only. ► Tighten the other bolts using the be replaced.
Fitting a wheel wheelbrace 5 only. ► Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts (depending on equipment). Changing a bulb ► Store the tools. In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), misting on the
internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear
168 In the event of a breakdown
After changing a wheel after the lamps have been on for a few lamp has been switched off for several minutes. minutes - risk of serious burns! 8 Do not touch the bulb directly with your Never look too closely at the luminous fingers; use a lint-free cloth. beam of LED or Full It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet LED technology headlamps: risk of serious (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the headlamp.
eye injury! Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb With a "space-saver" type spare wheel of the same type and specification. To avoid Deactivate certain driving aid functions lighting imbalance, replace the bulbs in pairs. (Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise control, etc.). Refitting the lamp units Do not exceed the maximum authorised Perform the operations in the reverse speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). order to dismantling. Driving with more than one “space-saver” type spare wheel is prohibited. The headlamps have polycarbonate Light-emitting diode (LED) Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified lenses with a protective coating: headlamps and lamps – workshop as soon as possible to have Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive Depending on version, the affected types of the tightness of the bolts and the pressure of cloth, nor with detergent or solvent headlamps / lamps are: the spare wheel checked. products. – "LED" technology headlamps. – Use a sponge and soapy water or a pH Have the punctured tyre examined. After – Full LED technology headlamps. neutral product. inspection, the technician will advise you on – Front foglamps. – When using a high-pressure washer on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must – Offset daytime running lamps. persistent marks, do not keep the lance be replaced. – Direction indicator side repeaters. directed towards the headlamps, lamps or – Side spotlamps. their edges for too long, so as not to damage – 3D rear lamps. their protective coating and seals. Changing a bulb – Third brake lamp. – Number plate lamps. In some weather conditions (e.g. low Changing a bulb must only be done with temperature or humidity), misting on the the ignition off and after the headlamp / internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear
169 In the event of a breakdown
If you need to replace this type of bulb, Model with Opening the bonnet / Accessing the you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or LED technology headlamps bulbs a qualified workshop. With the engine warm, proceed with caution - Do not touch LED or Full LED technology risk of burns! headlamps - risk of electrocution! Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the cooling fan -
risk of strangulation! Front lamps ► Remove the protective cover by pulling the tab. Model with Full ► Pull the bulb holder backwards to remove it. LED technology headlamps ► Pull the bulb to remove it.
► Replace the bulb. 1. Main beam headlamps (LED) Halogen bulbs (Hx) When refitting the bulb holder in its housing, 2. Dipped beam headlamps (LED) To ensure good quality lighting, check press until you hear a click which means it is 3. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps (LED) that the bulb is correctly positioned in its locked in place. 4. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). housing. Direction indicators
Model with halogen headlamps Main / Dipped beam headlamps Rapid flashing of a direction indicator
lamp (left or right) indicates that one of the bulbs on the corresponding side has failed.
1. Dipped beam headlamps / Main beam headlamps
2. Direction indicators 3. Sidelamps
4. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps 5. Front foglamps 1. Main beam headlamps (H9)
2. Dipped beam headlamps (H18) 3. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps (LEDs) ► Remove the protective cover by pulling the 4. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). tab. ► Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise.
170 In the event of a breakdown
► Pull the bulb and bulb holder assembly ► Pass your hand under the bumper. backwards. ► Disconnect the connector. 8 ► Replace the bulb. ► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and remove it. Amber coloured bulbs must be replaced ► Turn the bulb a quarter turn and replace it. by bulbs with identical specifications and colour. To change the bulb within a few minutes
of switching off the ignition, take care not ► Remove the protective cover by pulling the to touch the exhaust - risk of burns! tab. Rear lamps ► Pull the bulb holder backwards to remove it. ► Pull the bulb to remove it. ► Replace the bulb. Changing a fuse When refitting the bulb holder in its housing, press until you hear a click which means it is Accessing the tools locked in place. The extraction tweezers are located behind the Direction indicators fusebox cover.
Depending on version:
Rapid flashing of a direction indicator 1. Sidelamps / Daytime running lamps (LED) lamp (left or right) indicates that one of 2. Brake lamps (LED) the bulbs on the corresponding side has 3. Reversing lamps (LED) failed. 4. Direction indicators (LED)
Foglamps (P21W)
► Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then
right. ► Remove the protective cover by pulling the ► Remove the cover completely. tab. ► Take the tweezers from their housing. These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear ► Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise. bumper.
171 In the event of a breakdown
The fuse allocation tables and the the installation of accessories not supplied or Fuse tables corresponding diagrams are available not recommended by PEUGEOT and not Lower fusebox from a PEUGEOT dealer or from a qualified installed in accordance with its
workshop. recommendations, in particular when the combined power consumption of all of the The replacement of a fuse not shown in additional equipment connected exceeds 10 the allocation tables may cause a serious milliamperes. malfunction of the vehicle. Contact a
► Open the glove box. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Fuses in the dashboard ► Press on the central handle of the fusebox The fusebox is located in the lower dashboard cover. (left-hand side). ► Lower the cover completely. To access the fuses, follow the same procedure ► Take the tweezers from their housing. as described for accessing the fuse replacement
tools. Changing a fuse Fuse N° Rating Functions Before changing a fuse: Good Faulty (Amps)
► Identify the cause of the fault and fix it. F1 10 A Electrochrome interior rear view mirror ► Switch off all power consumption. ► Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the F3 5 A Wireless smartphone charger. ignition. Tweezers F4 15 A Horn. ► Identify the defective fuse using the current F5 20 A Screenwash pump. allocation tables and diagrams. Installing electrical accessories To replace a fuse, it is essential to: The vehicle's electrical system is F6 20 A Screenwash pump. ► Use the special tweezers to extract the fuse designed to operate with standard or optional F7 5 A Rear USB sockets. from its housing and check the condition of its equipment. filament. Before fitting other electrical equipment F8 20 A Rear wiper. ► Always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of or accessories to your vehicle, contact a F10 30 A Locking/Unlocking. the same rating (same colour); use of a different PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. F11 30 A Locking/Unlocking. rating may cause malfunctions - risk of fire! If the fault recurs soon after replacing a fuse, PEUGEOT accepts no responsibility for F14 5 A Emergency and assistance calls - Alarm. have the electrical system checked by a the cost incurred in repairing the vehicle F24 5 A 7-inch touch screen. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from
172 In the event of a breakdown Fuse tables 8 Lower fusebox
Fuse N° Rating Functions (Amps) F1 10 A Electrochrome interior rear view mirror F3 5 A Wireless smartphone charger. F4 15 A Horn. F5 20 A Screenwash pump. F6 20 A Screenwash pump. F7 5 A Rear USB sockets. F8 20 A Rear wiper. F10 30 A Locking/Unlocking. F11 30 A Locking/Unlocking. F14 5 A Emergency and assistance calls - Alarm. F24 5 A 7-inch touch screen.
173 In the event of a breakdown
Accessing the fuses
Fuse N° Rating Functions (Amps) F27 5 A Alarm (retrofit). F29 20 A 10-inch touch screen. F31 or F32 15 A Cigarette lighter/12 V accessory socket.
Upper fusebox
Fuse table
Fuse N° Rating Functions (Amps) F1 40 A Heated rear screen. F2 10 A Heated door mirrors. F3 30 A Front one-touch electric windows. F4 20 A Door mirrors adjustment - Folding door mirrors.
F5 30 A Rear one-touch electric windows. Fuse N° Rating Functions F6 15 A Sunroof. (Amps) F10 30 A Heated front seats. F16 20 A Heated windscreen. F18 10 A Right-hand main beam halogen headlamp. Engine compartment fuses F19 10 A Left-hand main beam halogen headlamp. The fusebox is placed in the engine compartment near the battery. F29 40 A Windscreen wipers.
174 In the event of a breakdown
Accessing the fuses ► Release the two latches A. ► Remove the cover. 8 ► Replace the fuse. ► When you have finished, close the cover carefully, then engage the two latches A to ensure that the fusebox is properly sealed.
Fuse table
Fuse N° Rating Functions (Amps) F16 20 A Heated windscreen. F18 10 A Right-hand main beam halogen headlamp. F19 10 A Left-hand main beam halogen headlamp. F29 40 A Windscreen wipers.
175 In the event of a breakdown
12 V battery / Accessory Precautions before working on the ► Release the bonnet by pulling the internal accessory battery release lever, then the external safety catch. battery Select mode P, switch off the ignition, check ► Raise the bonnet. Procedure for starting the engine using another that the instrument panel is off and that the (+) Positive terminal. battery or for charging a discharged battery. vehicle is not plugged in. This terminal has a quick-release clamp. (-) Negative terminal. Lead-acid starter batteries Recharging the accessory battery As the battery's negative terminal is not You must not recharge the battery accessible, a remote earth point is located facing These batteries contain harmful without first disconnecting the terminals the battery. substances (sulphuric acid and lead). and removing the battery from the motor They must be disposed of in accordance compartment. Starting using another with regulations and must never under any Do not disconnect the battery terminals while circumstances be discarded with household battery the READY indicator lamp is lit, or while the waste. If the vehicle's battery is flat, the engine can be vehicle is charging. Take used remote control batteries and started using a backup battery (either external or vehicle batteries to a special collection point. from another vehicle) and jump leads or using a Jump-starting another vehicle battery booster. Do not use the accessory battery to Protect your eyes and face before Never start the engine by connecting a jump-start another vehicle or to charge handling the battery. battery charger. another vehicle's battery. All operations on the battery must be carried Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. out in a well ventilated area and away from Check beforehand that the backup battery naked flames and sources of sparks, to avoid Access to the battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity any risk of explosion or fire. The battery is located under the bonnet. at least equal to that of the discharged Wash your hands afterwards. battery. The two vehicles must not be in contact with Electric motor each other. Switch off all electricity-consuming equipment Flat accessory battery on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, It is no longer possible to start the motor lighting, etc.). or recharge the traction battery. Make sure that the jump leads are well away from the engine’s moving parts (fan, belt,
etc.). For access to the (+) terminal:
176 In the event of a breakdown
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the ► Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if Follow the instructions provided by the engine is running. the vehicle has one. manufacturer of the charger. 8
► Allow the engine to run for at least Never reverse polarities. 30 minutes, with the vehicle stationary, so that the battery reaches an adequate state of charge. It is not necessary to disconnect the Driving immediately without having battery. reached a sufficient level of charge may ► Switch off the ignition. affect some of the vehicle's functionalities. ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio system, lighting, wipers, etc.). With an automatic gearbox, never try to
start the engine by pushing the vehicle. ► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the vehicle has one. ► Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of Charging the battery using a flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the battery charger (+) terminal of the backup battery B or of the For optimum service life of the battery, it is booster. essential to maintain an adequate state of
► Connect one end of the green or black cable charge. to the (-) terminal of the backup battery B or of In some circumstances, it may be necessary to ► Switch off charger B before connecting the booster (or to an earth point on the assisting charge the battery: the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any vehicle). – using the vehicle mainly for short journeys; dangerous sparks. ► Connect the other end of the green or black – if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for ► Ensure that the charger cables are in good cable to the earth point C. several weeks. condition. ► Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the leave it running for a few minutes. workshop. vehicle has one. ► Operate the starter on the broken down ► Connect the cables of charger B as follows: To charge the vehicle's battery yourself, vehicle and let the engine run. • the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal use only a charger compatible with If the engine does not start immediately, switch of battery A, lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage of off the ignition and wait a few moments before • the negative (-) black cable to earth point C 12 V. trying again. on the vehicle. ► Wait for it to return to idle. ► Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order.
177 In the event of a breakdown
► At the end of the charging operation, switch ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio Reconnecting the (+) terminal Referring to the relevant section, reset certain
off charger B before disconnecting the cables system, wipers, lighting, etc.). equipment: from battery A. ► Switch off the ignition and wait for 4 minutes. – Remote control key or electronic key At the battery, it is only necessary to disconnect (depending on version). 24V the (+) terminal. – Sunroof and electric sun blind. + – Electric windows. - Quick-release terminal clamp – Date and time. – Preset radio stations. 12V Disconnecting the (+) terminal
The Stop & Start system may not be If this label is present, use only a 12 V operational during the trip following the charger to avoid causing irreversible first engine start.
damage to the electrical components related In this case, the system will only be available to the Stop & Start system. ► Raise lever A fully. again after a continuous period with the ► Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal. vehicle immobilised, the duration of which depends on the exterior temperature and the Never try to charge a frozen battery - risk ► Push clamp B fully down. state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 of explosion! ► Lower lever A to lock clamp B. hours). If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a ► Depending on equipment, lower the plastic PEUGEOT dealer or by a qualified workshop cover on the (+) terminal.
who will verify that the internal components Do not force the lever as locking will be have not been damaged and that the case ► Depending on equipment, lift the plastic cover impossible if the clamp is not positioned has not cracked, which would mean a risk of on the (+) terminal. correctly; start the procedure again. toxic and corrosive acid leaking. ► Raise lever A fully to release clamp B. ► Remove clamp B by lifting it off. After reconnection Disconnecting the battery After reconnecting the battery, turn on the In order to maintain an adequate state of charge ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the for starting the engine, it is recommended that engine, to enable the electronic systems to the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is initialise. taken out of service for a long period. If minor problems nevertheless persist following Before disconnecting the battery: this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a ► Close all openings (doors, boot, windows, qualified workshop. roof).
178 In the event of a breakdown
Referring to the relevant section, reset certain Towing the vehicle – Not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, equipment: unlock the steering, or release the parking 8 – Remote control key or electronic key General recommendations brake. (depending on version). Observe the legislation in force in the – Not possible to tow a vehicle with an – Sunroof and electric sun blind. country where you are driving. automatic gearbox, with the engine running. – Electric windows. Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is – Towing with only two wheels on the ground. – Date and time. higher than that of the towed vehicle. – Four-wheel drive vehicle. – Preset radio stations. The driver must remain at the wheel of the – No approved towbar available. The Stop & Start system may not be towed vehicle and must have a valid driving operational during the trip following the licence. Before towing the vehicle, it is essential first engine start. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on to put the vehicle in free-wheeling mode. In this case, the system will only be available the ground, always use an approved towing For more information on Changing to free- again after a continuous period with the arm; rope and straps are prohibited. wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. vehicle immobilised, the duration of which The towing vehicle must move off gently. depends on the exterior temperature and the When the vehicle is towed with its engine Electric motor state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 off, there is no longer braking and steering An electric vehicle must never be used hours). assistance. for road transfers. It may be used, for example, to exit a rut. A professional towing service must be called if: – Broken down on a motorway or main road.
Towing constraints Type of vehicle Font wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground (engine / gearbox)gearbox ground ground with towbar
Internal combustion / Manual
Internal combustion / Automatic
179 In the event of a breakdown
Towing constraints Type of vehicle Font wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground (engine / gearbox)gearbox ground ground with towbar
Electric
In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual gearbox).
Access to the tools ► Screw the towing eye in fully. ► Install the towbar. For more information on accessing the , Tool kit ► Put the gearbox into neutral. refer to the corresponding section. Failure to observe this instruction could Towing your vehicle result in damage to certain components To access the front screw thread: (braking, transmission, etc.) and to the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.
Automatic gearbox: never tow the vehicle with the driving wheels on the ground ► Unclip the cover by pressing at its right-hand and the engine off. section. ► Pull the cover downwards. ► Unlock the steering and release the parking To tow: brake. ► Screw the towing eye in fully. ► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both ► Install the towbar. vehicles.
► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both ► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a ► Unclip the cover by pressing at its left-hand vehicles. short distance. section. ► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a ► Release the cover to the right and then Towing another vehicle short distance. downwards. To access the rear screw thread:
To be towed:
180 Technical data
Engine technical data and When exterior temperatures are high, the vehicle performance may be limited in 9 towed loads order to protect the engine. When the exterior temperature is higher than 37°C, reduce the Engines towed weight. The engine characteristics are given in the vehicle's registration document, as well as in Towing even with a lightly loaded vehicle sales brochures. can adversely affect its road holding. Braking distances are increased when towing The maximum power corresponds to the a trailer. value type-approved on a test bed, under When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed conditions defined in European legislation a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the (Directive 1999/99/EC). local legislation in force). For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Weights and towed loads The weights and towed loads relating to the vehicle are indicated on the registration document, as well as in sales brochures. These values are also indicated on the manufacturer's plate or label. For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The GTW (Gross Train Weight) values and the towable loads listed are valid for a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres. The towable load must be reduced by steps of 10% for each additional 1,000 metres. The maximum authorised nose weight corresponds to the weight permitted on the towball.
181 Technical data Engines and towed loads - Petrol
Engines 1.2 PureTech 100 1.2 PureTech 130 1.2 PureTech 130 S&S S&S Gearboxes BVM6 EAT6 BVM6 EAT8 (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 8-speed) Codes EB2ADTD MB6 STT EB2ADTSM AT6III EB2ADTS MB6 STT EB2ADTS ATN8 STT Model codes: HNKK HNLW HNSK HNSS UR... Cubic capacity (cc) 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,199 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 75 96 96 96 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,200 500 1,200 1,200 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 630 500 633 640 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 48 48 48 48
182 Technical data
Engines 1.2 PureTech 155 1.2 PureTech 155 S&S 1.5 VTi 115 9 Gearboxes EAT8 EAT8 EAT6 (Auto. 8-speed) (Auto. 8-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) Codes EB2ADTXM ATN8 EB2ADTX ATN8 STT EC5F AT6III Model codes: HNJP HNNS NFJW UR... UX... Cubic capacity (cc) 1,199 1,199 1,498 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 115 115 84 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 500 1,200 500 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 500 640 500 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 48 48 48
183 Technical data Engines and towed loads - Diesel Electric motor
Engines 1.5 BlueHDi 100 S&S 1.5 BlueHDi 130 S&S Model codes: ZKXZ UJ... Gearboxes BVM6 EAT8 (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 8-speed) Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 0 on a 10% or 12% gradient Codes DV5RD MB6 STT DV5RC ATN8 STT Unbraked trailer (kg) 0 Model codes: YHYJ YHZR UC... Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 0 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,499 1,499 Electric motor Max. power: EC standard (kW) 75 96 Technology Synchronous with permanent magnets Fuel Diesel Diesel Max. power : EC standard (kW)/(hp) 100 / 136 Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,200 1,200 Traction battery on a 10% or 12% gradient Technology Lithium-Ion Unbraked trailer (kg) 640 640 Installed capacity (kWh) 50 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 48 48 Domestic charging Mode 2 Alternating current voltage (Vac) 230 (single-phase) Rating (A) 8 or 16 Accelerated charging Mode 3 Alternating current voltage (Vac) 230 (single-phase or three-phase) Rating (A) 16 or 32 Fast charging Mode 4 Direct current voltage (Vdc) 400
184 Technical data Electric motor 9 Model codes: ZKXZ UJ... Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 0 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 0 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 0
Electric motor Technology Synchronous with permanent magnets Max. power : EC standard (kW)/(hp) 100 / 136 Traction battery Technology Lithium-Ion Installed capacity (kWh) 50 Domestic charging Mode 2 Alternating current voltage (Vac) 230 (single-phase) Rating (A) 8 or 16 Accelerated charging Mode 3 Alternating current voltage (Vac) 230 (single-phase or three-phase) Rating (A) 16 or 32 Fast charging Mode 4 Direct current voltage (Vdc) 400
185 Technical data
Dimensions (mm) – European whole vehicle type approval number. These dimensions have been measured on an – Vehicle identification number (VIN). unladen vehicle.
– Gross vehicle weight (GVW). – Gross train weight (GTW). – Maximum weight on the front axle. – Maximum weight on the rear axle. D. Tyres / paint code label.
Fixed at the driver-side door. Bears the following information about the tyres: Identification markings – tyre pressures, unladen and laden. Various visible markings for the identification and – tyre specification, made up of the dimensions research of your vehicle. and type as well as the load and speed indices. – spare tyre inflation pressure. Also indicates the paint colour code. The vehicle may be originally equipped
with tyres with higher load and speed indices than those indicated on the label, without affecting tyre pressure (on cold tyres).
A. Vehicle identification number (VIN), under the bonnet. Stamped on the chassis. B. Vehicle identification number (VIN), on the dashboard. On a label, visible through the windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's label. Fixed at the right-hand door. Bears the following information: – Manufacturer’s name.
186 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
PEUGEOT Connect applications interrupt their display while the At all times it is possible to display the rolling vehicle is moving). menus by pressing the screen briefly with three 10 Radio – Changing the system settings and fingers. configuration. All touch-sensitive areas on the screen are white. The system is protected so that it only On pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of the operates in the vehicle. screen, you can switch between pages either The message Energy Economy Mode is by tapping the tab for the desired page or by displayed when the system is about to enter swiping the pages to the left or right with your the corresponding mode. finger. Press in the shaded area to go back up a level or confirm. The system’s Open Source Software Press the back arrow to go back a level or (OSS) source codes are available at the confirm. following addresses: Multimedia audio system - https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ The touch screen is of the "capacitive" Applications - Bluetooth® https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ type. To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive telephone cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional The functions and settings described First steps product. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. vary according to the vehicle version and With the engine running, a press mutes Do not touch the screen with wet hands. configuration, as well as the country of sale. the sound. With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. Certain information is displayed permanently in For safety reasons and because they Increase or decrease the volume using the upper bar of the touch screen: require sustained attention by the driver, the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons – Air conditioning status information (depending the following operations must be carried out (depending on the equipment). on version), and direct access to the with the vehicle stationary and the ignition Use the buttons on either side of or below the corresponding menu. on: touch screen to access the menus, then press – Radio Media and Telephone menu status – Pairing the smartphone with the system via the virtual buttons on the touch screen. information. Bluetooth. Depending on the model, use the "Source" and – Privacy status information. – Using the smartphone. "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen to – Access to the touch screen and digital – Connection to the CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM access the menus, then press the virtual buttons instrument panel settings. or Android Auto applications (certain on the touch screen.
187 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Audio source selection (depending on enter standby mode (with the screen and Increase volume. Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, equipment): sound off) for 5 minutes or more. end call; when no call is in progress, access – FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on The system will resume normal operation Decrease volume. telephone menu. equipment). when the temperature in the passenger Radio (rotate): automatic search for the – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and compartment has dropped. Mute/restore sound by simultaneously previous/next station. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). pressing the increase and decrease Media (rotate): previous/next track, move in a – USB Memory stick. volume buttons. list. – Media player connected via the auxiliary Steering mounted controls Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing socket (depending on equipment). Steering mounted controls - selected, access to presets.
Steering mounted controls - Type 2 Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Type 1 Radio (press and hold): update the list of stations received. Voice commands: This control is located on the steering Radio: wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk Menus Select the previous/next preset radio (depending on equipment). station. Short press, smartphone voice commands via Applications
Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. the system.
Media: Increase volume. Select the previous/next track. In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. create a profile for an individual or for a Decrease volume. Radio: Mute by pressing the volume increase group of people with shared interests, and Short press: display the list of radio and decrease buttons simultaneously configure a wide range of settings (radio stations. (depending on equipment). presets, audio settings, ambiences, etc.). Long press: update the list. Settings are applied automatically. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two Media: volume buttons. Short press: display the list of folders. Media (short press): change the In very hot conditions, the volume may Long press: display the available sorting options. multimedia source. be limited to protect the system. It may Change audio source (radio; USB; AUX if Telephone (short press): start telephone Access configurable equipment. equipment connected; CD; streaming). call. Confirm a selection. Call in progress (short press): access telephone menu.
188 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, Radio Media Settings end call; when no call is in progress, access 10 telephone menu. Radio (rotate): automatic search for the previous/next station. Media (rotate): previous/next track, move in a list. Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing selected, access to presets. Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the list of stations received. Select an audio source or radio station. Configure a personal profile and/or configure the sound (balance, ambience, etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, Menus Telephone etc.).
Applications Driving
Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth®.
Run certain applications on a smartphone Access configurable equipment. connected via MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay® or Android Activate, deactivate or configure certain Auto. vehicle functions.
189 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Navigation Applications Press this button to search and select a Enter the FM and AM waveband values recipient. using the virtual keypad. Viewing photos Select the "Quick messages” tab. Press "OK" to confirm. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. Press this button to select the display Radio reception may be affected by the settings for messages. To protect the system, do not use a USB use of electrical equipment not approved Press this button to write a new message. hub. by the Brand, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The system can read folders and image files in Press the bin alongside the selected The exterior environment (hills, buildings, the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp and .png. message to delete it. tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press Applications to display the main Press this button alongside the selected
block reception, including in RDS mode. page. message to display the secondary page. This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Configure the navigation and select your Press "Photos". Press this button to edit and modify the TM ® context of radio wave transmission, and destination via MirrorLink , CarPlay or existing text. in no way indicative of an audio system Android Auto. Select a folder. Press this button to write a new message. malfunction.
Air conditioning Select an image to view. Press the bin to delete the message.
Changing the waveband Press this button to display the details of Press Radio Media to display the main the photo. Radio page. Press the back arrow to go back a level. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the 18,5 21,5 secondary page. Selecting a station Press "Band" to change waveband. Managing messages Press Radio Media to display the main Press Applications to display the main page. Press in the shaded area to confirm. page. Press one of the buttons to perform an automatic search for radio stations. Press "SMS". Manage various temperature and air flow Or Presetting a station Move the slider to manually search for settings. Select the "SMS” tab. Select a radio station or frequency. frequencies up or down. Make a short press on the star outline. If Or Press this button to select the display the star is solid, the radio station is Press the frequency. settings for messages. already preset.
190 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Enter the FM and AM waveband values Or Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the using the virtual keypad. Select a radio station or frequency. secondary page. 10 Press "OK" to confirm. Press "Preset". Activate/deactivate "News". Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved Activating/Deactivating RDS by the Brand, such as a USB charger RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Playing TA messages connected to the 12 V socket. listening to the same station by automatically The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives The exterior environment (hills, buildings, retuning to alternative frequencies. priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press to display the main function needs good reception of a radio station block reception, including in RDS mode. Radio Media page. that transmits this type of message. While traffic This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Press the " " button to access the information is being broadcast, the current context of radio wave transmission, and OPTIONS secondary page. media is automatically interrupted so that the in no way indicative of an audio system Activate/deactivate " ". TA message can be heard. Normal play of the malfunction. RDS previously playing media resumes at the end of Press in the shaded area to confirm. the message. Changing the waveband Press Radio Media to display the main page. Press Radio Media to display the main RDS station tracking may not be Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page. available nationwide, as many radio secondary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the stations do not cover 100 % of the country. Activate/deactivate "TA". secondary page. This explains the loss of reception of the Press "Band" to change waveband. station during a journey. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Displaying text information The "Radio Text" function displays information Audio settings Presetting a station transmitted by the radio station relating to the Press Radio Media to display the main Select a radio station or frequency. station or the currently playing song. page. Make a short press on the star outline. If Press Radio Media to display the main Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the the star is solid, the radio station is page. secondary page. already preset. Press "Audio settings".
191 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Select the "Tone", "Balance", "Sound", DAB (Digital Audio Press in the shaded area to confirm. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition "Voice" or "Ringtones" tab to configure is switched off or a USB memory stick is the sound settings. Broadcasting) radio connected. The audio system memorises these If "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated, there Press the back arrow to confirm. lists, which will subsequently load faster if they may be a time offset of a few seconds have not been changed. Terrestrial Digital Radio when the system switches to "FM" analogue In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience, Bass, Digital radio provides higher quality sound. radio, and in some cases a change in volume. Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Medium and Treble sound settings are The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a When the digital signal quality is restored, the Depending on equipment different and independent for each audio choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical system automatically changes back to "DAB". Connect a portable device (MP3 player, source. order. Press to display the main etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an In the "Balance” tab, the All passengers, Radio Media If the "DAB" station being listened to is page. audio cable (not supplied). Driver and Front only settings are common not available on "FM", or if "FM-DAB Press the " " button to access the This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" to all sources. OPTIONS Follow-up" is not activated, the sound will cut secondary page. has been selected in the audio settings. In the "Sound” tab, activate or deactivate out while the digital signal is too weak. First adjust the volume on the portable device "Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary input" Press "Band" to select "DAB band". (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the and "Touch tones". Press in the shaded area to confirm. audio system. Media Controls are managed via the portable device. The balance/distribution (or spatialisation with the Arkamys© system) uses audio Selecting the source processing to adjust the sound quality FM-DAB Follow-up USB port Press Radio Media to display the main according to the number of passengers in the "DAB" does not cover 100 % of the country. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB page. vehicle. When the digital radio signal is poor, the port or connect the USB device to the "FM-DAB Follow-up" enables you to continue USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Press the "SOURCES" button. listening to the same station by automatically Select the source. Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© To protect the system, do not use a USB switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue optimises the sound distribution inside hub. ® station (if there is one). BluetoothStreaming the passenger compartment. Press Radio Media to display the main The system builds playlists (in temporary Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed page. memory); this operation can take from a from your smartphone. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the few seconds to several minutes at the first The Bluetooth profile must be activated. secondary page. connection. First adjust the volume on the portable device Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". Reduce the number of non-music files and the (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. system.
192 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Playlists are updated whenever the ignition If play does not start automatically, it may be Information and advice is switched off or a USB memory stick is necessary to start the audio playback from the 10 The system supports USB mass storage connected. The audio system memorises these smartphone. devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players lists, which will subsequently load faster if they Control is from the portable device or by using via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not have not been changed. the system's touch buttons. supplied. Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Once connected in Streaming mode, the Devices are managed using the audio system smartphone is considered to be a media controls. Depending on equipment source. Other devices, not recognised on connection, Connect a portable device (MP3 player, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an ® a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth audio cable (not supplied). Connecting Apple players streaming, if compatible. This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Connect the Apple® player to the USB socket To protect the system, do not use a USB has been selected in the audio settings. using a suitable cable (not supplied). hub. First adjust the volume on the portable device Play starts automatically. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the Control is via the audio system. The audio system will only play audio files with audio system. ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file Controls are managed via the portable device. The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists/ extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and Selecting the source albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ 320 Kbps. podcasts). It is also possible to use a It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. Press Radio Media to display the main classification structured in the form of a No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. page. library. All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. Press the "SOURCES" button. The default classification used is by artist. To The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and Select the source. modify the classification used, return to the 48 KHz. BluetoothStreaming® first level of the menu then select the desired To avoid reading and display problems, we classification (playlists for example) and recommend choosing file names less than 20 Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed confirm to go down through the menu to the characters long that do not contain any special from your smartphone. desired track. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). The Bluetooth profile must be activated. Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format First adjust the volume on the portable device The version of software in the audio system may (File Allocation Table). (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the not be compatible with the generation of the We recommend using the original USB system. Apple® player. cable for the portable device.
193 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Telephone The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires a Once the connection is established, a page is If the smartphone has already connected compatible smartphone and compatible displayed, showing the applications already by Bluetooth®. USB sockets applications. downloaded to the smartphone that are Connect the USB cable. The smartphone TM Depending on equipment, for more information compatible with MirrorLink technology. charges when connected by the USB on the USB sockets compatible with the Access to the different audio sources remains cable. Telephone not connected by TM ® TM available in the margin of the MirrorLink From the system, press "Telephone" to CarPlay , MirrorLink or Android Auto Bluetooth® applications, refer to the "Ease of use and display, using the touch buttons located in the display the main page. When connecting a smartphone to the comfort" section. upper bar. Press the "PHONE" button to go to the system, we recommend enabling Access to the menus for the system is possible secondary page. ® The synchronisation of a smartphone Bluetooth on the smartphone. at any time using the dedicated buttons. Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® allows users to display applications Connect a USB cable. The smartphone interface. adapted to the CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM or charges when connected by a USB cable. There may be a pause before Android Auto technology of the smartphone From the system, press "Telephone" to applications become available, When the USB cable is disconnected on the vehicle screen. For the CarPlay® display the main page. depending on the quality of the network. and the ignition is switched off then back technology, the CarPlay® function must be Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the on, the system will not automatically switch to activated on the smartphone beforehand. application in the system. CarPlay® smartphone Radio Media mode; the source must be For the communication process between Depending on the smartphone, it may be changed manually. the smartphone and the system to work, it is necessary to activate the " TM" connection MirrorLink The CarPlay® navigation can be accessed essential in all cases that the smartphone is function. Depending on country. at any time by pressing the system's unlocked. During the procedure, several screen On connecting the USB cable, the Navigation button. As the principles and standards are pages relating to certain features are CarPlay® function deactivates the constantly changing, it is recommended displayed. system's Bluetooth® mode. Android Auto smartphone that you keep the smartphone's operating Accept to start and complete the connection. The "CarPlay" function requires the use of system up-to-date, as well as the date and connection ® a compatible smartphone and compatible time of the smartphone and of the system. Telephone connected by Bluetooth Depending on country. applications. For the list of eligible smartphones, go to the Connect a USB cable. The smartphone On the smartphone, download the Brand's national website. charges when connected by a USB cable. Connect the USB cable. The smartphone Android Auto application. From the system, press " " to Telephone charges when connected by the USB The "Android Auto" function requires the display the main page. TM cable. use of a compatible smartphone and MirrorLink smartphone Press the " " button to display the PHONE From the system, press Telephone to applications. connection secondary page. display the CarPlay® interface. Depending on country. Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the Or application in the system.
194 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
If the smartphone has already connected Telephone not connected by There may be a pause before by Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® applications become available, 10 Connect the USB cable. The smartphone Connect a USB cable. The smartphone depending on the quality of the network. charges when connected by the USB charges when connected by a USB cable. cable. From the system, press "Telephone" to Pairing a Bluetooth® From the system, press "Telephone" to display the main page. display the main page. Press "Android Auto" to start the telephone Press the "PHONE" button to go to the application in the system. The services available depend on the secondary page. Depending on the smartphone, it may be ® network, the SIM card and the Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay necessary to activate the " " Android Auto compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. interface. function. Consult the telephone user guide and the During the procedure, several screen When the USB cable is disconnected service provider to check which services are pages relating to certain features are and the ignition is switched off then back available. on, the system will not automatically switch to displayed. Radio Media mode; the source must be Accept to start and complete the connection. The Bluetooth function must be activated changed manually. When connecting a smartphone to the and the telephone configured as "Visible system, we recommend enabling ® to all” (in the telphone settings). The CarPlay navigation can be accessed Bluetooth® on the smartphone. at any time by pressing the system's To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is button. Telephone connected by Bluetooth® Navigation used (from the telephone or from the system), From the system, press "Telephone" to ensure that the code is the same in the system Android Auto smartphone display the main page. and in the telephone. connection Press the "PHONE" button to display the secondary page. If the pairing procedure fails, we Depending on country. Press " " to start the recommend deactivating and then On the smartphone, download the Android Auto application in the system. reactivating the Bluetooth function on the Android Auto application. Access to the different audio sources remains telephone. The "Android Auto" function requires the available in the margin of the Android Auto use of a compatible smartphone and display, using the touch buttons located in the Procedure from the telephone applications. upper bar. Select the name of the system in the list Access to the menus for the system is possible of detected devices. at any time using the dedicated buttons.
195 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
In the system, accept the connection request The profiles compatible with the system Press the "PHONE" button to access the Making a call from the telephone. are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, secondary page. MAP and PAN. Press "Bluetooth connection" to Using the telephone is not recommended Procedure from the system display the list of paired devices. while driving. Press Telephone to display the main Visit the Brand's website for more information Press on the name of the telephone Parking the vehicle. page. (compatibility, additional help, etc.). selected in the list to disconnect it. Make the call using the steering mounted Press "Bluetooth search". Press again to connect it. controls. Automatic reconnection The list of detected telephones is On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone Deleting a telephone displayed. Calling a new number Select the name of the chosen telephone connected is present again, it is automatically Press the basket at the top right of the Press to display the main in the list. recognised and within about 30 seconds screen to display a basket alongside the Telephone page. after switching on the ignition, the pairing is telephone chosen. Enter the phone number using the digital Connection sharing established automatically (Bluetooth activated). Press the basket alongside the telephone keypad. The system offers to connect the telephone with To modify the connection profile: chosen to delete it. Press " 3 profiles: Press Telephone to display the main Call" to start the call. – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), page. Receiving a call Press the " " button to access the – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of PHONE An incoming call is announced by a ring and a secondary page. Calling a contact audio files on the telephone), superimposed display in the screen. Press " Press to display the main – "Mobile internet data". Bluetooth connection" to Make a short press on the steering Telephone display the list of paired devices. page. Select one or more profiles. mounted PHONE button to accept an Press the "Details" button for a paired Or press and hold incoming call. device. Press "OK" to confirm. And Select one or more profiles. the steering mounted button. Make a long press PHONE Depending on the type of telephone, you may by Press "OK" to confirm. Press "Contacts". prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and on the steering mounted PHONE button Select the desired contact from the displayed list. messages. to reject the call. Press " ". Or Call The ability of the system to connect just Managing paired telephones Press "End call". one profile depends on the telephone. This function lets you connect or disconnect a All three profiles may connect by default. device or delete a pairing. Calling a recently used Press Telephone to display the main number page. Press Telephone to display the main page.
196 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Making a call Or Press this button to enter a name for the Press and hold profile using the virtual keypad. 10 Using the telephone is not recommended Press "OK" to save. while driving. the steering mounted button. Parking the vehicle. Press the back arrow to confirm. Make the call using the steering mounted Press "Recent calls". controls. Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press this button to activate the profile. It is always possible to make a call Press the back arrow again to confirm. Calling a new number directly from the telephone; as a safety Press to display the main measure, first park the vehicle. Telephone Press this button to reset the selected page. profile. Enter the phone number using the digital Setting the ringtone keypad. Adjusting the brightness Press "Call" to start the call. Press Telephone to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Calling a contact secondary page. Press Brightness. Press "Ring volume" to display the Press Telephone to display the main volume bar. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of page. Press the arrows or move the slider to set the screen and/or the instrument panel Or press and hold the ring volume. (depending on version). Press in the shaded area to confirm. the steering mounted PHONE button. Settings Press "Contacts". Modifying system settings Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Configuring profiles Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Call". Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Configuration" to access the Calling a recently used Press "Profiles". secondary page. Press "System configuration". number Select "Profile 1", "Profile 2", "Profile 3” or Press Telephone to display the main "Common profile". Press the "Units" tab to change the units of page. distance, fuel consumption and temperature.
197 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Press the "Factory settings" tab to restore the Press the back arrow to confirm. Press this button to set the time zone. Time and date setting is only available if initial settings. "GPS Synchronisation:" is deactivated. Press "Animation". Select the display format for the time Returning the system to factory settings Activate or deactivate: “Automatic (12h/24h). activates the English language by default scrolling”. Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 (depending on version). Frequently asked Select "Animated transitions". hour). Press the "System info" tab to display the Activate or deactivate GPS questions versions of the various modules installed in the Press the back arrow to confirm. synchronisation (UTC). The following information groups together the system. Press the back arrow to save the settings. answers to the most frequently asked questions Press the "Privacy" tab, concerning the system. Selecting the language or The system may not automatically Press to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. Settings manage the change between winter and Radio summer time (depending on the country of The reception quality of the tuned radio Press " " to access the Press "Privacy" to activate or deactivate Configuration sale). station gradually deteriorates or the station the private data mode. secondary page. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz Activate or deactivate: Select "Language" to change the is displayed, etc.). language. Setting the date The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press the back arrow to confirm. Press Settings to display the main page. transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the – "Only data sharing” geographical area. – "Data and vehicle position sharing" Press "Configuration" to access the ► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar Press the back arrow to confirm. Setting the time secondary page. to enable the system to check whether there is Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Date and time". a more powerful transmitter in the geographical Press Settings to display the main page. area. Press "Configuration" to access the Select "Date". The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, Press "Configuration" to access the secondary page. Press this button to set the date. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, secondary page. Press "Date and time". including in RDS mode. Press "Screen configuration". Press the back arrow to save the date. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is Select "Time". not indicative of an audio system malfunction. Press "Brightness". Press this button to set the time using the Select the display format for the date. The aerial is missing or has been damaged Move the slider to adjust the brightness of virtual keypad. (for example while entering a car wash or the screen and/or the instrument panel Press "OK" to save the time. Press the back arrow again to confirm. underground car park). (depending on version). ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
198 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Time and date setting is only available if I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The connected device does not automatically "GPS Synchronisation:" is deactivated. received stations. launch playback. 10 The name of the radio station changes. ► Start playback from the device. The station is no longer received or its name has Track names and playing times are not Frequently asked changed in the list. displayed on the audio streaming screen. ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer questions "Radio" page. of this information. The following information groups together the Some radio stations send other information answers to the most frequently asked questions in place of their name (the title of the song for Telephone concerning the system. example). I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The system interprets these details as the station The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Radio name. switched off or the device may not be visible. The reception quality of the tuned radio ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth station gradually deteriorates or the station "Radio" page. switched on. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz ► Check in the telephone settings that it is is displayed, etc.). Media "visible to all". The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s Playback of my USB memory stick starts only The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). the system. geographical area. Some files supplied with the memory stick may ► Check the compatibility of the telephone on ► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar greatly slow down access to reading the memory the Brand's website (services). to enable the system to check whether there is stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. a more powerful transmitter in the geographical time). Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the area. ► Delete the files supplied with the memory USB cables are of poor quality. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the ► Use genuine USB cables to ensure basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, file structure on the memory stick. compatibility. including in RDS mode. Some characters in information about the Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is currently playing media are not displayed Android Auto and CarPlay are not available in all not indicative of an audio system malfunction. correctly. countries. The aerial is missing or has been damaged The audio system is unable to process certain ► Check the Google Android Auto or Apple (for example while entering a car wash or types of character. website to see which countries are supported. underground car park). ► Use standard characters to name tracks and The volume of the telephone connected in ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. folders. Bluetooth mode is inaudible. Playback of streaming files does not start.
199 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
The volume depends on both the system and the ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution telephone. setting to obtain the desired sound quality. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to There is a difference in sound quality maximum if required, and increase the volume of between audio sources. the telephone if necessary. To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound Ambient noise affects the quality of the settings can be tailored to different audio telephone call. sources, which can generate audible differences ► Reduce ambient noise (close windows, turn when changing source. down ventilation, slow down, etc.). ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate The contacts are not listed in alphabetical to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound order. functions to the middle position. Some telephones offer display options. When the engine is off, the system switches Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can off after several minutes of use. be transferred in a specific order. When the engine is switched off, the system's ► Modify the telephone directory display operating time depends on the state of charge of settings. the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system Settings automatically goes into energy economy mode When the treble and bass settings are and switches off to maintain an adequate charge changed, the ambience is deselected. in the battery. When the ambience is changed, the treble ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the and bass settings are reset. charge of the battery. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and bass settings, and vice versa. ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. When the balance settings are changed, the distribution is deselected. When the distribution setting is changed, the balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the balance settings, and vice versa.
200 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
PEUGEOT Connect Nav applications interrupt their display while the Use the menu buttons on either side of or below
vehicle is moving). the touch screen for access to the menus, then 11 – Watching a video (the video stops when the press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. vehicle starts to move again). Depending on the model, use the "Source" or – Changing the system settings and "Menu" buttons to access the rolling menus, then configuration. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Display the rolling menus at any time by pressing The system is protected so that it only the screen briefly with three fingers. operates in the vehicle. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. The message Energy Economy Mode is Press the back arrow to go back a level. displayed when the system is about to enter Press "OK" to confirm.
the corresponding mode. The touch screen is of the "capacitive" GPS navigation - type. System and map updates can be To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive Applications - Multimedia downloaded from the Brand’s website. cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional audio system - Bluetooth® The update procedure is also available on the product. website. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. telephone Do not touch the screen with wet hands. The functions and settings described The system’s Open Source Software Certain information is displayed permanently vary according to the vehicle version and (OSS) source codes are available at the in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch configuration, as well as the country of sale. following addresses: screen (depending on equipment): https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ – Air conditioning status information (depending https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ For safety reasons and because they on version), and direct access to the require sustained attention by the driver, corresponding menu. the following operations must be carried out – Go directly to the audio source selection with the vehicle stationary and the ignition First steps option, to view the list of radio stations (or list of on: With the engine running, a press mutes titles depending on the source). – Pairing the smartphone with the system via the sound. – Go to the "Notifications" of messages, emails, Bluetooth. With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. map updates and, depending on the services, – Using the smartphone. Increase or decrease the volume using the navigation notifications. ® TM – Connection to the CarPlay , MirrorLink the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons – Go to the settings for the touch screen and the or Android Auto applications (certain (depending on the equipment). digital instrument panel.
201 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Audio source selection (depending on enter standby mode (with the screen and Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, Applications equipment): sound off) for 5 minutes or more. end call; when no call is in progress, access – FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on The system will resume normal operation telephone menu. equipment). when the temperature in the passenger Radio (rotate): automatic search for the – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and compartment has dropped. previous / next station. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Media (rotate): previous / next track, move in a – USB memory stick. list. – Media player connected via the auxiliary Steering mounted controls Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing socket (depending on equipment). selected, access to presets. Voice control: – Video (depending on equipment). Radio: display the list of stations. This control is located on the steering Media: display the list of tracks.
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk Radio (press and hold): update the list of (depending on equipment). stations received. Run certain applications from the Short press, system voice control. smartphone connected via CarPlay®, Long press, voice control for smartphone or MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto. CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM (availability depending on Menus Check the status of the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi country), Android Auto via the system. connections. Increase volume. Connected navigation Radio Media Decrease volume. Mute by pressing the volume increase In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to and decrease buttons simultaneously FM 87.5 MHz create a profile for an individual or for a (depending on equipment). group of people with shared interests, and Restore the sound by pressing one of the two configure a wide range of settings (radio volume buttons. presets, audio settings, navigation history, Media (short press): change the favourite contacts, etc.). Settings are applied multimedia source. automatically. Telephone (short press): start telephone call.
Call in progress (short press): access Enter navigation settings and choose a In very hot conditions, the volume may Select an audio source or radio station, or telephone menu. destination. be limited to protect the system. It may Use real-time services, depending on equipment. display photographs.
202 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Applications Telephone Vehicle 11
Run certain applications from the Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, read Activate, deactivate or configure certain smartphone connected via CarPlay®, messages and emails and send quick vehicle functions. MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto. messages. Check the status of the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi Air conditioning connections. Settings
Radio Media
18,5 21,5 FM 87.5 MHz
Manage various temperature and air flow Configure a personal profile and/or settings.
configure the sound (balance, ambience, Select an audio source or radio station, or etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, display photographs. etc.).
203 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Voice commands Example of a "voice command" for the radio and step. There's more information available in media: "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to "Play artist Madonna" "expert" when you feel comfortable. Steering wheel-mounted Example of a "voice command" for the controls telephone: Global voice commands Voice commands: "Call David Miller" Voice commands Voice commands can be issued from any The voice commands, with a choice of 17 screen page after a short press on the "Voice languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech, Set dialogue mode as novice - expert commands" button located on the steering Select user 1 / Select profile John Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, Increase temperature wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, A number of commands are available when a Decrease temperature (depending on equipment), as long as there is no Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, menu is selected.
telephone call in progress. Turkish), are made using the language Help messages To ensure that voice commands are previously chosen and set in the system. There are lots of topics I can help you with. always recognised by the system, please For some voice commands, there are You can say: "help with phone", "help with follow these recommendations: alternative synonyms. navigation", "help with media" or "help with – Example: Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / ... use natural language in a normal tone radio". For an overview on how to use voice The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate without breaking up words or raising your controls, you can say "help with voice controls". to address" and "Display POI in the city", are voice. Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" – always wait for the "beep" (audible signal) not available. and we'll start that again. before speaking.
– for best results, closing the windows and Information - Using the "Navigation" voice sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous Press the Push To Talk button and tell me interference (depending on version). system what you'd like after the tone. Remember commands – before issuing a voice command, ask any When voice commands are activated, by you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this Voice commands other passengers to refrain from speaking. briefly pressing the button, help is button. If you press it again while I'm waiting for displayed on the touch screen, offering various you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you Navigate home menus and enabling voice-based interaction with need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to Navigate to work First steps the system. undo something, say "undo". And to get Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club
Example of a "voice command" for information and tips at any time, just say "help". Navigate to contact, John Miller navigation: If you ask to me do something and there's some Navigate to address 11 regent street, London "Navigate to address 11 regent street, information missing that I need, I'll give you Help messages London" some examples or take you through it step by
204 PEUGEOT Connect Nav step. There's more information available in To plan a route, say "navigate to" followed by the distance" or "arrival time". To learn more "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to address, the contact name or an intersection. For commands, try saying "help with navigation". 11 "expert" when you feel comfortable. example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, Voice commands London", "navigate to contact, John Miller", Global voice commands or "navigate to intersection of Regent Street, Show POI ''hotel'' at the destination Voice commands London". You can specify if it's a preferred Show nearby POI petrol station address, or a Point of Interest. For example, say Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London Set dialogue mode as novice - expert "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", or Navigate to POI petrol station along the route Select user 1 / Select profile John "navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London". Help messages Increase temperature Or, you can just say, "navigate home". To see Decrease temperature Points of Interest on a map, you can say things To see points of interest on a map, you can Help messages like "show POI hotels in Banbury". For more say things like "show hotels in Banbury", "show information say "help with points of interest" or nearby parking", "show hotel at the destination" There are lots of topics I can help you with. "help with route guidance". or "show petrol station along the route". If you You can say: "help with phone", "help with To choose a destination, say something like prefer to navigate directly to a point of interest, navigation", "help with media" or "help with "navigate to line three" or "select line two". If you you can say "navigate to nearby petrol station". radio". For an overview on how to use voice can't find the destination but the street's right, If you feel you are not being well understood, controls, you can say "help with voice controls". say for example "select the street in line three". try to say the word "POI" in front of the point Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" To move around a displayed list, you can say of interest. For example say "navigate to POI and we'll start that again. "next page" or "previous page". You can undo restaurant at the destination". your last action and start over by saying "undo", To choose a POI, say something like "select "Navigation" voice or say "cancel" to cancel the current action. line 2". If you've searched for a Point of Interest commands Voice commands and don't see the one you're after, you can filter further by saying something like "select POI in Voice commands Tell me the remaining distance line 2", or "select the city in line 3". You can also Tell me the remaining time scroll through the list by saying "next page" or Navigate home Tell me the arrival time "previous page". Navigate to work Stop route guidance Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club Depending on the country, give Help messages Navigate to contact, John Miller destination (address) instructions in the language configured for the system. Navigate to address 11 regent street, London You can say "stop" or "resume route guidance".
Help messages To get information about your current route, you can say "tell me the remaining time", "remaining
205 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
"Radio Media" voice Voice commands Media voice commands are available David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of only with a USB connection. calls, say "display calls". For more information on commands What's playing? SMS, you can say "help with texting". Voice commands Help messages To choose a contact, say something like "select "Telephone" voice line three". To move around the list say "next Turn on source radio - Streaming Bluetooth To choose what you'd like to play, start by saying commands page" or "previous page". You can undo your last - … "play" and then the item. For example, say "play action and start over by saying "undo", or say Help messages song Hey Jude", "play line 3" or "select line 2". If there is no telephone connected by "cancel" to cancel the current action. You can undo your last action and start over Bluetooth, a voice message announces: You can select an audio source by saying "turn by saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the "Please first connect a telephone", and the "Text message" voice on source" followed by the device name. For current action. voice session is closed. commands example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", Voice commands Voice commands or "turn on source, radio". Use the command If there is no telephone connected by "play" to specify the type of music you'd like to Play song Hey Jude Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Call David Miller* hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", Play artist Madonna "Please first connect a telephone", and the Call voicemail* or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Play album Thriller voice session is closed. Display calls* Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play Help messages album, Thriller". Help messages The "Text messages" voice commands Voice commands I'm not sure what you'd like to play. Please say To make a phone call, say "call" followed by function allows you to dictate and send "play" and then a song title, an album title, or the contact name, for example: "Call David an SMS. Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 an artist name. For example, say "play song Miller". You can also include the phone type, for Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Tune to 98.5 FM Hey Jude", "play artist Madonna" or "play example: "Call David Miller at home". To make between each word. Tune to preset number five album Thriller". To select a line number from the a call by number, say "dial" followed by the When you have finished, the voice recognition Help messages display, say "select line two". To move around phone number, for example, "Dial 107776 835 system will automatically generate an SMS. a displayed list, you can say "next page" or 417". You can check your voicemail by saying You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" "previous page". You can undo your last action Voice commands "call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick and the station name or frequency. For example and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" message to", followed by the contact, and then "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 to cancel the current action. Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late the name of the quick message you'd like to FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for Help messages send. For example, "send quick message to example "tune to preset number five".
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding * This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed. download has been performed.
206 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of From the list of quick messages, say the name of Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the phone menu calls, say "display calls". For more information on the one you'd like to send. To move around the for the names of the supported messages. 11 SMS, you can say "help with texting". list you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next The system only sends pre-recorded To choose a contact, say something like "select page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "Quick messages". line three". To move around the list say "next action and start over by saying "undo", or say page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "cancel" to cancel the current action. action and start over by saying "undo", or say Voice commands "cancel" to cancel the current action. Navigation Send SMS to John Miller, I'm just arriving "Text message" voice Send SMS to David Miller at the office, don't Choice of a destination commands wait for me Help messages To a new destination If there is no telephone connected by Intuitive method: Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Please say "call" or "send quick message to", Press Navigation to display the main "Please first connect a telephone", and the and then select a line from the list. To move page. voice session is closed. around a list shown on the display, you can Press "Search…". say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or The "Text messages" voice commands "previous page". You can undo your last action Enter an address or the key words for the function allows you to dictate and send and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" destination. an SMS. to cancel the current action. Press "OK" to select the "Guidance Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Voice commands criteria". between each word. Or When you have finished, the voice recognition Listen to most recent message* Guided method: system will automatically generate an SMS. Help messages In order to be able to use the navigation, Voice commands To hear your last message, you can say "listen to you must enter the "City", the "Street" most recent message". When you want to send (suggestions are displayed automatically Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for when you begin typing), then enter the Help messages you to use. Just use the quick message name "Number" using the virtual keypad, or select and say something like "send quick message to
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed.
207 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
an address from the "Contact" list or the To a recent destination To a contact address "History". Press Navigation to display the main Press Navigation to display the main page. page. If you do not confirm the number, the Press the "MENU" button to access the Press the "MENU" button to access the navigation system will show one end of secondary page. secondary page. the street. Select "My destinations". Select "My destinations". Press the "MENU" button to access the Select the "Recent” tab. Select the "Contact” tab. secondary page. Select the address chosen in the list to display Select a contact in the list to start guided Select "Enter address". the "Guidance criteria”. navigation. Press "OK" to start guided navigation. Then To points of interest (POI) Select the "Country". Guided method: Select "Position" to see the point of Points of interest (POI) are listed in different Select the keyboard “language”. arrival on the map. categories. Press to display the main Change the keyboard "type" according to Navigation page. the selected "language": ABCDE; To "Home" or "My work" Press the " " button to access the AZERTY; QWERTY or QWERTZ. Press Navigation to display the main MENU secondary page. Enter the "City", the "Street" and the page. Select "Points of interest". "Number", and confirm by pressing on Press the "MENU" button to access the the displayed suggestions. secondary page. Select the "Travel", "leisure", Press "OK" to select the "Guidance Select "My destinations". "Commercial", "Public" or "Geographic” criteria". tab. And/or Select the "Preferred” tab. Or Select "See on map" to choose the Select "Home". Select "Search" to enter the name and "Guidance criteria". address of a POI. Press "OK" to start guided navigation. Or Select "My work". Press "OK" to calculate the route.
Zoom in/out using the touch buttons or Or Or with two fingers on the screen. Select a preset favourite destination. Intuitive method:
208 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
You can only select this method of To a point on the map A marker is displayed in the middle of the using the service if a network connection screen, with the "Latitude" and 11 Press Navigation to display the main is active; this may be either a "network " " coordinates. page. Longitude connection provided by the vehicle", if you Choose the type of coordinates: Explore the map by sliding a finger on the use the Peugeot Connect Packs solution, or DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds. screen. else a "network connection provided by the DD for: Degrees, Decimals. Select the destination by pressing on the map. user" via a smartphone, Press this button to start guided Tap the screen to place a marker and In both cases, the system is automatically navigation. display the sub-menu. connected to the Internet, if network coverage Or Press this button to start guided permits. Press this button to save the displayed navigation. address. Or Press Navigation to display the main OR Press this button to save the displayed page. Press this button to enter the " " address. Latitude Press the "MENU" button to access the value using the virtual keypad. secondary page. A long press on a point opens a list of And Select "Search". nearby POIs. Press this button to enter the "Longitude" value using the virtual keypad. Press on the mode shown in the bottom right of the screen (On-Board or Connected) to change To GPS coordinates TMC (Traffic Message the "Database". Press Navigation to display the main Select the "Database" in "On-Board" page. Channel) mode (integrated into the map), or in Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Available in some countries. "Connected" mode (connected to the Internet). screen. TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages Press the back arrow to confirm. Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next are based on a European standard for traffic image. information broadcasting via the RDS system on Enter an address or the key words for the Press this button to display the world FM radio, sending traffic information in real time. destination (POI). map. The TMC information is then displayed on a GPS Press "OK" to start the search. Using the grid, select the desired country or Navigation system map and taken into account region by zooming. straight away when routes are calculated, to Select the "On the route", "Around the Press this button to display or enter the avoid accidents, traffic jams and closed roads. vehicle" or "At destination" tab to refine GPS coordinates. Danger zone alerts may or may not be your search. displayed, depending on the applicable Select the desired address to calculate the route.
209 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
legislation and subscription to the update the smartphone operating system Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or Press "Private mode". corresponding service. as well as the date and time on the "Stored” tab. smartphone and system, to ensure that the Select a network. THEN communication process between the Activate or deactivate: Connected navigation smartphone and the system functions Using the virtual keypad, enter the Wi-Fi correctly. network "Key” and "Password". – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press "OK" to establish a connection – “Only data sharing" Connected navigation USB connection between the smartphone and the – "Sharing data and vehicle position" connection Connect the USB cable. vehicle’s system. The smartphone charges when Depending on version, vehicle trim level and Settings specific to connected by the USB cable. Usage restrictions: subscription to online services and options. ® Bluetooth connection – With CarPlay , connection sharing is connected navigation Network connection provided by the Activate the Bluetooth function on the only available with a Wi-Fi connection. Press Navigation to display the main – With MirrorLinkTM, connection sharing is page. vehicle telephone and ensure that it is visible to all (see the "Connect-App" section). only available with a USB connection. Press the "MENU" button to access the With the Peugeot Connect Packs Wi-Fi connection The quality of services depends on the quality secondary page. solution, the system is automatically Select a Wi-Fi network detected by the of the network connection. Select "Settings". connected to the Internet and connected system and connect to it. services, and does not require the user to Select the "Map” tab. provide a connection via their smartphone. This function is only available if it has Authorize sending OR been activated either via the information Activate or deactivate: "Notifications" or via the "Applications" menu. – "Allow declaration of danger zones". Network connection provided by the Press Settings to display the main page. – "Guidance to final destination on foot". Press "Notifications". user These settings must be configured for each Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
profile. Select Wi-Fi to activate it. secondary page. Select "System configuration". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. For the list of suitable smartphones, visit OR Select the "Alerts” tab. the Brand's national website. Press Connect-App to display the main Select the "Private mode” tab. page. Activate or deactivate: Activate and enter settings for sharing the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the OR smartphone connection. secondary page. Press "Notifications". – "Advise of car park nearby". Select "Wi-Fi network connection". As processes and standards are – "Filling station alert". constantly changing, we recommend you
210 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "Private mode". – “Risk areas alert" then press the warning icon Declaration: "Risk areas (triangle) to configure the alerts. 11 THEN – "Give an audible warning". alert" Activate or deactivate: – "Advise proximity of POI 1". To send information about danger zones, – "Advise proximity of POI 2". select the option:Allow declaration of – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. danger zones – “Only data sharing" – "Sharing data and vehicle position" Press Navigation to display the main The "Notifications", located in the upper page. bar, can be accessed at any time. Settings specific to Press the "Declare a new danger zone" connected navigation button located in the side bars or the Danger zone alerts may or may not be upper bar of the touch screen (depending on Press Navigation to display the main displayed, depending on the applicable equipment). page. legislation and subscription to the Select the "Type” option to select the type Press the "MENU" button to access the corresponding service. of "Danger area". secondary page. Select the ""Speed" option and enter it Select "Settings". When "TOMTOM TRAFFIC” appears, the using the virtual keypad. services are available. Press "OK" to save and send the Select the "Map” tab. The services offered with connected information. navigation are as follows. Activate or deactivate: A Connected Services pack: Displaying fuel information – "Allow declaration of danger zones". – Weather, Press Navigation to display the main – "Guidance to final destination on foot". – Filling stations, page. These settings must be configured for each – Car park, Press this button to display the list of profile. – Traffic, services. Press “OK” to confirm your selection. – POI local search. Press "POI on map" to display the list A Danger area pack (optional). of points of interest. Select the "Alerts” tab. Press one of the buttons to search for " ". Activate or deactivate: Stations Activate/deactivate "Stations". – "Advise of car park nearby". Press this button to display a secondary – "Filling station alert". page.
211 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select the "Settings” tab. Press this button to display the list of CarPlay® function must first be activated on Press "Telephone" to display the services. the smartphone. CarPlay® interface. Select the desired fuel. Select "View map". In all cases, the smartphone must be Or unlocked, to enable the communication Connect the USB cable. The smartphone Press "OK" to save. Select "Weather". process between the smartphone and the charges when connected by the USB system to function. cable. Press this button to display basic As principles and standards are constantly From the system, press "Applications" to Displaying charging station information. changing, we recommend keeping the display the main page. details Press this button to display detailed smartphone's operating system up-to- Press "Connectivity" to access the "CarPlay®” weather information. date, together with the date and time on function. Press Navigation to display the main the smartphone and the system. Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® page. The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will interface. Press this button to display the list of be the maximum temperature for the day. services. The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will be Connectivity When the USB cable is disconnected Press "POI on map" to display the list the minimum temperature for the night. Press Applications to display the main and the ignition is switched off then back of points of interest. page. on, the system will not automatically switch to Press one of the buttons to search for Press "Connectivity" to access the CarPlay®, Radio Media mode; the source must be "Stations". Applications MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions. changed manually. Activate/deactivate "Stations". USB ports ® CarPlay smartphone TM Press this button to display a secondary Depending on equipment, for more information MirrorLink smartphone ® connection page. on the USB ports compatible with CarPlay , connection TM Depending on country. Select the "Settings” tab. MirrorLink or Android Auto applications, refer Depending on country. to the "Ease of use and comfort" section. On connecting the USB cable, the The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires the Select the desired connector type. CarPlay® function deactivates the For the list of suitable smartphones, visit use of a compatible smartphone and system's Bluetooth® mode. the Brand's national website. compatible applications. Press "OK" to save. The " " function requires the use of CarPlay You can check that your telephone is a compatible smartphone and compatible Synchronising a smartphone enables compatible on the Brand's website (services). applications. users to display applications that support Displaying weather When connecting a smartphone to the the smartphone’s MirrorLinkCarPlay®, TM or Connect the USB cable. The smartphone information system, we recommend enabling Android Auto technology on the vehicle’s charges when connected by the USB ® Press Navigation to display the main ® Bluetooth on the smartphone. screen. For CarPlay technology, the cable. page.
212 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "Telephone" to display the Connect the USB cable. The smartphone Android Auto smartphone CarPlay® interface. charges when connected by the USB 11 Or cable. connection Connect the USB cable. The smartphone From the system, press "Applications" to Depending on country. charges when connected by the USB display the main page. Install the "Android Auto" application on cable. Press "Connectivity" to access the the smartphone via "Google Play". TM From the system, press "Applications" to "MirrorLink ” function. The "Android Auto" function requires the use TM display the main page. Press "MirrorLink " to start the of a compatible smartphone and compatible ® Press "Connectivity" to access the "CarPlay ” application in the system. applications. function. Depending on the smartphone, it may be Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM" Connect the USB cable. The smartphone interface. function. charges when connected by the USB During the procedure, several screen cable. When the USB cable is disconnected pages relating to certain features are From the system, press "Applications" to and the ignition is switched off then back displayed. display the main page. on, the system will not automatically switch to Accept to start and complete the connection. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Android Radio Media mode; the source must be Once the connection is established, a page is Auto” function. changed manually. displayed, showing the applications already Press "Android Auto" to start the downloaded to the smartphone that are application in the system. MirrorLinkTM smartphone compatible with MirrorLinkTM technology. During the procedure, several screen Access to the different audio sources remains pages relating to certain features are connection available in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM displayed. Depending on country. display, using the touch buttons located in the Accept to start and complete the connection. The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires the upper bar. Access to the different audio sources remains use of a compatible smartphone and Access to the menus for the system is possible available in the margin of the Android Auto compatible applications. at any time using the dedicated buttons. display, using the touch buttons located in the upper bar. You can check that your telephone is There may be a pause before Access to the menus for the system is possible compatible on the Brand's website (services). applications become available, at any time using the dedicated buttons. depending on the quality of the network. When connecting a smartphone to the In Android Auto mode, the function that system, we recommend enabling displays rolling menus by briefly pressing Bluetooth® on the smartphone. the screen with three fingers is disabled.
213 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
There may be a pause before service provider to check which services are Select the name of the chosen Select "Wi-Fi network connection". applications become available, available. smartphone in the list. depending on the quality of the network. Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or Depending on the type of smartphone, "Stored” tab. The Bluetooth function must be activated you may by prompted to accept the Select a network. Car Apps and the smartphone configured as transfer of contacts and messages. "Visible to all". Press Applications to display the main Using the virtual keypad , enter the Wi-Fi page. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is Connection sharing network "Key" and "Password". Press " " to display the applications Car Apps used (from the smartphone or from the system), The system offers to connect the smartphone Press "OK" to establish the connection. home page. ensure that the code is the same in the system with 3 profiles: and in the smartphone. Internet Browser – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), The Wi-Fi connection and Wi-Fi If the pairing procedure fails, we – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of connection sharing are exclusive. Press Applications to display the main recommend deactivating and then audio files on the smartphone), page. reactivating the Bluetooth function on the – "Mobile internet data". Press "Connectivity" to access the "Connected smartphone. Wi-Fi connection sharing ” function. The "Mobile internet data" profile must Apps Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system. Press "Connected Apps" to display the browser be activated for connected navigation (if Press Connect-App to display the main home page. the vehicle does not have "Emergency and Procedure from the smartphone page. Select the country of residence. assistance call" services), after first activating Select the name of the system in the list Press the " " button to access the smartphone connection sharing. OPTIONS of detected devices. secondary page. Press "OK" to save and start the browser. In the system, accept the connection request Select one or more profiles. Select "Share Wi-Fi connection". from the smartphone. Connection to the internet is via one of Press "OK" to confirm. Select the "Activation" tab to activate or Procedure from the system the network connections provided by the deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing. vehicle or the user. Press Connect-App to display the main And/or page. Wi-Fi connection Select the "Settings" tab to change the system’s Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the ® Network connection via the smartphone's Wi-Fi. network name and password. secondary page. Bluetooth connection Press Connect-App to display the main Press "OK" to confirm. Press "Bluetooth connection". The services available depend on the page. network, the SIM card and the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Search". To protect against unauthorised access compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. secondary page. The list of detected smartphones is and to make all systems as secure as Consult the smartphone user guide and the displayed.
214 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select "Wi-Fi network connection". possible, the use of a security code or a Select "Radio stations" on the secondary complex password is recommended. page. 11 Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or Press "Frequency". "Stored” tab. Enter the values using the virtual keypad. Select a network. Managing connections First enter the units then click on the Press Connect-App to display the main decimals field to enter the figures after the Using the virtual keypad , enter the Wi-Fi page. decimal point. network "Key" and "Password". Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press "OK" to confirm. Press "OK" to establish the connection. secondary page. Select "Manage connection". Radio reception may be affected by the The Wi-Fi connection and Wi-Fi With this function, you can view the access to use of electrical equipment not approved connection sharing are exclusive. connected services, the availability of connected by the Brand, such as a USB charger services and modify the connection mode. connected to the 12 V socket. The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Wi-Fi connection sharing tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system. Radio block reception, including in RDS mode. Press Connect-App to display the main This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the page. Selecting a station context of radio wave transmission, and Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press Radio Media to display the main in no way indicative of an audio system secondary page. page. malfunction. Select "Share Wi-Fi connection". Press "Frequency". Press one of the buttons to perform an Select the "Activation" tab to activate or Presetting a station automatic search for radio stations. deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing. Select a radio station or frequency. Or And/or (refer to the corresponding section) Move the slider to manually search for Select the "Settings" tab to change the system’s Press "Presets". frequencies up or down. network name and password. Make a long press on one of the buttons Or Press "OK" to confirm. to preset the station. Press Radio Media to display the main page. Changing the waveband To protect against unauthorised access Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press to display the main and to make all systems as secure as secondary page. Radio Media page.
215 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
To change the waveband, press "Band…", Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a analogue radio, and in some cases a change displayed at the top right of the screen. secondary page. choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical in volume. Select "Radio settings". order. When the digital signal quality is restored, the Activating/Deactivating RDS Press Radio Media to display the main system automatically changes back to "DAB". RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Select "General". page. listening to the same station by automatic Activate/deactivate "Display radio text". Press “Band …" at the top right of the screen to If the "DAB" station being listened to is retuning to alternative frequencies. display the "DAB" waveband. not available on “FM” (“FM-DAB" option Press Radio Media to display the main Press "OK" to confirm. shaded), or "FM-DAB auto tracking" is not page. FM-DAB tracking activated, the sound will cut out while the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the “DAB" does not cover 100 % of the territory. digital signal is too weak. secondary page. Playing TA messages When the digital radio signal is poor, “FM-DAB Select "Radio settings". The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives auto follow-up" enables you to continue listening priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this to the same station by automatically switching to Media Select "General". function needs good reception of a radio station the corresponding FM analogue station (if there Activate/deactivate "Station follow". that carries this type of message. While traffic is one). information is being broadcast, the current Press Radio Media to display the main USB port Press "OK" to confirm. media is automatically interrupted so that the page. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB TA message can be heard. Normal play of the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the port or connect the USB device to the previously playing media resumes at the end of secondary page. USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). RDS station tracking may not be the message. Select "Radio settings". available nationwide, as many radio To protect the system, do not use a USB Select "Announcements". stations do not cover 100 % of the country. hub. Activate/deactivate "Traffic Select "General". This explains the loss of reception of the announcement". Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". The system builds playlists (in temporary station during a journey. Press "OK" to confirm. memory); this operation can take from a Activate/deactivate "Station follow". few seconds to several minutes at the first Displaying text information connection. The "Radio Text" function displays information DAB (Digital Audio Press "OK". Reduce the number of non-music files and the transmitted by the radio station relating to the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition station or the currently playing song. Broadcasting) radio If “FM-DAB auto tracking" is activated, is switched off or a USB memory stick is Press Radio Media to display the main there may be a time offset of a few connected. The audio system memorises these page. Terrestrial Digital Radio seconds when the system switches to "FM" lists, which will subsequently load faster if they Digital radio provides higher quality sound. have not been changed.
216 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
analogue radio, and in some cases a change Auxiliary socket (AUX) To remove the USB memory stick, press in volume. the pause button to stop the video, then 11 Depending on equipment When the digital signal quality is restored, the remove the memory stick. Connect a portable device (MP3 player, system automatically changes back to "DAB". The system can play video files in the MPEG-4 etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an Part 2, MPEG-2, MPEG-1, H.264, H.263, VP8, audio cable (not supplied). WMV and RealVideo formats. If the "DAB" station being listened to is This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" not available on “FM” (“FM-DAB" option has been selected in the audio settings. ® shaded), or "FM-DAB auto tracking" is not First adjust the volume on the portable device Streaming Bluetooth activated, the sound will cut out while the (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed digital signal is too weak. audio system. from your smartphone. Controls are managed via the portable device. The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First adjust the volume on the portable device (to Media Selecting the source a high level). Then adjust the volume of the audio system. Press Radio Media to display the main If play does not start automatically, it may be page. USB port necessary to start the audio playback from the Select "SOURCES". Insert the USB memory stick into the USB smartphone. Select the source. port or connect the USB device to the Control is from the portable device or by using USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Watching a video the system's touch buttons. To protect the system, do not use a USB Depending on equipment/Depending on version/ Once connected in streaming mode, the hub. Depending on country. smartphone is considered to be a media Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. source. The system builds playlists (in temporary memory); this operation can take from a Video control commands are accessible few seconds to several minutes at the first only through the touch screen. Connecting Apple® players connection. Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using Press Radio Media to display the main Reduce the number of non-music files and the a suitable cable (not supplied). page. number of folders to reduce the waiting time. Play starts automatically. Select "SOURCES". Playlists are updated whenever the ignition Control is via the audio system. is switched off or a USB memory stick is Select Video to start the video. connected. The audio system memorises these The classifications available are those of lists, which will subsequently load faster if they the portable device connected (artists/ have not been changed.
217 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ To avoid reading and display problems, we If the pairing procedure fails, we after first activating smartphone connection podcasts). recommend choosing file names less than 20 recommend deactivating and then sharing. The default classification used is by artist. To characters long that do not contain any special reactivating the Bluetooth function on the modify the classification used, return to the characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). telephone. Select one or more profiles. first level of the menu then select the desired Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format classification (playlists for example) and (File Allocation Table). Press "OK" to confirm. Procedure from the telephone confirm to go down through the menu to the We recommend using the original USB desired track. Select the system name in the list of Depending on the type of telephone, you may by cable for the portable device. detected devices. prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and The version of software in the audio system may In the system, accept the connection request messages. not be compatible with the generation of the from the telephone. The ability of the system to connect just Apple® player. Telephone Procedure from the system one profile depends on the telephone. All three profiles may connect by default. Information and advice Pairing a Bluetooth® Press Telephone to display the main The system supports USB mass storage page. The profiles compatible with the system devices, BlackBerry® devices and Apple® players telephone Press "Bluetooth search". are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not The services available depend on the Or MAP and PAN. supplied. network, the SIM card and the Select " ". Devices are managed using the audio system compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Search Visit the Brand's website for more information The list of detected telephones is controls. Consult the telephone user guide and the (compatibility, additional help, etc.). displayed. Other devices, not recognised on connection, service provider to check which services are Select the name of the chosen telephone must be connected to the auxiliary socket using available. Automatic reconnection in the list. a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone streaming, if compatible. The Bluetooth function must be activated connected is present again, it is automatically The audio system will only play audio files with Connection sharing and the telephone configured as "Visible recognised and within about 30 seconds ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file The system offers to connect the telephone with to all” (in the telphone settings). after switching on the ignition, the pairing is 3 profiles: extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and established automatically (Bluetooth activated). – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), 320 Kbps. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is To modify the connection profile: – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. used (from the telephone or from the system), Press Telephone to display the main audio files on the telephone), No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. ensure that the code is the same in the system page. – "Mobile internet data". All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. and in the telephone. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and The "Mobile internet data" profile must secondary page. 48 KHz. be activated for connected navigation,
218 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
after first activating smartphone connection Select "Bluetooth connection" to display Make a short press on the steering sharing. the list of paired devices. mounted telephone button to accept an 11 Press the "Details" button. incoming call. Select one or more profiles. And Select one or more profiles. Make a long press Press "OK" to confirm. Press "OK" to confirm. on the steering mounted telephone button Depending on the type of telephone, you may by to reject the call. prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and Or messages. Managing paired telephones Select "End call" on the touch screen. The ability of the system to connect just This function lets you connect or disconnect a one profile depends on the telephone. device or delete a pairing. All three profiles may connect by default. Press Telephone to display the main Making a call page. Using the telephone is not recommended Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the The profiles compatible with the system while driving. secondary page. are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, Park the vehicle. Select "Bluetooth connection" to display MAP and PAN. Make the call using the steering mounted the list of paired devices. controls. Visit the Brand's website for more information Press on the name of the telephone (compatibility, additional help, etc.). selected in the list to disconnect it. Press again to connect it. Calling a new number Automatic reconnection Press Telephone to display the main Deleting a telephone On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone page. connected is present again, it is automatically Select the basket at top right of the Enter the phone number using the digital recognised and within about 30 seconds screen to display a basket alongside the keypad. after switching on the ignition, the pairing is telephone chosen. Press "Call" to start the call. established automatically (Bluetooth activated). Press the basket alongside the telephone To modify the connection profile: chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the main Calling a contact page. Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the main Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the An incoming call is announced by a ring and a page. secondary page. superimposed display in the screen.
219 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Or press and hold Press the "Telephone" tab to enter the Access to "Messages" depends on the Select the "Incoming", "Sent" or "Not contact’s telephone number(s). compatibility between the smartphone read” tab. the steering mounted telephone button. Press the "Address" tab to enter the and the onboard system. Select the message chosen in one of the lists. contact’s address(es). Some smartphones retrieve messages or Press " Play" to start playing the Select "Contact". Press the "Email" tab to enter the email messages more slowly than others. message. Select the desired contact from the displayed list. contact’s email address(es). Access to email messages depends on Select "Call". Press "OK" to save. Managing quick messages the compatibility between the smartphone and the onboard system. Press this button to sort contacts by Press Telephone to display the main Calling a recently used Surname+first name or by First page. name+surname. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the number secondary page. Settings Press Telephone to display the main The "Email" function allows email Select "Quick messages" to display the page. addresses to be entered for a contact, list of messages. Audio settings Or but the system is not able to send emails. Select the "Delayed", "My arrival", "Not Press Settings to display the main page. Press and hold available" or "Other" tab, enabling you to create new messages. Managing messages Select "Audio settings". the steering mounted telephone button. Press "Create" to write a new message. Press Telephone to display the main page. Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", Select "Calls". Select the message chosen in one of the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the "Voice" or "Ringtone". Select the desired contact from the displayed list. lists. secondary page. Press "OK" to save the settings. Press "Transfer" to select one or more It is always possible to make a call Select "Messages" to display the list of recipients. directly from the telephone; as a safety messages. Press " Play" to start playing the The balance/distribution (or spatialisation measure, first park the vehicle. Select the "All", "Incoming" or "Sent” message. with the Arkamys© system) uses audio tab. processing to adjust the sound quality Select the details of the message chosen Managing contacts/entries Managing email according to the number of passengers in the in one of the lists. Press Telephone to display the main Press Telephone to display the main vehicle. Press "Answer" to send a quick message page. page. Available only with the front and rear speaker stored in the system. Select "Contact". Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the configuration. Press "Call" to start the call. Select "Create" to add a new contact. secondary page. Select "Email" to display the list of The Ambience setting (choice of 6 Press " Play" to listen to the message. messages. ambiences) and the Bass, Medium and
220 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select the "Incoming", "Sent" or "Not Treble sound settings are different and Press "OK" to accept the transfer of the read” tab. independent for each audio source. photograph. 11 Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Activate or deactivate "Loudness". Press "OK" again to save the settings. Press " Play" to start playing the The "Position” settings (All passengers, message. Driver and Front only) are common to all The location for the photograph is sources. Access to email messages depends on square; the system reshapes the original Activate or deactivate "Touch tones", the compatibility between the photograph if in another format. "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary smartphone and the onboard system. input". Press this button to reset the selected profile. Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© Resetting the selected profile activates Settings optimises the sound distribution inside the English language by default. the passenger compartment. Audio settings Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to link "Audio Press Settings to display the main page. Configuring profiles settings" with it. Select "Audio settings". Select "Audio settings". Press Settings to display the main page. Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", "Voice" or "Ringtone". secondary page. "Voice" or "Ringtone". Press "OK" to save the selected profile’s Select " ". Press "OK" to save the settings. Setting of the profiles settings. Select "Profile 1", "Profile 2", "Profile 3” or Modifying system settings The balance/distribution (or spatialisation "Common profile". © Press Settings to display the main page. with the Arkamys system) uses audio Press this button to enter a name for the processing to adjust the sound quality profile using the virtual keypad. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the according to the number of passengers in the Press "OK" to confirm. vehicle. secondary page. Select "Screen configuration". Available only with the front and rear speaker Press this button to add a photograph to configuration. the profile. Select "Animation". Insert a USB memory stick containing the Activate or deactivate:Automatic The Ambience setting (choice of 6 photograph in the USB port. scrolling ambiences) and the Bass, Medium and Select the photograph.
221 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select "Brightness". Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Activate or deactivate GPS Frequently asked Move the slider to adjust the brightness of secondary page. synchronisation (UTC). the screen and/or the instrument panel. Select "Setting the time-date". Press "OK" to confirm. questions Press Settings to display the main page. The following information groups together the Select "Date". The system may not automatically answers to the most frequently asked questions Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press this button to set the date. manage the change between winter and concerning the system. secondary page. summer time (depending on the country of Select "System settings". Press "OK" to confirm. sale). Navigation I cannot enter the navigation address. Select "Units" to change the units of distance, Select the display format for the date. The address is not recognised. fuel consumption and temperature. Colour schemes ► Use the "intuitive method" by pressing Select "Factory settings" to restore the initial Time and date setting is only available if Depending on equipment/Depending on version. the "Search…" button at the bottom of the settings. "Navigation” page. "GPS synchronisation" is deactivated. As a safety measure, the procedure for The route calculation is not successful. Resetting the system to "Factory changing the colour scheme is only The route settings may conflict with the current settings" activates English and degrees possible when the vehicle is stationary. Fahrenheit and deactivates summer time. Setting the time location (for example, if toll roads are excluded Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. but the vehicle is on a toll road). Select "System info" to display the versions of ► Check the route settings in the "Navigation" the various modules installed in the system. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Color schemes". menu. secondary page. I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts. Selecting the language Select "Setting the time-date". Select a colour scheme in the list then You have not subscribed to the online services Press Settings to display the main page. press "OK" to confirm. option. Select "Time". ► If you have subscribed to the option: Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press this button to set the time using the Whenever the colour scheme is - a few days may elapse before the service is secondary page. virtual keypad. changed, the system restarts, temporarily activated, Select "Languages" to change the Press "OK" to confirm. displaying a black screen. - services may not be selected in the system language. menu, Press this button to set the time zone. - online services are not active ("TOMTOM Setting the date TRAFFIC" not shown on the map). Press Settings to display the main page. Select the display format for the time The POIs do not appear. (12h/24h). The POIs have not been selected. Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 ► Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select hour). POIs in the POI list.
222 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Frequently asked The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is In certain countries, only major routes not working. (motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic 11 questions The audible warning is not active or the volume information. The following information groups together the is too low. This is perfectly normal. The system is answers to the most frequently asked questions ► Activate the audible warning in the dependent on the traffic information available. concerning the system. "Navigation" menu and check the voice volume The altitude is not displayed. in the sound settings. On starting, GPS initialisation may take up to Navigation The system does not suggest a detour 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites I cannot enter the navigation address. around an incident on the route. correctly. The address is not recognised. The route settings do not take account of TMC ► Wait until the system has started up ► Use the "intuitive method" by pressing messages. completely so that there is GPS coverage by at the "Search…" button at the bottom of the ► Configure the "Traffic info " function in least 4 satellites. "Navigation” page. the route settings list (Without, Manual or Depending on the geographical environment The route calculation is not successful. Automatic). (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of The route settings may conflict with the current I receive a warning about a "Danger area" reception of the GPS signal may vary. location (for example, if toll roads are excluded that is not on my route. This behaviour is normal. The system is but the vehicle is on a toll road). As well as providing guided navigation, the dependent on the GPS signal reception ► Check the route settings in the "Navigation" system announces all "Danger areas" positioned conditions. menu. in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may My navigation is no longer connected. I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts. provide an alert for "Danger areas" located on During start-up and in certain geographical You have not subscribed to the online services nearby or parallel roads. areas, the connection may be unavailable. option. ► Zoom the map to show the exact location ► Check that the online services are activated ► If you have subscribed to the option: of the "Danger area". You can select "On the (settings, contract). - a few days may elapse before the service is route" to stop receiving warnings or decrease the activated, warning duration. Radio - services may not be selected in the system Certain traffic jams along the route are not The reception quality of the tuned radio menu, indicated in real time. station gradually deteriorates or the station - online services are not active ("TOMTOM On starting, a few minutes may elapse before presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz TRAFFIC" not shown on the map). the system begins to receive traffic information. is displayed, etc.). The POIs do not appear. ► Wait until traffic information is being received The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s The POIs have not been selected. correctly (traffic information icons shown on the transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the ► Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select map). geographical area. POIs in the POI list.
223 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
► Activate the "" function by means of the ► Delete the files supplied with the memory ► Deactivate then reactivate the telephone’s ► Select "" or "". short-cut menu to enable the system to check stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the Bluetooth function. The contacts are not listed in alphabetical whether there is a more powerful transmitter in file structure on the memory stick. The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with order. the geographical area. There may be an extended pause after the system. Some telephones offer display options. The aerial is missing or has been damaged inserting a USB stick. ► You can check the compatibility of the Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can (for example while entering a car wash or The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, telephone on the Brand's website (services). be transferred in a specific order. underground car park). artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. ► Modify the telephone directory display ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. a few minutes. Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the settings. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This is perfectly normal. USB cables are of poor quality. The system does not receive SMS. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, Some characters in information about the ► Use genuine USB cables to ensure Bluetooth mode does not allow SMS text including in RDS mode. currently playing media may not be displayed compatibility. messages to be sent to the system. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is correctly. Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. not indicative of an audio system malfunction. The audio system is unable to process certain Android Auto and CarPlay are not available in all Settings I cannot find some radio stations in the list of types of character. countries. When the treble and bass settings are stations received. ► Use standard characters to name tracks and ► Check the Google Android Auto or Apple changed, the ambience is deselected. The name of the radio station changes. folders. website to see which countries are supported. When the ambience is changed, the treble The station is no longer received or its name has Playback of streaming files does not start. The volume of the telephone connected in and bass settings are reset. changed in the list. The connected device does not automatically Bluetooth mode is inaudible. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and Some radio stations send other information launch playback. The volume depends on both the system and the bass settings, and vice versa. in place of their name (the title of the song for ► Start playback from the device. telephone. ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience example). Track names and playing times are not ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. The system interprets these details as the station displayed on the audio streaming screen. maximum if required, and increase the volume of When the balance settings are changed, the name. The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer the telephone if necessary. distribution is deselected. ► Press the "Update list" button in the "Radio of this information. Ambient noise affects the quality of the When the distribution setting is changed, the stations” secondary menu. telephone call. balance settings are deselected. Telephone ► Reduce the ambient noise level (close Selecting a distribution setting imposes the Media I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. windows, turn down ventilation, slow down, etc.). balance settings, and vice versa. Playback of my USB memory stick starts only The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Some contacts are duplicated in the list. ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). switched off or the device may not be visible. The options for synchronising contacts are: setting to obtain the desired sound quality. Some files supplied with the memory stick may ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the There is a difference in sound quality greatly slow down access to reading the memory switched on. contacts on the telephone, or both. When both between audio sources. stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing ► Check in the telephone settings that it is synchronisations are selected, some contacts To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound time). "visible to all". may be duplicated. settings can be tailored to different audio
224 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
► Select "" or "". sources, which can generate audible differences The contacts are not listed in alphabetical when changing source. 11 order. ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate Some telephones offer display options. to the sources listened to. We recommend Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can setting the sound functions (Bass:, Treble:, be transferred in a specific order. Balance) to the middle position, setting the ► Modify the telephone directory display musical ambience to "None", setting loudness settings. correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive" The system does not receive SMS. in Radio mode. Bluetooth mode does not allow SMS text ► In all cases, after applying sound settings, messages to be sent to the system. adjust the volume level on the portable device (to a high level) first. Then adjust the volume level Settings on the audio system. When the treble and bass settings are When the engine is off, the system switches changed, the ambience is deselected. off after several minutes of use. When the ambience is changed, the treble When the engine is switched off, the system's and bass settings are reset. operating time depends on the state of charge of Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and the battery. bass settings, and vice versa. The switch-off is normal: the system ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience automatically goes into energy economy mode settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. and switches off to maintain an adequate charge When the balance settings are changed, the in the battery. distribution is deselected. ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the When the distribution setting is changed, the charge of the battery. balance settings are deselected. The date and time cannot be set. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the Setting of the date and time is only available balance settings, and vice versa. if the synchronisation with the satellites is ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution deactivated. setting to obtain the desired sound quality. ► Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting. There is a difference in sound quality Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS between audio sources. synchronisation" (UTC). To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio
225 Alphabetical index
3D digital instrument panel 10 Air conditioning, automatic 46, 48 Boot 35, 54 Air conditioning, manual 46 Brake discs 157 Air intake 48 Brakes 157 Air vents 45 Braking 98 A Alarm 35–36 Braking assistance system 67 ABS 67 Amplifier, audio 51 Braking, automatic emergency 122–124 Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) 141 Android Auto connection 213 Braking, dynamic emergency 90–92 Accessories 64 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 67 Brightness 197 Active Safety Brake 122–124 Antitheft / Immobiliser 29 Bulbs 170 AdBlue® 20, 158 Apple CarPlay connection 194, 212 Bulbs (changing) 169–171 AdBlue® tank 159 Applications 214 Additive, Diesel 156 Assistance call 65 Adjusting headlamps 57 Assistance, emergency braking 67, 124 Adjusting head restraints 40 Audible warning 65 C Adjusting seat 40–41 Audio streaming (Bluetooth) 193, 217 Cable, audio 217 Adjusting the air distribution 46–47 Cable, Jack 217 Adjusting the air flow 46–47 Capacity, fuel tank 138 Adjusting the date 198, 222 Cap, fuel filler 138 Adjusting the height and reach B Care of the bodywork 161 of the steering wheel 42 Battery, 12 V 152, 156, 176–178 Central locking 31–32 Adjusting the lumbar support 41 Battery, ancillaries 176 Changing a bulb 169–171 Adjusting the seat angle 41 Battery, charging 177–178 Changing a fuse 171–172, 174–175 Adjusting the temperature 46–47 Battery, remote control 33–34 Changing a wheel 163, 166 Adjusting the time 198, 222 Blanking screen (snow shield) 151 Changing a wiper blade 61–62 Advanced Grip Control 69 Blind 38 Changing the remote control battery 33 Advice on care and maintenance 140, 160 Blind spot monitoring system, active 121 Charge level indicator 22 Advice on driving 7, 84–85 Blind spot sensors 121 Charger, induction 51 Airbags 72–74, 76 BlueHDi 20, 155, 162 Charger, wireless 51 Airbags, curtain 73–74 Bluetooth (hands-free) 195–196, 218–219 Charging cable 141, 143 Airbags, front 73–74, 77 Bluetooth (telephone) 195–196, 218–219 Charging connector 141, 143, 145–146 Airbags, lateral 73–74 Bodywork 161 CHECK 23 Air conditioning 45, 47–48 Bonnet 152–153 Checking the engine oil level 19
226 Alphabetical index
Checking the levels 154–155 Courtesy lamp, front 53 Drive Assist Plus 111 Checking tyre pressures Courtesy lamps 52–53 Driver’s attention warning 125 (using the kit) 164–165 Cruise control 106, 109–110 Driving 84–85 Checks 153, 156–157 Cruise control, adaptive 111 Driving aids camera (warnings) 103 Checks, routine 156–157 Cruise control by speed limit recognition 106 Driving aids (recommendations) 102 Child lock 82 Cruise control, Driving economically 7 Children 72, 77, 79 dynamic with Stop function 106 Driving modes 98 Children (safety) 82 Dynamic stability control (DSC) 67–68 Child seats 72, 75–77 Child seats, conventional 77, 79 Child seats, i-Size 79 D Child seats, ISOFIX 77–79 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - E Cleaning (advice) 140, 160–161 Digital radio 192, 216 EBFD 67 Closing the boot 31, 35 Date (setting) 198, 222 Eco-driving (advice) 7 Closing the doors 31, 34 Daytime running lamps 56, 170 ECO mode 98 Collision Risk Alert 122–123 Deactivating the passenger airbag 73, 76–77 Economy mode 152 Configuration, vehicle 26 Deadlocking 29, 31 Electric motor 5, 26, 139, 185 Connected applications 214 Deferred charging 27, 141, 143 Electric windows 37 Connection, Defrosting 48 Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) 67 Bluetooth 195–196, 214, 218–219 Defrosting, front 48 Emergency braking assistance (EBA) 67 Connection, MirrorLink 194–195, 213 Demisting 48 Emergency call 65 Connection, Wi-Fi network 214–215 Demisting, front 48 Emergency switching off 88–89 Connectivity 212 Demisting, rear 49 Emergency warning lamps 64, 162 Consumption figures 27 Demisting, rear screen 49 Emissions control system, SCR 21, 158 Container, AdBlue® 158 Dials and gauges 9–10 Energy economy mode 152 Control, emergency boot release 35 Digital instrument panel 10–11 Energy flows 26 Control, emergency door 32–33 Dimensions 186 Energy recovery 21, 98 Control, heated seats 42 Dipstick 19, 154 Engine 157 Controls, steering mounted 94–97 Direction indicators 56–57, 170–171 Engine compartment 153 Control stalk, lighting 55, 57 Display screen, instrument panel 9 Engine, Diesel 138, 153, 162, 184 Control stalk, wipers 60–63 Domestic charging 143–146, 185 Engine, petrol 153, 182 Control unit 141, 143 Doors 34 Engines 181–182, 184
227 Alphabetical index
Environment 7, 34, 84 Fusebox, dashboard 172 Hi-Fi system 51 ESC (electronic stability control) 67 Fusebox, engine compartment 172, 174–175 High voltage 139 Expanded traffic sign recognition 107 Fuses 171–172, 174–175 Hill Assist Descent Control (HADC) 69 Hill start assist 98–99 Histogramme, fuel consumption 27 Horn 65 F G Horn for pedestrians 65, 84 Fatigue detection 125 Gauge, fuel 138 Filling the AdBlue® tank 155, 159 Gearbox, Filling the fuel tank 138–139 automatic 92, 94–97, 99–101, 156, 177 Filter, air 156 Gearbox, manual 92, 99–101, 156 I Filter, oil 156 Gear lever, manual gearbox 92 Ignition 88, 220 Filter, particle 156 Gear shift indicator ~ Ignition on 88 Filter, passenger compartment 45, 156 Gear efficiency indicator 99 Ignition switch 86–87 Fitting a wheel 167–168 Glove box 50 Immobiliser, electronic 85 Fitting roof bars 149–150 G.P.S. 209 Indicator, AdBlue® range 20 Fittings, boot 53 Indicator, coolant temperature 20 Fittings, interior 50 Indicator, engine oil level 19 Flap, charging 27, 141, 143, 145–146 Indicators, direction 56, 171 Flap, fuel filler 138–139 H Inflating tyres 157, 186 Flashing indicators 56–57, 171 Hazard warning lamps 64, 162 Inflating tyres and accessories Floor, boot, adjustable 54 headlamp adjustment 57 (using the kit) 164–165 Fluid, brake 155 Headlamp adjustment 57 Infrared camera 103 Fluid, engine coolant 155 Headlamps, automatic dipping 58–59 Instrument panel 11, 23–24, 103 Foglamps, front 55, 59 Headlamps, automatic illumination 57–58 Instrument panel, LCD 9 Foglamps, rear 55, 171 Headlamps, dipped beam 170 Instrument panel, matrix 9 Folding the rear seats 44 Headlamps, halogen 57, 170 Instrument panels 9–10 Frequency (radio) 216 Headlamps, main beam 170 Internet browser 210, 214 Fuel 7, 138 Head restraints, front 40 ISOFIX mountings 77, 79 Fuel consumption 7 Head restraints, rear 44 Fuel tank 138–139 Heating 45 Full Park Assist 133 Heating, programmable 27, 49
228 Alphabetical index
Level, engine coolant 20, 155 Mat 52, 103 J Level, engine oil 19, 154 Menu 194 Jack 163–164, 166, 217 Levels and checks 153–155 Menu, main 26 Jump starting 176 Level, screenwash fluid 61, 155 Menus (audio) 189–190, 202–203 Light-emitting diodes - LEDs 56, 170 Menu short cuts 26 Lighting, cornering 59 Messages 220 Lighting dimmer 23 Messages, quick 220 K Lighting, exterior 55 Mirror, rear view 43 Key 28–29, 32–33 Lighting, guide-me home 29, 58 Mirrors, door 42–43, 49, 121 Key, electronic 30–31 Lighting, interior 52–53 Mirror, vanity 50 Keyless Entry and Starting 30–31, 87–88 Lighting, mood 53 Misfuel prevention 139 Key not recognised 88–89 Lighting, welcome 58 Motor, electric 5, 88, 139, 185 Key with remote control 28, 85–86 Loading 149–150 Mountings, ISOFIX 77, 79 Kit, hands-free 195–196, 218–219 Load reduction mode 152 Kit, puncture repair 163–164 Locating your vehicle 29 Kit, temporary puncture repair 162–165 Locking 29, 31 Locking from the inside 32 N Locking the doors 32 Navigation 207–209 Low fuel level 138 Navigation, connected 210–212 L Low traction battery level 22 Labels, identification 186 Lumbar 41 Lamp, boot 54 Lamps, parking 57 O Lamps, rear 171 Obstacle detection 126 Lams with “Full LED" technology 57, 59 M Oil change 154 Lane assist 111, 114–116, 118 Mains socket (domestic network) 141 Oil consumption 154 Lane departure warning active 118, 121 Maintenance (advice) 140, 160 OIl, engine 154 Leather (care) 161 Maintenance, routine 103, 156–157 On-board tools 54, 162–164 LEDs - Light-emitting diodes 56, 170 Manoeuvring aids (recommendations) 102 Opening the bonnet 152–153 Level, AdBlue® 155 Map reading lamps 52 Opening the boot 30, 35 Level, brake fluid 155 Markings, identification 186 Opening the doors 30, 34 Level, Diesel additive 156 Massage function 41 Opening the windows 28
229 Alphabetical index
Replacing the passenger P R compartment filter 156 Pads, brake 157 Radar (warnings) 102 Reservoir, screenwash 155 Paint 161, 186 Radio 190–191, 215 Reset trip 24 Paint colour code 186 Radio, digital Rev counter 10 Park Assist 130 (Digital Audio Broadcasting - DAB) 192, 216 Reversing camera 103, 127–128 Parking brake 89, 157 Range, AdBlue 20, 155 Roof bars 149–150 Parking brake, electric 89–92, 157 RDS 191, 216 Roof, opening 38 Parking sensors, audible and visual 126 Reading lamps 52 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 162 Parking sensors, front 126 Rear screen, demisting 49 Parking sensors, rear 126 Recharging the battery 177–178 Personalisation 11 Recharging Plates, identification 186 the traction battery 139, 143, 145–146 S Player, Apple® 193, 217 Recirculation, air 48 Safety, children 73, 75–77, 79 Player, USB 192, 217 Recovery 179–180 Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel) 156 Port, USB 50, 192, 212, 217 Reduction of electrical load 152 Screen menu map 194 Power 21 Regeneration of the particle filter 156 Screens, very cold conditions 151 Power indicator 21 Regenerative braking Screenwash 61 Pressures, tyres 157, 166, 186 (deceleration by engine braking) 97–98 Screenwash, front 61 Pre-tensioning seat belts 72 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation Screenwash, rear 61 Priming the fuel system 162 detection system 102 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) 21, 158 Profiles 197, 221 Reinitialising the remote control 34 Seat angle 41 Protecting children 73, 75–77, 79 Reminder, key in ignition 87 Seat belts 71–72, 77 Proximity Keyless Entry & Start 30 Reminder, lighting on 56 Seat belts, rear 71 Public fast charging station 141, 145 Remote control 28–32 Seat, rear bench 43 Puncture 164, 166 Remote functions 27, 49 Seats, electric 41 Removing a wheel 167–168 Seats, front 40–41 Removing the mat 52 Seats, heated 42 Replacing bulbs 169–171 Seats, rear 43–44, 75 Q Replacing fuses 171–172 Selector, drive 97 Quiet vehicle warning sound 65, 84 Replacing the air filter 156 Selector, gear 94–97 Replacing the oil filter 156 Sensors (warnings) 103
230 Alphabetical index
Serial number, vehicle 186 Stop & Start 25, 46, 49, 99–101, Touch-sensitive reading lamps 53 Service indicator 19, 23 138, 152, 156, 179 Towball, quickly detachable 147–149 Servicing 19, 156–157 Storage 50 Towbar 68, 146 Settings, equipment 26 Storage box 54 Towbar with quickly Settings, system 197, 221 Storage wells 54 detachable towball 147–149 Sidelamps 56–57, 170 Sunshine sensor 45 Towed loads 181–182, 184 Side parking sensors 127 Sun visor 50 Towing another vehicle 179–180 Smartphone 27, 49 Superfast charging 145–146, 185 Traction battery 22, 139–140, 185 Snow chains 101, 150 Suspension 157 Traction battery charge 139, 143, 145–146 Snow screen 151 Switching off the engine 86, 88 Traction control (ASR) 67–68 Socket, 12 V accessory 51 Synchronising the remote control 34 Traffic information (TMC) 209 Socket, auxiliary 193, 217 Trailer 68, 146 Socket, Jack 217 Trailer stability assist (TSA) 68 Speakers 51 Trajectory control systems 67 Speed limiter 106–108 T Triangle, warning 162 Speed limit recognition 104–105 Tables of engines 185 Trip computer 24–25 Speedometer 9–10, 103 Tables of fuses 172, 174–175 Trip distance recorder 23 Sport mode 98 Tank, fuel 138–139 Tyres 157, 186 Spotlamps, side 58 Technical data 182, 184–185 Tyre under-inflation detection 101, 166 Stability control (ESC) 67–68 Telephone 51, 195–197, 218–220 Starting a Diesel engine 138 Temperature, coolant 20 Starting the engine 86, 88 Thermal comfort consumption indicator 22 Starting the vehicle 86–87, 94–97 Thermal comfort equipment 22 U Starting using another battery 88, 176 Thermal preconditioning of the passenger Under-inflation (detection) 101 State of charge, battery 26 compartment 27, 49 Unlocking 28, 30 Station, radio 190–191, 215–216 Time (setting) 198, 222 Unlocking from the inside 32 Stay, bonnet 153 TMC (Traffic info) 209 Unlocking the boot 29, 31 Steering mounted controls, audio 188, 202 Tool box 54 Unlocking the doors 32 Steering wheel, adjustment 42 Tools 162–164 Unlocking the tailgate 31 Stickers, customising ~ Stickers, Topping-up AdBlue® 159 Updating the date 198, 222 expressive 161 Top Tether (fixing) 77, 79 Updating the time 198, 222 Stopping the vehicle 86–88, 94–97 Total distance recorder 23 USB 192, 212, 217 Touch screen 25–27, 49
231 Alphabetical index V Ventilation 45 Video 217 Visibility 48 Visiopark 1 127 Voice commands 204–207
W Wallbox 141 Warning and indicator lamps 12 Warning lamp, driver''s seat belt not fastened 71 Warning lamps 12, 23 Warning lamp, seat belts 71 Warnings and indicators 12 Washing 103 Washing (advice) 140, 160–161 Weights 181–182, 184 Welcome lighting 29, 58 Wheel, spare 157, 162–164, 166 Windscreen, heated 49 Windscreen wipers 60, 62 Wiper blades (changing) 61–62 Wiper, rear 61 Wipers 60, 62–63 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive 62–63
232
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, in accordance with the provisions of the European legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End-of-Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells. Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.
Printed in the EU
11-19
www.peugeot.com *19P24.0040* ANG. 19P24.0040